Manual Mercedes CLK PDF

CLK 320
CLK 500
CLK 55 AMG
Our company and staff congratulate you

on the purchase of your new
Mercedes-Benz.
Please read this manual carefully, then

return it to your vehicle where it will be
handy for your reference.
Your selection of our product is a demonstration of your trust in our company

name. Furthermore, it exemplifies your desire to own an automobile that will be as
easy as possible to operate and provide
years of service.
Please follow the recommendations

contained in this manual. They are designed to acquaint you with the operation of your Mercedes-Benz.
Please pay attention to the warnings

and cautions contained in this manual.
They are designed to help improve the
safety of the vehicle operator and occupants.
Your Mercedes-Benz represents the efforts of many skilled engineers and craftsmen. To help assure your driving pleasure,
and also the safety of you and your passengers, we ask you to make a small investment of time:
We extend our best wishes for many miles

of safe, pleasurable driving.
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
A DaimlerChrysler Company
Contents
Introduction .......................................... 9
Product information................................ 9
Operators Manual ............................... 10
Service and warranty information .. 10
Important notice for California
retail buyers and lessees of
Mercedes-Benz automobiles .......... 11
Maintenance .................................. 12
Roadside Assistance ...................... 12
Change of address or ownership.... 12
Operating your vehicle
outside the USA or Canada ............ 13
Where to find it.................................... 14
Symbols............................................... 15
Operating safety .................................. 16
Proper use of the vehicle ............... 16
Problems with your vehicle.................. 17
Reporting safety defects...................... 18
Reporting safety defects ................ 18
At a glance .......................................... 19
Cockpit................................................. 20
Instrument cluster ................................ 22
Multifunction steering wheel ................ 24
Center console ..................................... 25
Upper part ...................................... 25
Lower part ...................................... 26
Overhead control panel ........................ 27
Door control panel................................ 28
Getting started ...................................

Unlocking .............................................
Unlocking with the SmartKey .........
Unlocking with KEYLESS-GO*.........
Adjusting ..............................................
Seats ..............................................
Steering wheel................................
Mirrors............................................
Driving..................................................
Fastening the seat belts .................
Starting the engine .........................
Switching on headlamps.................
Turn signals and high beam ............
Windshield wipers...........................
Problems while driving....................
Parking and locking..............................
Parking brake .................................
Switching off headlamps.................
Turning off the engine.....................
29
30
30
32
34
34
37
38
40
40
43
47
48
48
51
52
53
54
54
Contents
Safety and Security ...........................

Occupant safety...................................
Airbags ...........................................
Seat belts .......................................
Roll bars .........................................
Children in the vehicle....................
Blocking of rear side
window operation...........................
Panic alarm ..........................................
Activating .......................................
Deactivating ...................................
Driving safety systems.........................
ABS ................................................
BAS ................................................
ESP.................................................
Anti-theft systems................................
Immobilizer.....................................
Anti-theft alarm system ..................
Tow-away alarm .............................
57
58
59
64
68
69
74
75
75
75
76
77
78
79
82
82
83
84
Controls in detail ............................... 87

Locking and unlocking ......................... 88
SmartKeys...................................... 88
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* ........ 91
Opening the doors
from the inside ............................... 97
Opening the trunk .......................... 98
Closing the trunk.......................... 100
Trunk lid
opening/closing system* ............ 100
Trunk lid emergency release ........ 105
Separately locking the trunk ........ 106
Separately unlocking the trunk .... 107
Automatic central locking ............ 107
Locking and unlocking
from the inside ............................. 108
Seats ................................................. 109
Easy-entry/exit feature ................ 109
Removing and installing
front seat head restraints............. 110
Rear seats head restraints ........... 111
Multicontour seat*....................... 112
Seat ventilation* .......................... 113
Seat heating*............................... 114
Memory function ...............................

Storing positions into memory .....
Recalling positions from memory.
Storing exterior rear view
mirror parking position ................
Lighting .............................................
Exterior lamp switch ....................
Combination switch .....................
Hazard warning flasher ................
Interior lighting ............................
Door entry lamps .........................
Instrument cluster .............................
Instrument cluster illumination ....
Coolant temperature indicator.....
Trip odometer ..............................
Tachometer..................................
Outside temperature indicator .....
116
117
117
118
119
119
123
123
124
125
126
126
127
127
127
128
Contents
Control system ..................................

Multifunction display....................
Multifunction steering wheel........
Menus ..........................................
Standard display menu ................
AUDIO menu ................................
NAV menu....................................
Distronic* menu...........................
Malfunction memory menu ..........
Settings menu..............................
Trip computer menu.....................
TEL menu* ...................................
Automatic transmission.....................
One-touch gearshifting.................
Gear ranges .................................
Gear selector lever position .........
Steering wheel gearshift control
(Speedshift) CLK 55 AMG ............
Program mode selector switch.....
Accelerator position.....................
Manual shift program
CLK 55 AMG ................................
Emergency operation
(Limp Home Mode) ......................
129
129
130
132
134
134
137
137
138
139
152
154
157
158
159
160
161
163
163
164
166
Good visibility ..................................... 167

Windshield wipers......................... 167
Headlamp cleaning system* ......... 167
Rear view mirror ........................... 168
Sun visors ..................................... 170
Rear window defroster.................. 171
Automatic climate control .................. 172
Setting the temperature................ 175
Adjusting air distribution............... 176
Adjusting air volume ..................... 177
Maximum cooling MAXCOOL ........ 177
Defrosting ..................................... 177
Air recirculation mode .................. 178
Charcoal filter ............................... 179
Deactivating the
climate control system ................. 180
Air conditioning............................. 181
Residual heat and ventilation*...... 181
Rear passenger compartment
adjustable air vents....................... 182
Audio system...................................... 183

Audio and telephone, operation.... 183
Operating safety ........................... 183
Sound system ............................... 183
Operating and display elements ... 184
Button and soft key operation ...... 186
Operation...................................... 186
Radio operation ............................ 189
Satellite radio (SAT)* (USA only)... 192
Cassette operation ....................... 196
CD changer* operation................. 199
Telephone* operation ................... 203
Power windows .................................. 210
Opening and
closing the windows ..................... 210
Synchronizing power windows...... 214
Soft top .............................................. 215
Opening and closing the soft top .. 215
Driving systems.................................. 226
Cruise control ............................... 226
Distronic* ..................................... 229
Parktronic (Parking assist)* .......... 241
Contents
Loading ..............................................
Ski sack*......................................
Loading instructions.....................
Useful features ..................................
Interior storage spaces ................
Ashtrays .......................................
Cigarette lighter ...........................
Floormats* ...................................
Telephone*...................................
Tele Aid* ......................................
Garage door opener .....................
245
245
249
250
250
253
254
255
256
257
265
Operation .........................................
The first 1000 miles (1500 km).........
Driving instructions............................
Drive sensibly save fuel.............
Drinking and driving .....................
Pedals ..........................................
Power assistance .........................
Brakes..........................................
Driving off ....................................
Parking.........................................
Tires .............................................
Hydroplaning................................
Tire traction..................................
Tire speed rating ..........................
Winter driving instructions ...........
Standing water.............................
Passenger compartment ..............
Driving abroad..............................
Control and operation
of radio transmitters ....................
Catalytic converter.......................
Emission control ..........................
Coolant temperature....................
271
272
273
273
273
273
273
274
275
275
276
277
277
278
279
280
280
280
281
281
282
283
At the gas station ..............................

Refueling......................................
Check regularly and
before a long trip .........................
Engine compartment .........................
Hood ............................................
Engine oil .....................................
Transmission fluid level................
Coolant ........................................
Battery .........................................
Windshield washer system and
headlamp cleaning system*.........
Tires and wheels................................
Important guidelines ....................
Life of tires...................................
Direction of rotation.....................
Checking tire inflation pressure ...
Rotating wheels ...........................
Winter driving ....................................
Winter tires ..................................
Block heater*...............................
Snow chains.................................
284
284
286
287
287
288
291
292
294
295
296
297
297
297
298
299
300
300
301
301
Contents
Maintenance......................................
Clearing the service indicator ......
Service term exceeded ................
Calling up the service indicator....
Resetting the service indicator.....
Vehicle care.......................................
Cleaning and care of vehicle ........
302
302
302
303
303
304
304
Practical hints .................................. 311

What to do if ? ................................. 312
Lamps in instrument cluster ......... 312
Lamp in center console................. 319
Messages in the display................ 320
Where will I find...? ............................. 343
First aid kit.................................... 343
Vehicle tool kit.............................. 343
Minispare wheel............................ 346
Unlocking/locking in an emergency... 348
Unlocking the vehicle.................... 348
Locking the vehicle ....................... 349
Changing batteries in
the SmartKey/ SmartKey
with KEYLESS-GO* ....................... 350
Fuel filler flap ................................ 352
Manually unlocking
the gear selector lever .................. 352
Opening/closing in an emergency ..... 353
Operating roll bars manually ......... 353
Soft top emergency operation ...... 355
Replacing bulbs .................................. 372

Bulbs............................................. 372
Replacing bulbs for front lamps .... 374
Side marker lamp bulb.................. 377
Replacing bulbs for rear lamps ..... 378
Replacing wiper blades ...................... 379
Removing wiper blades................. 379
Installing wiper blades .................. 379
Flat tire............................................... 380
Preparing the vehicle .................... 380
Mounting the Minispare wheel...... 380
Battery ............................................... 385
Disconnecting the battery ............ 386
Removing the battery ................... 386
Charging and reinstalling battery.. 386
Reconnecting the battery ............. 387
Jump starting...................................... 388
Towing the vehicle.............................. 390
Towing the vehicle ........................ 390
Installing towing eye bolt .............. 392
Fuses.................................................. 394
Fuse box in
passenger compartment............... 394
Fuse box in engine compartment . 395
Auxiliary fuse box in trunk ............ 396
Contents
Technical data..................................
Spare parts service ............................
Warranty coverage.............................
Loss of Service and Warranty
Information Booklet......................
Identification labels............................
Layout of poly-V-belt drive .................
CLK 320/CLK 500/CLK 55 AMG.
Engine................................................
Rims and tires....................................
Same size tires .............................
Mixed size tires ............................
Minispare wheel ...........................
Electrical system................................
Main dimensions................................
Weights..............................................
397
398
399
399
400
401
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. .........

Capacities ....................................
Engine oils....................................
Engine oil additives ......................
Air conditioning refrigerant ..........
Brake fluid....................................
Premium unleaded gasoline .........
Fuel requirements ........................
Gasoline additives ........................
Coolants.......................................
headlamp cleaning system*.........
Consumer information .......................
Uniform tire quality grading .........
410
410
412
412
412
412
413
413
413
414
416
417
417
Technical terms............................... 419
Index................................................. 427
Introduction
Product information
Product information
Please observe the following in your own
best interest:
We recommend using genuine
Mercedes-Benz parts as well as conversion
parts and accessories explicitly approved
by us for your vehicle model.
We have tested these parts to determine
their reliability, safety and special suitability for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
We are unable to make an assessment for

other products and therefore cannot be
held responsible for them, even if in individual cases an official approval or authorization by governmental or other agencies
should exist. Use of such parts and accessories could adversely affect the safety,
performance or reliability of your vehicle.
Please do not use them.
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts as well as

conversion parts and accessories approved by us are available at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center where you will
receive comprehensive information, also
on permissible technical modifications,
and where proper installation will be performed.
Introduction
Operators Manual
Operators Manual
This Operators Manual contains a great
deal of useful information. We urge you to
read it carefully and familiarize yourself
with the vehicle before driving.
For your own safety and longer service life
of the vehicle, we urge you to follow the instructions and warnings contained in this
manual. Ignoring them could result in damage to the vehicle or personal injury to you
or others. Vehicle damage caused by failure to follow instructions is not covered by
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Your vehicle may have some or all of the
equipment described in this manual.
Therefore, you may find explanations for
optional equipment not installed in your
vehicle. If you have any questions about
the operation of any equipment, your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will be
glad to demonstrate the proper procedures.
10
We continuously strive to improve our

product, and ask for your understanding
that we reserve the right to make changes
in design and equipment. Therefore, information, illustrations and descriptions in
this Operators Manual might differ from
your vehicle.
Service and warranty information
New Car Limited Warranty,
Optional equipment is also described in

this manual, including operating instructions wherever necessary. Since they are
special-order items, the descriptions and
illustrations herein may vary slightly from
the actual equipment of your vehicle.
Emission System Warranty,
Emission Performance Warranty,
California, Maine, Massachusetts, and

Vermont Emission Control System
Warranty
(California, Maine, Massachusetts, and
Vermont only),
State Warranty Enforcement Laws

(Lemon Laws).
If there are any equipment details that are

not shown or described in this Operators
Manual, your authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center will be glad to inform you of correct
care and operating procedures.
The Operators Manual and Service Booklet are important documents and should be
kept with the vehicle.
The Service and Warranty Information

Booklet contains detailed information
about the warranties covering your
Mercedes-Benz, including:
Introduction
Operators Manual
Important notice for California retail
buyers and lessees of Mercedes-Benz
automobiles
Under California law you may be entitled to
a replacement of your vehicle or a refund
of the purchase price or lease price, if
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or its authorized repair or service facilities fail to fix
one or more substantial defects or malfunctions in the vehicle that are covered by
its express warranty after a reasonable
number of repair attempts. During the period of 18 months from original delivery of
the vehicle or the accumulation of
18000 miles (approx. 29000 km) on the
odometer of the vehicle, whichever occurs
first, a reasonable number of repair attempts is presumed for a retail buyer or
lessee if one or more of the following occurs:
(1) the same substantial defect or malfunction results in a condition that is

likely to cause death or serious bodily
injury if the vehicle is driven, that defect or malfunction has been subject to
repair two or more times, and you have
directly notified Mercedes-Benz USA,
LLC in writing of the need for its repair,
(2) the same substantial defect or malfunction of a less serious nature than
category (1) has been subject to repair
four or more times and you have directly notified us in writing of the need for
its repair, or
(3) the vehicle is out of service by reason

of repair of the same or different substantial defects or malfunctions for a
cumulative total of more than
30 calender days. Written notification
should be sent to us, not a dealer, at
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC, Customer
Assistance Center, One Mercedes
Drive, Montvale, NJ 07645-0350.
11
Introduction
Operators Manual
Maintenance
Roadside Assistance
Change of address or ownership
The Service Booklet describes all the necessary maintenance work which should be
performed at regular intervals.
The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance

Program provides factory trained technical
help in the event of a breakdown. Calls to
the toll-free Roadside Assistance number
will be answered by Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Representatives

24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
If you change your address, be sure to

send in the Change of Address Notice
found in the Service and Warranty Information Booklet, or simply call the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center (in the USA) at
1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer Service (in Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. It is in
your own interest that we can contact you
should the need arise.
For additional information refer to the

Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Program Brochure in your glove box.
If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all

literature with the vehicle to make it available to the next operator.
Always have the Service Booklet with you

when you take the vehicle to your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for service.
The service advisor will record each service in the booklet for you.
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA)

1-800-387-0100 (in Canada)
If you bought this vehicle used, be sure to

send in the Notice of Purchase of Used
Car found in the Service and Warranty Information Booklet, or call the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (in the USA) at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes,
or Customer Service (in Canada) at
1-800-387-0100.
12
Introduction
Operators Manual
Operating your vehicle outside the USA
or Canada
If you plan to operate your vehicle in foreign countries, please be aware that:
Certain Mercedes-Benz models are available for delivery in Europe under our European Delivery Program. For details, consult
your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or
write to:
service facilities or replacement parts

may not be readily available,
In the USA:
unleaded gasoline for vehicles with catalytic converters may not be available;
the use of leaded fuels will damage the
catalysts,
gasoline may have a considerably lower octane rating, and improper fuel can
cause engine damage.

European Delivery Department
One Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
In Canada:
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
European Delivery Department
849 Eglinton Avenue East
Toronto, Ontario M4G 2L5
13
Introduction
Where to find it
Where to find it
This Operators Manual is designed to provide comprehensive support information
for you, the vehicle operator. Each section
has its own reference color so you can find
information quickly.
At a glance
Here you will find an overview of all the
controls that can be operated from the
drivers seat.
Controls in detail
Technical data
Here you will find detailed information

about the equipment installed in your vehicle. This section expands on the Getting
started section and also describes technical innovations. If you are already familiar
with the basic functions of your vehicle,
this section will be of particular interest to
you.
All important technical data for your vehicle can be found in this section.
Operation
Getting started
Here you will find all the information you
need for your first drive. You should read
this section first if this is your first
Mercedes-Benz vehicle or if you are renting or borrowing this vehicle.
Safety and Security

Here you will find descriptions of the safety
features in your vehicle.
14
Here you will find all the information you

need for the proper operation of your vehicle.
Practical hints
This section provides fast assistance for
dealing with problems you may encounter.
Indexes
The glossary provides explanations of the
most important technical terms.
The table of contents and the index are designed to help you find information quickly
and easily.
The following publications are part of your
vehicle documentation:
this Operators Manual
the Service Booklet
Separate operating instructions will be

provided as required depending on the
equipment options installed in your vehicle.
Introduction
Symbols
Symbols
The following symbols are found in this
Operators Manual:
*
Optional equipment is identified

with an asterisk. Since standard
equipment varies between models,
the descriptions and illustrations in
this manual may differ slightly from
the actual equipment of your
vehicle.
Warning!
Warning notices draw your attention to hazards that may endanger your health or life,
or the health or life of others.
This symbol points to instructions for

you to follow.
A number of these symbols appearing

in succession indicates a multiple-step
procedure.
Page
!
Highlights hazards that may result in
damage to your vehicle.
This continuation symbol marks

an interrupted procedure which
will be continued on the next
page.
->
In the glossary of technical

terms, this symbol is used to indicate cross-reference to term
definitions.
Display
Words appearing in the multifunction display are printed in

the type shown here.
i
Helpful hints or further information you
may find useful.
This symbol tells you where to

look for further information on a
topic.
15
Introduction
Operating safety
Operating safety
Warning!
Work improperly carried out on electronic

components and associated software could
cause them to cease functioning. Because
the vehicles electronic components are interconnected, any modifications made may
produce an undesired effect on other systems. Electronic malfunctions could seriously impair the operating safety of your
vehicle.
See your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
for repairs or modifications to electronic
components.
Other improper work or modifications on the
vehicle could also have a negative impact on
the operating safety of the vehicle.
Some safety systems only function while the
engine is running. You should therefore never turn off the engine while driving.
16
Warning!
Heavy blows against the vehicle underbody

or tires/wheels, for example when running
over an obstacle, road debris or a pothole,
may cause serious damage and impair the
operating safety of your vehicle. If you feel a
sudden significant vibration or ride disturbance, or you suspect that damage to your
vehicle has occurred, you should turn on
your hazard warning flashers, carefully slow
down, and drive with caution to an area
which is a safe distance from the road.
Inspect the vehicle underbody and
tires/wheels for possible damage. If the vehicle appears unsafe, have it towed to the
nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
or other qualified maintenance or repair facility for further inspection or repairs.
Proper use of the vehicle

Proper use of the vehicle requires that you
are familiar with the following information
and rules:
the safety precautions in this manual
the Technical data section in this

manual
traffic rules and regulations
motor vehicle laws and safety standards

Warning!
Various warning labels are attached to your

vehicle. These warning labels are intended
to make you and others aware of various
risks. You should not remove any of these
warning labels unless explicitly instructed to
do so by information on the label itself. Removal of any of these labels may cause you
and others to be unaware of certain risks
which may result in an accident and/or personal injury.
Introduction
Problems with your vehicle
Problems with your vehicle
If you should experience a problem with your vehicle, particularly one that you believe may affect its safe operation, we urge you to
immediately contact your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center to have the problem diagnosed and corrected if required. If the matter is
not handled to your satisfaction, please discuss the problem with the Mercedes-Benz Center management, or if necessary contact us
at one of the following addresses:
In the USA:
Customer Assistance Center
One Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
In Canada:
Customer Relations Department
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
849 Eglinton Avenue East
Toronto, Ontario, M4G 2L5
17
Introduction
Reporting safety defects
For the USA only:
The following text is published as required of manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the
National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer,
or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (or 366-0123 in Washington, D.C. area) or
write to: NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from the Hotline.
18
At a glance
Cockpit
Instrument cluster
Multifunction steering wheel
Center console
Overhead control panel
Door control panel
19
At a glance
Cockpit
Cockpit
20
At a glance
Cockpit
Item
1 Headlamp washer switch*
Page
167
2 Combination switch
Item
8 Front Parktronic* warning
indicator
Turn signals
48
9 Overhead control panel
Windshield wipers
48
a Glove box
High beam
48
b Center console
3 Cruise control lever
c Hood lock release
Page
243
27
250
25, 26
287
d Horn
Cruise control
226
Distronic*
229
e Steering wheel adjustment

stalk
38
4 Multifunction steering
wheel
24,
130
f Parking brake pedal
46
5 Instrument cluster
22,
126
g Door control panel
28
h Parking brake release
46
j Exterior lamp switch
47,
119
6 Lever for voice control

system*, see separate operating instructions
7 Starter switch
31
k Exterior rear view mirror

adjustment
39
21
At a glance
Instrument cluster
Instrument cluster
22
At a glance
Instrument cluster
Item
1
Page
L Left turn signal indi-
48
Item
6
K Right turn signal indi-
cator lamp
2
v ESP warning lamp
Basic display with outside

temperature display
316
129
134,
144
Status indicator with malfunction warning message
134,
138
Trip odometer
127
l Distance warning
316
lamp
Vehicles without Distronic*:

Warning lamp without function. It illuminates with the
ignition on. It should go out
when the engine is running.
48
7 Coolant temperature indicator with:
127
Coolant temperature
315,
329
warning lamp
8 Tachometer with:
1 Supplemental
restraint system
indicator lamp
- Antilock Brake Sys-
Page
a Clock with:
144
313
except Canada
3 Brake warning lamp,

Canada only
? Engine malfunction
127
indicator lamp
318,
339
C Roll bar warning lamp
312
tem (ABS) warning

lamp
< Seat belt non-usage
Item
; Brake warning lamp,
cator lamp
3 Speedometer
4 Multifunction display
with:
Page
314
b Fuel display with:
W Fuel reserve warning
317
lamp
c Reset button for:
warning lamp
318,
339
A High beam headlamp
123
indicator
9 Main odometer with:
Gear selector lever position
129
Program mode
129
Resetting trip odometer
126
Adjusting instrument
cluster illumination
126
Confirming new time settings
144
23
At a glance
Item
Page
1 Multifunction display
Operating control system
129
130
2 Selecting the submenu or

setting the volume
24
for next system

for previous system
j for next display
k for previous display
3 Telephone*: Press button

to dial a call
155
155
to end a call
155
to reject an incoming call
4 Menu systems: Press

button
5 Moving within a menu:

Press button
down / to decrease
up / to increase
to take a call
Item
Page
At a glance
Center console
Center console
Upper part
Item
Page
1 Seat heater*, drivers side

Seat ventilation*, drivers
side
114
113
2 Parking assist* (Parktronic

system*) deactivation
switch
244
3 ESP control switch
114
9 PASS. AIRBAG OFF

indicator lamp
71,
319
134
172,
4 Hazard warning flasher

on/off switch
123
5 Central locking switch
108
b Automatic climate control
6 Rear head restraints, lowering switch
111
Anti-theft alarm system indicator lamp
Page
8 Seat heater*, passenger

side
Seat ventilation*,
passenger side
a Audio system or
COMAND* (see separate
operating instructions)
7 Tow-away alarm switch
79
Item
Rear window defroster

c Ashtray
113
171
253
84
85
25
At a glance
Center console
Lower part
Item
1 KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
button
26
Page
33
2 Soft top switch
218
3 Storage compartment
251
4 Thumbwheel for setting

distance in Distronic*
236
5 Distance warning function* on/off switch
237
Item
Page
6 Program mode selector for

automatic transmission
163,
164
7 Gear selector lever for

automatic transmission
157
At a glance
Item
Page
1 Tele Aid (emergency call

system) button
257
2 Hands-free microphone for

Tele Aid (emergency call
system), telephone* and
voice control system* (see
separate operating instructions)
256
3 Temperature sensor for automatic climate control
172
Item
Page
4 Right reading lamp on/off
125
5 Interior lighting control
124
6 Rear view mirror
38,
168
7 Garage door opener
265
8 Left reading lamp on/off
125
27
At a glance
Door control panel
Door control panel
Item
1 Door handle
97
2 Seat adjustment
35,
109
3 Memory function (for storing seat, exterior mirror

and steering wheel settings)
116
4 Switches for opening/closing front door windows
213
5 Rear window override

switch
28
Page
74
6 Switches for opening/closing rear windows
213
7 Remote trunk lid release

switch
Trunk lid opening/closing
system switch*
98
100
Getting started
Unlocking
Adjusting
Driving
Parking and locking
29
Getting started
Unlocking
Unlocking
The Getting started section provides an
overview of the vehicles most basic functions. First-time Mercedes-Benz owners
should pay special attention to the information given here.
Unlocking with the SmartKey
Press unlock button on the

SmartKey.
All turn signal lamps flash once. The
locking knobs in the doors move up.
If you are already familiar with the basic

functions described here, the Controls in
detail section will provide you with further
information. The corresponding page references are located at the end of each segment.
Get in the vehicle and insert the

SmartKey in the starter switch.
SmartKey with remote control
1 Lock button
2 Opening button for trunk lid
3 Unlock button
4 Panic button ( page 75)
30
Opening a door causes the windows on

that side of the car to open slightly.
They will return to the up position when
the door is closed.
For more information, see Locking and
unlocking ( page 88).
Getting started
Unlocking
Starter switch positions
Warning!
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the

SmartKey from the starter switch, take the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* with you and
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
Starter switch
0 For removing SmartKey

1 Power supplies to some electrical consumers, such as seat adjustment
2 Ignition (power supply for all electrical
consumers) and driving position
3 Starting position
!
If the SmartKey cannot be turned in the
starter switch, the battery may not be
sufficiently charged.
Check the battery and charge it

if necessary ( page 385).
Get a jump start ( page 388).
To prevent accelerated battery discharge and a possible dead battery, always remove the SmartKey from the
starter switch when the engine is not in
operation.
The SmartKey can only be removed

from the starter switch with the gear
selector lever in position P.
31
Getting started
Unlocking
Unlocking with KEYLESS-GO*
If you have the KEYLESS-GO function, your
vehicle checks whether the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO is valid when you pull the
door handle. If your SmartKey is valid, the
doors will unlock, and you can open them.
The function of the SmartKey overrules the
KEYLESS-GO function.
i
To unlock the vehicle, the SmartKey
with KEYLESS-GO must be outside the
vehicle, no further than approx. 3 feet
(1 meter) away from the door.
Pull the door handle.

The turn signal lamps flash once. The
locking knobs on the doors move up.
If the SmartKey is inside the vehicle, pressing the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button on
the gear selector lever corresponds to
turning the SmartKey to the various starter
switch positions.
32
Warning!
When leaving the vehicle, always take the

SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO with you, and
Getting started
Unlocking
Position 1
Ignition (or position 2)
Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button once.

This supplies power to some electrical
consumers, such as seat adjustment.
i
If you now press the KEYLESS-GO
start/stop button
1 KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be

located in the vehicle.
once again, the ignition (position 2)

is switched on.
twice, the power supply is again

switched off.
Before you press the KEYLESS-GO

start/stop button, the vehicles on-board
electronics have status 0 (as with
SmartKey removed).
Make sure the gear selector lever is set

to P.
Do not depress the brake pedal.
Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button twice.

This supplies power to all electrical
consumers. All the lamps in the instrument cluster come on.
i
If you now press the KEYLESS-GO
start/stop button once, the power supply is again switched off.
More information can be found in the
Controls in detail section ( page 91).
For information on starting the engine using the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button,
see Starting with KEYLESS-GO*
( page 44).
33
Getting started
Adjusting
Adjusting
Warning!
All seat, head restraint, steering wheel, and

rear view mirror adjustments, as well as fastening of seat belts, must be done before
the vehicle is put into motion.
Do not adjust the drivers seat while driving.

Adjusting the seat while driving could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat
back reclined. Sitting in an excessively reclined position can be dangerous. You could
slide under the seat belt in a collision. If you
slide under it, the belt would apply force at
the abdomen or neck. That could cause serious or fatal injuries. The seat back and seat
belts provide the best restraint when the
wearer is in an upright position and belts are
properly positioned on the body.
34
Warning!
Never place hands under the seat or near

any moving parts while a seat is being
adjusted.
Warning!
Seats
Warning!
Your seat must be adjusted so that you can

correctly fasten your seat belt ( page 40).
Children 12 years old and under must never

ride in the front seat, except in a
Mercedes-Benz authorized BabySmartTM1
compatible child seat, which operates with
the BabySmartTM system installed in the vehicle to deactivate the passenger front airbag when it is properly installed. Otherwise
they will be struck by the airbag when it inflates in a crash. If this happens, serious or
fatal injury will result.

SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* with you, and
lock your vehicle.
According to accident statistics, children

are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in the front
seating positions. Infants and small children
must ride in back seats and be seated in an
appropriate infant or child restraint system,
which is properly secured with the vehicles
seat belt or lower anchors, fully in accordance with the child seat manufacturer's
instructions.
The power seats can also be operated with

the drivers or passenger door open. Do not
leave children unattended in the vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may
cause an accident and/or serious personal
injury.
BabySmart TM is a trademark of Siemens

Automotive Corp.
Getting started
Adjusting
A childs risk of serious or fatal injuries is

significantly increased if the child restraints
are not properly secured in the vehicle and
the child is not properly secured in the child
restraint.
Seat adjustment
The seat adjustment switches are located
in each door.
Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch

to position 1 or 2 ( page 31).
or
Press the KEYLESS GO* start/stop

button once or twice ( page 33).
or
Open the drivers or passenger door.
Seat fore and aft adjustment
Press the switch forward or backward

in the direction of arrow 4.
Adjust seat to a comfortable seating
position that still allows you to reach
the accelerator/brake pedal safely.
The position should be as far to the rear
as possible, consistent with ability to
properly operate controls.
i
When moving the seat, make sure
there are no items in the footwell or behind the seats. Otherwise you could
damage the seats.
1 Head restraint height

2 Seat height
3 Seat cushion tilt
4 Seat fore and aft adjustment
5 Backrest tilt
The memory function ( page 116) lets

you store the setting for the seat position together with the setting for the
steering wheel and the exterior rear
view mirrors.
35
Getting started
Adjusting
Seat cushion tilt
Head restraint height
Press the switch up or down in the direction of arrow 3 until your upper
legs are lightly supported.
Seat backrest tilt
Press the switch forward or backward

in the direction of arrow 5 until your
arms are slightly angled when holding
the steering wheel.
Seat height
Press the switch up or down in the direction of arrow 2.
36
Head restraint tilt
Press the switch up or down in the direction of arrow 1.
Warning!
For your protection, drive only with properly

positioned head restraints.
Adjust head restraint so that the center of
the head restraint supports the back of the
head at eye level. This will reduce the potential for injury to the head and neck in the
event of an accident or similar situation.
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat
head restraints. Head restraints are intended to help reduce injuries during an accident.
Manually adjust the angle of the head restraint.
Push or pull on the lower edge of the

head restraint cushion.
For more information, see Seats

( page 109).
Getting started
Adjusting
Folding front seat backrests forward
Folding backrests forward
Pull release lever 1 forward and fold

the seat backrest forward.
The head restraint will automatically
move down.
Folding backrests back
1 Release lever
i
In addition to the front seat backrests,
the front seat cushions can also be
shifted forward to permit easy access
to the rear whenever the seat is located
in the rear half of its adjustment range.
Swivel backrest forward by pulling the
release lever until the seat moves in a
combined forward and upward movement.
Fold and press the backrest rearward

until it engages in driving position.
The head restraint returns to its previous position.
For more information, see Easy-entry/exit feature ( page 109).
Steering wheel
Warning!
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. Adjusting the steering wheel while driving could cause the driver to lose control of
the vehicle.
lock your vehicle.
The steering wheel adjustment feature can
also be operated with the drivers door
open. Do not leave children unattended in
the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and/or serious
personal injury.
37
Getting started
Adjusting
Steering wheel adjustment
Adjusting steering column in or out
The stalk for steering wheel adjustment is

located on the steering column (lower left).
Move stalk forward or back in the direction of arrow 1 until a comfortable

steering wheel position is reached with
your arms slightly bent at the elbow.
Mirrors
Adjust the interior and exterior rear view
mirrors before driving so that you have a
good view of the road and traffic conditions.
Adjusting steering column up or down
1 Adjusting steering column, in or out

2 Adjusting steering column, up or down

to position 1or 2 ( page 31).
or
Press the KEYLESS GO* start/stop

button once or twice ( page 33).
or
Open the drivers door.
38
Move stalk up or down in the direction

of arrow 2.
Make sure your legs can move freely
and all the displays (incl. malfunction
and indicator lamps) on the instrument
cluster are clearly visible.
i
you store the setting for the steering
wheel together with the setting for the
seat position and exterior rear view
mirrors.
Warning!
In the case of an accident, liquid electrolyte

may escape the mirror housing if the mirror
glass breaks.
Electrolyte has an irritating effect. Do not allow the liquid to come into contact with
eyes, skin, clothing, or respiratory system.
In case it does, immediately flush affected
area with water, and seek medical help if
necessary.
Interior rear view mirror
Manually adjust the interior rear view

mirror.
For more information, see Rear view mirror ( page 168)
Getting started
Adjusting
Exterior rear view mirror
Warning!
!
If an exterior rear view mirror was forcibly pushed forward (hit from the rear)
or forcibly pushed rearward (hit from
the front), reposition it by applying firm
pressure until it snaps into place. The
mirror housing is now properly positioned and you can adjust the mirror
normally.
Exercise care when using the passenger

side exterior rear view mirror. The mirror
surface is convex (outwardly curved surface
for a wider field of view). Objects in mirror
are closer than they appear. Check your interior rear view mirror or glance over your
shoulder before changing lanes.
!
Electrolyte drops coming into contact
with the vehicle paint finish can only be
completely removed while in their liquid state and by applying plenty of water
The buttons are located above the exterior
lamp switch.
1 Adjustment button
2 Passenger-side exterior rear view mirror button
3 Drivers side exterior rear view mirror
button
Make sure the ignition is switched on.

All the lamps in the instrument cluster
come on.
Press button 3 for the left mirror or

button 2 for the right mirror.
Push adjustment button 1 up, down,

left or right according to the desired
setting.
i
you store the setting for the exterior
rear view mirrors together with the settings for the steering wheel and seat
position.
i
At low ambient temperatures, the mirrors will be heated automatically.
For more information, see Activating exterior rear view mirror parking position
( page 169).
39
Getting started
Driving
Driving
Warning!
Do not lay any objects in the drivers footwell. Be careful that floor mats or carpets in
the drivers footwell have sufficient clearance for the pedals.
During sudden driving or braking maneuvers, the objects could get caught between
the pedals. You could then no longer brake
or accelerate.
Fastening the seat belts
Warning!
Always fasten your seat belt before driving

off. Always make sure your passengers are
properly restrained, even those sitting in the
rear and pregnant women.
Warning!
Failure to wear and properly fasten and position your seat belt greatly increases your
risk of injuries and their likely severity in an
accident. You and your passengers should
always wear seat belts.
If you are ever in an accident, your injuries
can be considerably more severe without
your seat belt properly buckled. Without
your seat belt buckled, you are much more
likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be
ejected from it. You can be seriously injured
or killed.
40
In the same crash, the possibility of injury or

death is lessened if you are wearing your
seat belt. The airbags can only protect as expected if the occupants are using their seat
belts ( page 58).

1

Automotive Corp.
Getting started
Driving

rear seating positions than in the front seating positions. Infants and small children
which is properly secured with the vehicle's
seat belt or lower anchors, fully in accordance with the child seat manufacturer's
instructions.
restraint.
Warning!

backrest reclined. Sitting in an excessively
reclined position can be dangerous. You
could slide under the seat belt in a collision.
If you slide under it, the belt would apply
force at the abdomen or neck. This could
cause serious or even fatal injuries. The seat
backrest and seat belt provide the best restraint when the wearer is in an upright position and the belt is properly positioned on
the body.
Warning!
Warning!
Never let more people ride in the vehicle

than there are seat belts available. Make
sure everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly restrained with a separate seat belt.
Read and observe the additional warning notices printed in the Safety and Security
section ( page 62).
The seat belt presenter for driver and passenger makes it easier to put on the seat
belt.
1 Seat belt presenter

The seat belt presenter slides out when the
corresponding door is closed and the
SmartKey in the starter switch or
KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button are in
position 1 or 2.
41
Getting started
Driving
With a smooth motion, pull the belt out

of the seat belt presenter.
Place the belt over your shoulder.
Push latch plate 1 into buckle 3 until

it clicks.
If necessary, tighten the lap portion to

a snug fit by pulling shoulder portion
up.
Position the lap belt as low as possible

on your hips (over hip joint) and not
across the abdomen.
Place the seat backrest in a nearly upright position.
Never use a seat belt for more than one

person at a time.
Do not fasten a seat belt around a person and another object at the same
time.
Check your seat belt during travel to

ensure that it is properly positioned.
Ensure that the seat belt is always fitted snugly. You should avoid wearing
bulky clothing, such as winter coats,
when traveling in the vehicle.
Proper use of seat belts
1 Latch plate
2 Release button
3 Buckle
42
Do not twist the belt when fastening.
Adjust seat belt so that the shoulder

portion is located as close as possible
to the middle of the shoulder (it should
not touch the neck or pass under the
arm).
Getting started
Driving
Warning!
The seat belt presenter slides back:
Do not pass belts over sharp edges. They

could tear.
Starting the engine
right after you pushed the latch

plate 1 into buckle 3 and heard it
click.
after approximately 30 seconds if you

did not push latch plate 1 into
buckle 3.
Never attempt to make modifications to

seat belts. This could impair the effectiveness of the belts.
if your door is opened.
if you turn the SmartKey in the starter

switch to position 0.
Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly

stressed in an accident must be replaced.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
if you release a front seat backrest and

fold it forward.
Do not allow the belt to get caught in the

door or in the seat adjustment mechanism.
This could damage the belt.
Warning!
Warning!
Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to

your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon
monoxide, and inhaling it can cause unconsciousness and lead to death.
Do not run the engine in confined areas
(such as a garage) which are not properly
ventilated. If you think that exhaust gas
fumes are entering the vehicle while driving,
have the cause determined and corrected
immediately. If you must drive under these
conditions, drive with at least one window
fully open.
The seat belt presenter must be retracted

while the vehicle is in motion. Only when the
seat belt presenter is retracted can the seat
belt be properly positioned on the body and
protect the occupant as intended.
43
Getting started
Driving
Automatic transmission
Starting with the SmartKey
Starting with KEYLESS-GO*

to P.
Do not depress accelerator
You can start your vehicle without the

SmartKey in the starter switch using the
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button on the
gear selector lever.

to position 3 ( page 31) and release it
again immediately ("touch-start").
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be

located in the vehicle.
The engine then starts automatically.
Gearshift pattern for automatic

transmission
P Park position with gear selector lever

lock
R Reverse gear
N Neutral
D Drive position
For more information, see Automatic
transmission ( page 157).
44
Depress the brake pedal.

The gear selector lever lock is released.
For information on turning off the engine

with the SmartKey, see ( page 54).
1 KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
Getting started
Driving

to P.
Do not depress accelerator
Depress the brake pedal during the

starting procedure.
Starting difficulties
Press KEYLESS-GO start/stop

button 1 once.
The engine starts automatically if the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is in the
vehicle.
For information on turning off the engine

with KEYLESS-GO, see Turning off the engine with KEYLESS-GO* ( page 55).
Repeat the starting procedure

( page 43). Remember that extended
starting attempts can drain the battery.
Get a jump start ( page 388).
If the engine does not start as described,

carry out the following steps:
The gear selector lever lock is released.
If you are starting the engine with the

SmartKey, turn SmartKey in starter
switch to position 0 and repeat starting
procedure.
If you are starting the engine with
KEYLESS-GO*: Close any doors that
may be open to allow for better detection of the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO*.
Or:
Start the engine with the SmartKey as
radio signals from another source may
be interfering with the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO*.
If the engine does not start after several

starting attempts, there could be a malfunction in the engine electronics or in the
fuel supply system.
Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz

Center.
45
Getting started
Driving
Parking brake
Warning!

unlocked vehicle. Children could release the
parking brake, which could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury.
i
You can open a locked door from the
inside. Open doors only when conditions are safe to do so.
You can deactivate the automatic locking using the control system
( page 149).
1 Parking brake pedal

2 Parking brake release handle
Driving
If you hear a warning signal when driving off, you have forgotten to release
the parking brake.
Depress the brake pedal.
Release the parking brake.
Move gear selector lever in

position D or R.
Release the parking brake by pulling on

handle 2.
The indicator lamp ; (USA only)
or 3 (Canada only) in the clock
goes out.
Release the brake pedal.
Carefully depress the accelerator

pedal.
Once the vehicle is in motion, the automatic central locking system engages and the
locking knobs drop down.
46
After a cold start, the automatic transmission shifts at a higher engine revolution.
This allows the catalytic converter to reach
its operating temperature earlier.
i
Wait for the gear selection process to
complete before setting the vehicle in
motion.
Getting started
Driving
Warning!
It is dangerous to shift the gear selector lever out of P or N if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly
on the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You
could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and when
your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
!
Simultaneously depressing the accelerator pedal and applying the brake reduces engine performance and causes
premature brake and drivetrain wear.
Warning!
Switching on headlamps
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift

in order to obtain braking action. This could
result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle control. Your vehicles ABS will not prevent this type of loss of control.
!
Place the gear selector lever in
position R only when the vehicle is
stopped in order to avoid damaging the
transmission.
!
Do not run cold engine at high engine
speeds. Running a cold engine at high
engine speeds may shorten the service
life of the engine.
Exterior lamp switch
1 Off
2 Low beam headlamps on
Turn the switch to B.
For more information, see Exterior lamp

switch ( page 119).
47
Getting started
Driving
Turn signals and high beam
The combination switch is located on the
left of the steering column.
High beam
Push the combination switch forward.

The high beam headlights are switched
on.
The high beam symbol A in the
tachometer comes on.
Windshield wipers
left of the steering column.
For more information, see High beam

flasher ( page 123).
Combination switch
Combination switch
1 Turn signals, right

2 Turn signals, left
1 Single wipe
2 Switching on windshield wipers
Press the combination switch up 1 or

down 2.
i
To signal minor directional changes,
move combination switch to point of
resistance only and release. The turn
signal flashes three times.
48
Getting started
Driving
Switching on windshield wipers
Single wipe
Do not leave windshield wipers in intermittent setting when the vehicle is taken to an automatic car wash or during
windshield cleaning. Wipers will operate in the presence of water sprayed on
the windshield, and wipers may be
damaged as a result.
Turn the combination switch to the desired position depending on the intensity of the rain.
0 Windshield wipers off
I
Intermittent wiping
II Normal wiper speed

III Fast wiper speed
i
The intermittent wiping interval is dependent on wetness of windshield.
Wiping will not occur with a door open.
Press combination switch briefly in the

direction of arrow 1.
The windshield wipers wipe one time
without washer fluid.
The switch should not be left in intermittent setting as the wipers will wipe
the windshield once every time the engine is started. Dust that accumulates
on the windshield might scratch the
glass and/or damage the wiper blades
when wiping occurs on a dry windshield.
49
Getting started
Driving
Wiping with windshield washer fluid
Remove blockage.
Push combination switch in the direction of arrow 1 past the resistance

point.
If anything blocks the windshield wipers (leaves, snow, etc.), switch them off
immediately.
Turn the windshield wipers on

again.
The windshield wipers operate with

washer fluid.
For information on filling up the washer

reservoir, see Windshield washer system
and headlamp cleaning system*
( page 295).
For safety reasons,
If windshield wipers fail to function at

all in switch position I,
set the combination switch to the

next highest wiper speed
have the windshield wipers

checked at the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center
turn off the engine by turning

the SmartKey to position 0 and
withdraw SmartKey from starter
switch
or
turn off the engine by pressing

the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
button and open the drivers
door (with the drivers door
open, starter switch is in position 0, same as with SmartKey
removed from starter switch)
before attempting to remove any

blockage.
50
Getting started
Driving
Problems while driving
The coolant temperature is over 248F

(120C)
The engine runs erratically and misfires
The coolant is too hot and is no longer

cooling the engine.
In case of accident
If the vehicle is leaking gasoline:
Do not start the engine under any circumstances.
Notify local fire and/or police authorities.
An ignition cable may be damaged.
The engine electronics may not be operating properly.
Unburned gasoline may have entered

the catalytic converter and damaged it.
Give very little gas.
Have the problem repaired by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as

soon as possible.
If no damage can be determined on the
Stop the vehicle as soon as possible

and turn off the engine. Allow engine
and coolant to cool.
Check the coolant level and add coolant if necessary ( page 292).
If the extent of the damage cannot be determined:

Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
major assemblies
fuel system
engine mount
Start the engine in the usual manner.
51
Getting started
Parking and locking
Parking and locking
You have now completed your first drive.
You have properly stopped and parked
your vehicle. End your drive as follows:
Warning!
Wait until the vehicle is stationary before removing the SmartKey from the starter
switch. The vehicle cannot be steered when
the SmartKey is removed.
Warning!
With the engine not running, there is no

power assistance for the brake and steering
systems. In this case, it is important to keep
in mind that a considerably higher degree of
effort is necessary to brake and steer the vehicle.
52
Warning!
Do not park this vehicle in areas where combustible materials such as grass, hay or
leaves can come into contact with the hot
exhaust system, as these materials could be
ignited and cause a vehicle fire.
To reduce the risk of personal injury as a result of inadvertent vehicle movement, before turning off the engine and leaving the
vehicle always:
Keep right foot on brake pedal.
Firmly depress parking brake pedal.
Move the gear selector lever to

position P.
Slowly release brake pedal.
When parked on an incline, turn front

wheel towards the road curb.
Turn the SmartKey to starter switch

position 0 and remove, or press
start/stop button (vehicles with
KEYLESS-GO*).
Take the SmartKey or the SmartKey with

KEYLESS-GO* and lock vehicle when
leaving.
Getting started
Parking and locking
Parking brake
Warning!
1 Parking brake
2 Release handle

unlocked vehicle. Children could release the
parking brake and/or move the gear selector lever from position P, either of which
could result in an accident and/or serious
personal injury.
Warning!
Getting out of your vehicle with the gear selector lever not fully engaged in position P is
dangerous. Also, when parked on an incline,
position P alone may not prevent your vehicle from moving, possibly hitting people or
objects.
Always set the parking brake in addition to
shifting to position P ( page 159).
When parked on an incline, turn front wheels
towards the road curb.
Step firmly on parking brake 1.

When the engine is running, the indicator lamp ; (USA only)
or 3 (Canada only) in the instrument cluster will be illuminated.
53
Getting started
Parking and locking
Switching off headlamps
Turn the exterior lamp switch to M

( page 47).
For more information, see Lighting

( page 119).
Turning off the engine

position P.
Turning off the engine with the

SmartKey
i
Always set the parking brake in addition to shifting to position P.

( page 31) to position 0 and remove
it.
The immobilizer is activated.
On steep slopes, turn the front wheels

towards the curb.
The SmartKey can only be removed

from the starter switch with the gear
selector lever in position P.
Press the seat belt release button

( page 42).
Allow the retractor to completely rewind the seat belt by guiding the latch
plate.
!
With the SmartKey removed and the
drivers door open, a warning sounds if
the vehicles exterior lamps are not
switched off.
54
Getting started
Parking and locking
Warning!
To prevent possible personal injury, always

keep hands and fingers away from the door
openings when closing the doors. Be especially careful when small children are
around.
Before closing doors, make sure there is no
possibility of someone getting caught in a
door during closing.
i
the door is closed.
After exiting the vehicle, press the lock

button on the SmartKey
( page 30).
All turn signal lamps flash three times.
The locking knobs in the doors move
down.
Warning!
Turning off the engine with

KEYLESS-GO*
Place the gear selector lever in P.
Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button to shut off the engine.

With the driver's door closed, the starter switch is now in position 1. With the
drivers door opened, the starter switch
is set to position 0, same as SmartKey
removed from starter switch
( page 31).

SmartKey from the starter switch and lock
your vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle may cause an accident and/or serious
personal injury.
Press the seat belt release button

( page 42).
Allow the retractor to completely rewind the seat belt by guiding the latch
plate.

55
Getting started
Parking and locking
!
If you hear a warning signal you have either
forgotten to switch off the vehicless exterior lamps before opening the drivers door, or
tried to turn off the engine while the

gear selector lever is not in P.
Turn off the lights or place the gear selector lever in P.
Warning!

keep hands and fingers away from the door
openings when closing the doors. Be especially careful when small children are
around.
Before closing doors, make sure there is no
possibility of someone getting caught in a
door during closing.
i
the door is closed.
After exiting the vehicle, press lock

button 1 on the door handle or on the
trunk lid.
down.
Warning!

lock your vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an

1 Lock button on the door handle
56
Safety and Security

Occupant safety
Panic alarm
Driving safety systems
Anti-theft systems
57
Safety and Security

Occupant safety
Occupant safety
In this section you will learn the most important facts about the restraint systems
of the vehicle.
The 1 indicator lamp in the instrument

cluster comes on:
The restraint systems are
Seat belts
Emergency tensioning device
Airbags
Child seats
Child seat recognition
Lower anchors for children (LATCH)
As independent systems, their protective

effects work in conjunction with each other.
i
For information on infants and children
traveling with you in the vehicle and restraint systems for infants and children, see Children in the vehicle
( page 69).
58
for about 4 seconds when you turn the

SmartKey in the starter switch to
position 1 or press the KEYLESS-GO*
start/stop button once.
for about 4 seconds when you start the
engine by turning the SmartKey or
pressing the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
button.
The 1 indicator lamp remains lit if

the SmartKey is turned to position 2
and left there or if the KEYLESS-GO*
start/stop button is pressed twice. The
1 indicator lamp will go out when
you start the engine.
The 1 indicator lamp goes out shortly

after you start the engine. This shows that
the restraint systems are operational.
A malfunction in the system has been detected if the 1 indicator lamp:
fails to extinguish after approximately

4 seconds.
does not come on at all.
comes on after the engine was started

or while driving.
For safety reasons, we strongly recommend that you visit an authorized

Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to
have the system checked.
Practical hints section ( page 318).
Safety and Security

Occupant safety
Warning!
In the event that the 1 indicator lamp

comes on during driving or does not come at
all, the SRS may not be operational. For your
safety, we strongly recommend that you visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have the system checked;
otherwise the SRS may not be activated
when needed in an accident, which could result in serious or fatal injury, or it might deploy unexpectedly and unnecessarily which
could also result in injury.
Improper work on the restraint systems, including incorrect installation and removal,
can lead to possible injury through an unintended activation of the SRS.
In addition, through improper work there is
a risk of rendering the SRS inoperative or
causing unintended airbag deployment.
Work on the SRS must therefore only be performed by qualified technicians. Contact
your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Airbags
Warning!
Warning!
Airbags are designed to reduce the potential

for injury resulting from certain frontal impacts (front airbags) or side impacts
(head-thorax airbags and rear side-impact
airbags) which may cause significant injuries. However, no system available today
can totally eliminate injuries and fatalities.
The activation of the SRS temporarily releases a small amount of dust from the airbags.
This dust, however, is neither injurious to
your health, nor does it indicate a fire in the
vehicle. The dust might cause some temporary breathing difficulty for people with asthma or other breathing trouble. To avoid this,
you may wish to get out of the vehicle as
soon as it is safe to do so. If you have any
breathing difficulty but cannot get out of the
vehicle after the airbag inflates, then get
fresh air by opening a window or door.
To reduce the risk of injury when the front

airbags inflate, it is very important for the
driver and front passenger to always be in a
properly seated position and to be wearing
seat belts.
For maximum protection in the event of a
collision always be in normal seated position
with your back against the backrest. Fasten
your seat belt and ensure that it is properly
positioned on your body.
Since the airbag inflates with considerable
speed and force, a proper seating and hands
on steering wheel position will help to keep
you at a safe distance from the airbag. Occupants who are unbelted, out of position or
too close to the airbag can be seriously injured by an airbag as it inflates with great
force in the blink of an eye:
Sit properly belted in an upright position

with your back against the seat back
rest.
59
Safety and Security

Occupant safety
60
Adjust the driver seat as far as possible

rearward, still permitting proper operation of vehicle controls. The distance
from the center of the drivers breastbone to the center of the airbag cover on
the steering wheel must be at least ten
inches (25 cm) or more. You should be
able to accomplish this by a combination of adjustments to the seat and
steering wheel. If you have any problems, please see your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
This could result in serious injuries or

death should the airbag be triggered. Always sit upright, properly use the seat
belts and appropriate size infant or child
restraint system.
Do not lean with your head or chest

close to the steering wheel or dashboard.
Keep hands on the outside of steering
wheel rim. Placing hands and arms inside the rim can increase the risk and
potential severity of hand/arm injury
when driver front airbag inflates.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in severe injuries to you or other occupants.
If you sell your vehicle you are responsible
to make the buyer aware of these points.
Make sure to give the buyer this Operators
Manual.
Adjust the front passenger seat as far as

possible rearward from the dashboard
when the seat is occupied.
Occupants, especially children, should
never lean their heads in the area of the
door or the side where the head-thorax
and rear side-impact airbags inflate.
Children 12 years old and under must

never ride in the front seat, except in a
Mercedes-Benz authorized
BabySmartTM1 compatible child seat,
which operates with the BabySmartTM
system installed in the vehicle to deactivate the passenger front airbag when it
is properly installed. Otherwise they will
be struck by the airbag when it inflates
in a crash. If this happens, serious or fatal injury will result.

Automotive Corp.
Warning!
Accident research shows that the safest

place for children in an automobile is in the
rear seat. Should you choose to place a child
12 years old or under in the passenger front
seat of your vehicle, you must properly use
a BabySmartTM child restraint which will
turn off the passenger front airbag.
BabySmartTM will not, however, turn off any
side impact airbag (front head-thorax airbag
and rear side impact airbags).
It should be noted that with respect to both
front and rear side impact airbags there is a
possibility for a side airbag related injury if
occupants, especially children, are not properly seated or restrained when next to a
front head-thorax airbag or a rear side impact airbag which need to deploy rapidly in
a side impact in order to do its job.
To help avoid the possibility of injury, please
follow these guidelines:
(1) Occupants, especially children, should
never lean their heads in the area of the
Safety and Security

Occupant safety
door or the side where the front

head-thorax or rear side-impact airbag
inflates. This could result in serious injuries or death should the front
head-thorax airbag or rear side-impact
airbag be activated.
i
Airbags are designed to activate only in
certain frontal (front airbags) impacts,
or side (head-thorax airbags and rear
side-impact airbags) impacts which exceed preset thresholds.
(2) Always sit upright, properly use the seat

belts and use an appropriately sized infant or child restraint system for all children 12 years old or under.
Only during these types of impacts, if of

sufficient severity to meet the deployment thresholds, will they provide their
supplemental protection.
(3) Always wear seat belts properly.
The driver and passenger should always wear their seat belts. Otherwise it
is not possible for the airbags to provide their supplemental protection.
If you believe that, even with the use of

these guidelines, it would be safer for your
rear seat occupants to have the rear mounted thorax airbags deactivated, then deactivation can be accomplished upon your
written request to do so at your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center at an additional cost.
Please contact your local authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center or call our Customer
Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(1-800-367-6372) for details.
Your vehicle was originally equipped

with airbags that are designed to activate in certain impacts exceeding a
preset threshold to reduce the potential and severity of injury. It is important
to your safety and that of your passenger that you replace deployed airbags
and repair any malfunctioning airbags
to ensure that the vehicle will continue
to provide supplemental crash protection for occupants.
In cases of other frontal impacts, angled impacts, roll-overs, other side impacts, rear collisions, or other
accidents, the airbags will not be activated. The driver and passengers will
then be protected by the fastened seat
belts.
We caution you not to rely on the presence of the airbags in order to avoid
wearing your seat belt.
61
Safety and Security

Occupant safety
Safety guidelines for the seat belt,
emergency tensioning device and
airbag
Warning!
62
additional electrical/electronic equipment on or near SRS components and

wiring. Keep area between airbags and
occupants free from objects (e.g. packages, purses, umbrellas, etc.).
Damaged seat belts or belts that were

highly stressed in an accident must be
replaced and their anchoring points
must also be checked. Only use belts installed or supplied by an authorized
Airbags and ETDs are designed to function on a one-time-only basis. An airbag
or emergency tensioning device (ETD)
that was activated must be replaced.
No modifications of any kind may be
made to any components or wiring of
the SRS. This includes changing or removing any component or part of the
SRS, the installation of additional trim
material, seat covers, badges, etc. over
the steering wheel hub, passenger front
airbag cover, front seat backrests or
rear side trim panels, and installation of
Do not pass belts over sharp edges.

They could tear.
Do not make any modification that could

change the effectiveness of the belts.
An airbag system component within the

steering wheel gets hot after the airbag
has inflated. Do not touch.
Improper work on the system, including

incorrect installation and removal, can
lead to possible injury through an unintended activation of the SRS.
In addition, through improper work

there is a risk of rendering the SRS inoperative or causing unintended airbag deployment. Work on the SRS must
therefore only be performed by qualified
technicians. Contact your authorized
For your protection and the protection

of others, when disposing of the airbag
unit or emergency tensioning device,
our safety instructions must be followed. These instructions are available
from your authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Given the considerable deployment

speed and the textile structure of the
airbags, there is the possibility of abrasions or other injuries resulting from airbag deployment.
When you sell your vehicle, we strongly

urge you to give notice to the subsequent
owner that it is equipped with an SRS by
alerting them to the applicable section in
the Operators Manual.
Safety and Security

Occupant safety
Front airbags
The airbags will not deploy in impacts

which do not exceed the systems deployment thresholds. You will then be protected by the fastened seat belts.
Head-thorax airbags
The passenger front airbag will only be deployed if:
1 Driver airbag
2 Passenger airbag
Driver and passenger airbags are deployed:
in the event of a frontal impact
if impact exceeds a preset deployment

threshold
independently of the side impact airbags
the front passenger seat is occupied.
the PASS. AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp

in the center console is not lit
( page 71).
impact exceeds a preset deployment

threshold
!
Do not place objects heavier than 20
lbs (9 kg) on the front passenger seat.
This could cause the front or
head-thorax airbag on the front passenger side to deploy in a crash which exceeds the system's deployment
threshold.
1 Head-thorax airbag
The head-thorax airbags 1 in the driver
and front passenger seat are deployed:
on the impacted side of the vehicle
in impacts exceeding a preset deployment threshold
independently of the front airbags
The head-thorax airbags 1 are not deployed in impacts which do not exceed the
systems deployment threshold.
63
Safety and Security

Occupant safety
The front passenger head-thorax airbag
will only deploy if the system senses that
the front passenger seat is occupied.
Warning!
Rear side-impact airbags
When the engine is started, the seat belt

non-usage warning lamp < illuminates
to remind you and your passengers to fasten your seat belts. If the drivers seat belt
is not fastened before the engine is started, the seat belt non-usage warning lamp
< illuminates and a warning chime
sounds for approximately six seconds
when the engine is started.
For the front seats, only use seat covers that

have been approved by Mercedes-Benz for
this model. Other seat covers may prevent
the head-thorax bags from deploying
correctly.
1 Rear side-impact airbag

The rear side-impact airbags 1 are deployed:
on the impacted side of the vehicle
in impacts exceeding a preset deployment threshold
independently of the front airbags
The rear side-impact airbags 1 are not

deployed in impacts which do not exceed
the systems deployment threshold.
64
Seat belts
The use of seat belts and infant and child

restraint systems is required by law in all
50 states, the District of Columbia, the
U.S. territories and all Canadian provinces.
Even where this is not the case, all vehicle
occupants should have their seat belts fastened whenever the vehicle is in motion.
Information on fastening seat belts is
found in the Getting started section
( page 40).
Safety and Security

Occupant safety
i
For information on infants and children
traveling with you in the vehicle and restraint systems for infants and children, see Children in the vehicle
( page 69).
Warning!
Always fasten your seat belt before driving

off. Always make sure your passengers are
properly restrained, even those sitting in the
rear and pregnant women.
Failure to wear and properly fasten and position your seat belt greatly increases your
risk of injuries and their likely severity in an
accident. You and your passengers should
always wear seat belts.
If you are ever in an accident, your injuries
can be considerably more severe without
your seat belt properly buckled. Without
your seat belt buckled, you are much more
likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be
ejected from it. You can be seriously injured
or killed.
In the same crash, the possibility of injury or
death is lessened if you are properly wearing
your seat belt. Airbags can only protect as
they are designed if the occupants are properly wearing their seat belts.
Warning!

backrest reclined. Sitting in an excessively
reclined position can be dangerous. You
could slide under the seat belt in a collision.
If you slide under it, the belt would apply
force at the abdomen or neck. This could
cause serious or even fatal injuries. The seat
backrest and seat belt provide the best restraint when the wearer is in an upright position and the belt is properly positioned on
the body.
Warning!
Never let more people ride in the vehicle

than there are seat belts available. Make
sure everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly restrained with a separate seat belt.
65
Safety and Security

Occupant safety
Warning!
Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly

stressed in an accident must be replaced
and their anchoring points must also be
checked.
Warning!
Have all work carried out only by qualified

technicians. Contact an authorized
66
Never wear the shoulder belt under your

arm, against your neck or off your shoulder. In a crash, your body would move
too far forward. That would increase the
chance of head and neck injuries. The
belt would also apply too much force to
the ribs or abdomen, which could severely injure internal organs such as
your liver or spleen.
Never wear belts over rigid or breakable

objects in or on your clothing, such as
eyeglasses, pens, keys etc., as these
might cause injuries.
Position the lap belt as low as possible

on your hips and not across the abdomen. If the belt is positioned across your
abdomen, it could cause serious injuries
in a crash.
USE SEAT BELTS PROPERLY
Seat belts can only work when used

properly. Never wear seat belts in any
other way than as described in this section, as that could result in serious injuries in case of an accident.
Each occupant should wear their seat

belt at all times, because seat belts help
reduce the likelihood of and potential
severity of injuries in accidents, including rollovers. The integrated restraint
system includes SRS (driver airbag, passenger front airbag, head-thorax airbags
and rear side-impact airbags), ETD (seat
belt emergency tensioning device), and
front seat knee bolsters. The system is
designed to enhance the protection offered to properly belted occupants in
certain frontal (front airbags) and side
(head-thorax and rear side-impact airbags) impacts which exceed preset deployment thresholds.
Only use seat belts which have been approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Do not make any modifications to the seat
belts. This can lead to unintended activation
or to failure.
Safety and Security

Occupant safety
Never use a seat belt for more than one

person at a time. Do not fasten a seat
belt around a person and another person or other objects.
Belts should not be worn twisted. In a
crash, you wouldnt have the full width
of the belt to manage impact forces. The
twisted belt against your body could
cause injuries.
Pregnant women should also use a
lap-shoulder belt. The lap belt portion
should be positioned as low as possible
on the hips to avoid any possible pressure on the abdomen.
Never place your feet on the instrument
panel or on the seat. Always keep both
feet on the floor in front of the seat.
Emergency tensioning device (ETD),

seat belt force limiter
The seat belts for the front and rear seats
are equipped with emergency tensioning
devices and belt force limiters.
The ETD is designed to activate in the following cases when the seat belt are fastened and:
In an impact, emergency tensioning devices remove slack from the belts in such a
way that the seat belts fit more snugly
against the body. Belt force limiters reduce
the force exerted by the seat belts on occupants during a crash.
Warning!
in frontal or rear-end impacts

exceeding a preset severity level
An emergency tensioning device (ETD) that

was activated must be replaced.
if the restraint systems are operational

and functioning correctly. See
1 indicator lamp ( page 58)
When disposing of the emergency tensioning device, our safety instructions must be
followed. These are available at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
67
Safety and Security

Occupant safety
!
Do not place objects heavier than 20
lbs (9 kg) on the front passenger seat.
This could cause the front or head-thorax airbag on the front passenger side
to deploy in a crash which exceeds the
system's deployment threshold.
Automatic comfort-fit feature seat belt
An automatic comfort-fit feature for front
seats reduces the retracting force of the
seat belts when they are in normal use.
Roll bars
Warning!
Make sure nothing is blocking the roll bars

path of motion. Otherwise someone could
be injured when the roll bars are raised. The
head restraints should therefore always be
in the raised position when the rear seat is
occupied ( page 111).
The roll bars are integrated into the rear

head restraints.
The roll bars raise automatically in an accident or in a critical driving situation.
i
When the roll bars are raised automatically, you will hear a ratcheting sound
and the rear head restraints will also
rise.
You can manually lower the roll bars again
when the soft top is open ( page 354).
68
You cannot lower the head restraints in

the rear when the roll bars are in the
raised position.
Warning!
If the yellow roll bar warning lamp \ in

the clock does not go out after starting the
engine, or if it comes on while driving, then
the roll bar system is not operating properly
and may not activate in an accident. In this
case, raise the roll bars manually before
continuing to drive ( page 353).
For safety reasons, drive only with the roll
bars raised until the malfunction is repaired.
Have your vehicle checked at an authorized
Safety and Security

Occupant safety
Children in the vehicle
Infant and child restraint systems
If an infant or child is traveling with you in

the vehicle:
Only use a BabySmartTM1 compatible child

restraint for the front passenger seat in
this vehicle.
Secure the child using an infant or child

restraint appropriate to the age and
size of the child and recommended for
use by Mercedes-Benz.
Ensure that the infant or child is properly secured by a belt at all times while
the vehicle is in motion.
Infant and child restraint seats and information on choosing an appropriate restraint system can be obtained from any
We recommend all infants and children be

properly restrained at all times while the
vehicle is in motion.
All lap-shoulder belts except the drivers
seat belt have special seat belt retractors
for secure fastening of child restraints.
To fasten a child restraint, follow child restraint instructions for mounting. Then pull
the shoulder belt out completely and let it
retract. During seat belt retraction, a ratcheting sound can be heard to indicate that
the special seat belt retractor is activated.
The belt is now locked. Push down on child
restraint to take up any slack.
To deactivate, release seat belt buckle and

let seat belt retract completely. The seat
belt can again be used in the usual manner.
i
For information on LATCH-type child
seat anchors ( page 73).
Warning!
Never release the seat belt buckle while the

vehicle is in motion, since the special seat
belt retractor will be deactivated.

Automotive Corp.
69
Safety and Security

Occupant safety
!
The use of infant or child restraints is
required by law in all 50 states, the District of Columbia, the U.S. territories,
and all Canadian provinces.
Infants and small children should be
seated in an appropriate infant or child
restraint system properly secured by a
lap-shoulder belt or, if so equipped, a
child restraint lower anchorage system
that complies with U.S. Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 225
and Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards 213 and 210.2.
When using any infant or child restraint

system, make sure to carefully read
and follow all manufacturers instructions for installation and use.
Warning!

Please read and observe warning labels

affixed to inside of vehicle and to infant
or child restraints.

rear seating positions than in the front seating positions. Infants and small children
which is properly secured with the vehicle's
seat belt and/or lower anchors, fully in accordance with the child seat manufacturer's
instructions.
A statement by the child restraint manufacturer of compliance with this standard can be found on the instruction
label on the restraint and in the instruction manual provided with the restraint.
70

Automotive Corp.
Safety and Security

Occupant safety
Infants and small children should never

share a seat belt with another occupant.
During an accident, they could be crushed
between the occupant and seat belt.
Children too big for child restraint systems
must ride in back seats using regular seat
belts. Position shoulder belt across chest
and shoulder, not face or neck. A booster
seat may be necessary to achieve proper
belt positioning for children from 41 lbs until
they reach a height where a lap/shoulder
belt fits properly without a booster.
Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle; even if the children are secured in a
child restraint system. Unsupervised children in a child restraint system may use vehicle equipment and may cause an accident
BabySmartTM1 airbag deactivation

system
The PASS. AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp 1

located in the center console will be illuminated, except with the SmartKey removed
or in starter switch position 0.

restraint.
When the child restraint is not in use, remove it from the vehicle or secure it with the
seat belt to prevent the child restraint from
becoming a projectile in the event of an accident.
Special BabySmartTM compatible child

seats, designed for use with the
Mercedes-Benz system and available at
any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, are
required for use with the BabySmartTM airbag deactivation system. With the special
child seat properly installed, the passenger
front airbag will not deploy.
The system does not deactivate the

head-thorax airbag and the emergency
tensioning device.
1 Indicator lamp
BabySmartTM is a trademark of Siemens

Automotive Corp.
71
Safety and Security

Occupant safety
Self-test BabySmartTM1 without special
child seat installed
After turning the SmartKey in the starter
switch to position 1 or 2 or pressing the
KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button once or
twice, the PASS. AIRBAG OFF indicator
lamp 1 located in the center console
comes on for approximately six seconds
and then goes out.
If the indicator lamp should not come on or
is continuously lit, the system is not functioning. You must see an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center before seating any
child on the passenger seat.

Automotive Corp.
72
Warning!
Warning!
The BabySmartTM airbag deactivation system will ONLY work with a special child seat
designed to operate with it. It will not work
with child seats which are not BabySmartTM
compatible.
When using a BabySmartTM compatible

child seat on the front passenger seat, the
passenger front airbag will not deploy only if
the PASS. AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp remains illuminated.
Never place anything between seat cushion

and child seat (e.g. pillow), since it reduces
the effectiveness of the deactivation system. The bottom of the child seat must
make full contact with the passenger seat
cushion. An incorrectly mounted child seat
could cause injuries to the child in case of an
accident, instead of protecting the child.
Please make sure to check the indicator every time you use the special system child
seat. Should the light go out while the restraint is installed, please check installation.
If the light remains out, do not use the
BabySmartTM restraint to transport children
on the front passenger seat until the system
has been repaired.
Follow the manufacturers instructions for

installation of special child seats.
Safety and Security

Occupant safety
Warning!
Do not place powered-on laptops, cell

phones and like electronic devices on the
front passenger seat. Signals from such devices may interfere with the BabySmartTM1
system. Such signal interference may cause
the PASS. AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp not to
come on during self-test or be continuously
lit, indicating that the system is not
functioning.
1
i
Your cabriolet does not have and is not
required to have anchorage rings for a
child seats top tether strap in the rear
seating positions. Child seats can be
used with the lower anchor system
and/or seat belt, fully in accordance
with the child seat manufacturers instructions.
Install child seat according to the manufacturers instructions.
i
The child seat must be firmly attached
in the right and left side anchors.
BabySmart
a trademark of Siemens
Automotive Corp.
Press down button 3 on each anchor

and return the anchor 2 to its catch.
i
Non-LATCH type child seats may also
be used and can be installed using the
vehicles seat belt system. Install child
seat according to the manufacturers
instructions.
Child seat anchors LATCH type
If child seats are not installed, the LATCH

anchors can be folded back between the
seat cushion and the seat backrest.
Grip inner side of anchors 2 and fold

forward until they audibly lock in place.
To fold anchors back
TM is
This vehicle is equipped with two LATCH

(Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren)
type anchors (at each of the rear seats) for
the installation of a LATCH child seat with
matching anchor fittings.
1 Indicates the position of the anchors

2 Anchors
3 Release button
73
Safety and Security

Occupant safety
Damaged or impact damaged child seats or

child seat anchor fittings must be replaced.
Children too big for child restraint systems

must ride in back seats using regular seat
belts. Position shoulder belt across chest
and shoulder, not face or neck. A booster
seat may be necessary to achieve proper
belt positioning for children from 41 lbs until
they reach a height where a lap/shoulder
belt fits properly without a booster.
Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, even if the children are secured in a
child restraint system.
Warning!
Blocking of rear side window operation
Install child seat according to manufacturers instructions.
An incorrectly mounted child seat may come

loose during an accident which could result
in serious injury or death to your child.
74
Operation of the rear side windows

with the switches located in the drivers
door is still possible.
Warning!
Activate the override switch when children

are riding in the back seats of the vehicle.
The children may otherwise injure themselves, e.g. by becoming trapped in the window opening.
Before installing the child seat, make sure

anchors 2 are folded out and locked in
place.
The child seat must be firmly attached in the

right and left side anchor 2.
1 Override switch
Slide override switch 1 to the right.

The rear side windows can no longer be
operated using the switches located in
the rear trim panel.

SmartKey from the starter switch take the
unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment can cause an accident
Safety and Security

Panic alarm
Panic alarm
An audible alarm and flashing exterior
lamps will operate for approximately
21/2 minutes.
Activating
Press and hold button 1 for at least

one second.
Deactivating
Press button 1 again

or
1 button
Insert SmartKey in starter switch.
i
For operation in the USA only: This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the users authority
to operate the equipment.
75
Safety and Security

In this section you will find information on
the following driving safety systems:
ABS (Antilock Brake System)
BAS (Brake Assist System)
ESP (Electronic Stability Program)
i
In winter operation, the maximum effectiveness of the ABS, the BAS, and
the ESP is only achieved with winter
tires (M+S tires) or snow chains as required.
Warning!
The following factors increase the risk of accidents:
Excessive speed, especially in turns
Wet and slippery road surfaces
Following another vehicle too closely
The ABS, BAS, and ESP cannot reduce this

risk.
Always adjust your driving style to the prevailing road and weather conditions.
76
Safety and Security

ABS
Warning!
Do not pump the brake pedal. Use firm,

steady brake pedal pressure instead. Pumping the brake pedal defeats the purpose of
the ABS and significantly reduces braking
effectiveness.
The Antilock Brake System (ABS) regulates

the brake pressure so that the wheels do
not lock during braking. This allows you to
maintain the ability to steer your vehicle.
The ABS is functional above a speed of approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) independent
of road surface conditions.
The - indicator lamp in the instrument

cluster ( page 22) comes on when you
turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to
start/stop button twice. It goes out when
the engine is running.
Braking
Continuous, steady brake pedal pressure

yields the advantages provided by the ABS,
namely braking power and the ability to
steer the vehicle.
The pulsating brake pedal can be an indication of hazardous road conditions and
functions as a reminder to take extra care
while driving.
At the instant one of the wheels is about to

lock up, a slight pulsation can be felt in the
brake pedal, indicating that the ABS is in
the regulating mode.
Keep firm and steady pressure on the

brake pedal while experiencing the pulsation.
On slippery road surfaces, the ABS will respond even with light brake pressure.
77
Safety and Security

Emergency brake maneuver
BAS
Keep continuous full pressure on the

brake pedal.
Warning!
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of

physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the
vehicle brakes and tires or the traction. The
ABS cannot prevent accidents, including
those resulting from excessive speed in
turns, following another vehicle too closely,
or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and
skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the users safety or the safety of others.
For more information, see Practical hints

( page 311).
78
Warning!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) operates in
emergency situations. If you apply the
brakes very quickly, the BAS automatically
provides full brake boost, thereby potentially reducing the braking distance. Apply
continuous full braking pressure until the
emergency braking situation is over. The
ABS will prevent the wheels from locking.
When you release the brake pedal, the
brakes function again as normal. The BAS
is then deactivated.
( page 311).
The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of

it increase braking efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes
and tires or the traction. The BAS cannot
prevent accidents, including those resulting
from excessive speed in turns, following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
prevent accidents. The capabilities of a BAS
equipped vehicle must never be exploited in
a reckless or dangerous manner which
could jeopardize the users safety or the
safety of others.
Safety and Security

ESP
Warning!
The Electronic Stability Program (ESP)
monitors the vehicle's traction (force of
adhesive friction between the tires and the
road surface) and handling.
The ESP recognizes when a wheel is spinning or if the vehicle starts to skid. By applying brakes to the appropriate wheel and
by limiting engine output, the ESP works to
stabilize the vehicle. The ESP is especially
useful while driving off and on wet or slippery road surfaces.
The ESP warning lamp v in the instrument cluster flashes when the ESP is engaged.
The warning lamp v in the instrument
cluster comes on when you turn the
start/stop button twice. It goes out when
the engine is running.
Never switch off the ESP when you see the

ESP warning lamp v flashing in the instrument cluster. In this case, proceed as
follows:
While driving off, apply as little throttle

as possible.
While driving, ease upon the accelerator.
Adapt your speed and driving style to

the prevailing road conditions.
Failure to observe these guidelines could

cause the vehicle to skid.
The ESP cannot prevent accidents resulting
from excessive speed.
Warning!
The ESP cannot prevent the natural laws of

it increase the traction afforded. The ESP
cannot prevent accidents, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns or
hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and
skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESP equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the users safety or the safety of others.
i
Distronic* is switched off when ESP is
activated.
79
Safety and Security

Switching off the ESP
!
Because of the ESPs automatic operation, the engine must be shut off
(SmartKey in starter switch position 0
or 1 or KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button in position 0 or 1) when
the parking brake is being tested on

a brake test dynamometer
the vehicle is being towed with the

front axle raised
Active braking action through the ESP

may otherwise seriously damage the
brake system.
The ESP will only function properly if
you use wheels of the recommended
tire size.
( page 311).
80
Warning!
The ESP should not be switched off during

normal driving other than in the circumstances described below. Disabling of the
system will reduce vehicle stability in standard driving maneuvers.
To improve the vehicle's traction, turn off

the ESP in driving situations where it would
be advantageous to have the drive wheels
spin and thus cut into surfaces for better
grip such as:
starting out on slippery surfaces and in

deep snow in conjunction with snow
chains
sand or gravel
The switch is located on the center console.
1 ESP off
2 ESP on
Press upper half 1 of the ESP switch

until the ESP warning lamp v in the
instrument cluster comes on.
The ESP is deactivated.
If one or more drive wheels are spinning,

the ESP warning lamp v in the instrument cluster flashes, regardless of the
speed.
Safety and Security

Traction control brakes a spinning wheel
even when the ESP is deactivated.
The ESP always operates when you are
braking, even when it has been deactivated.
Switching on the ESP
Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an

extended period with the ESP switched
off. This may cause serious damage to
the drivetrain which is not covered by
Warning!
Press lower half 2 of the ESP switch

until the ESP warning lamp v in the
instrument cluster goes out.
You are now again in normal driving
mode.
When the ESP warning lamp v is

illuminated continuously, the ESP is
switched off.
Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions and to the non-operating
status of the ESP.
81
Safety and Security

Anti-theft systems
Anti-theft systems
Immobilizer
The immobilizer prevents unauthorized
persons from starting your vehicle.
Activating
With the SmartKey: Removing the

SmartKey from the starter switch activates the immobilizer.
With KEYLESS-GO*: Turning off the engine by means of the start/stop button
on the gear selector lever activates the
immobilizer.
82
Deactivating
With the SmartKey: Inserting the

SmartKey in the starter switch deactivates the immobilizer.
With KEYLESS-GO*: Starting the engine by means of the start/stop button

on the gear selector lever deactivates
the immobilizer.
In case the engine cannot be started

(yet the vehicles battery is charged),
the system is not operational. Contact
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the
USA), or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).
Safety and Security

Anti-theft systems
Anti-theft alarm system
Once the alarm system has been armed, a
visual and audible alarm is triggered when
someone opens
The alarm system will also be triggered

when
someone attempts to raise the vehicle
the vehicle is opened with the mechanical key.
a door
the trunk
the hood.
If the alarm stays on for more than

20 seconds, an emergency call is initiated automatically by the Tele Aid system ( page 257) provided Tele Aid
service was subscribed to and properly
activated, and that necessary cellular
service and GPS coverage are available.
The alarm will stay on, even if the activating element (a door, for example) is immediately closed.
Arming the alarm system

The alarm system is armed after locking
the vehicle with the SmartKey or
KEYLESS-GO*. The turn signal lamps flash
three times to indicate that the alarm system is activated. The indicator lamp in the
switch for the tow-away alarm will flash after approximately 30 seconds when the
alarm system is completely armed
( page 25).
i
If the turn signal lamps do not flash
three times one of the following elements may not be properly closed:
a door
the trunk lid
Close the respective element and lock

the vehicle again.
83
Safety and Security

Anti-theft systems
Disarming the alarm system
Canceling the alarm
The alarm system is disarmed when you

unlock your vehicle with the SmartKey or
KEYLESS-GO*. The turn signal lamps flash
once to indicate that the alarm system is
deactivated
To cancel the alarm:

With the SmartKey
or
The alarm system will rearm automatically again after approximately 40 seconds if no door was opened.
Insert the SmartKey in the starter

switch.
Press the or button on the
SmartKey.
With KEYLESS-GO*
Grasp the outside door handle.
or
84
Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop

button.
Tow-away alarm
Once the tow-away alarm is armed, a visual
and audible alarm will be triggered when
someone attempts to raise the vehicle.
i
The tow-away protection alarm is triggered, for example, if the vehicle is lifted on one side.
If the alarm stays on for more than
20 seconds, an emergency call is initiated automatically by the Tele Aid system ( page 257) provided Tele Aid
service was subscribed to and properly
activated, and that necessary cellular
service and GPS coverage are available.
Safety and Security

Anti-theft systems
Arming tow-away alarm
Disarming tow-away alarm
When you lock your vehicle, the tow-away

alarm is automatically armed after about
30 seconds.
To prevent triggering the tow-away alarm

feature, switch off the tow-away alarm before towing the vehicle, or when parking on
a surface subject to movement, such as a
ferry or auto train.
When you unlock your vehicle, the

tow-away protection disarms
automatically.
Turn off the ignition and remove the

SmartKey.
i
You cannot disarm the tow-away alarm
while the ignition is turned on.
Press upper half 1 of the switch.

Indicator lamp 2 in the switch comes
on briefly.
Exit and lock your vehicle with the

SmartKey or (vehicles with
KEYLESS-GO*) the lock button at each
door handle.
The tow-away alarm remains disarmed until you lock your vehicle again.
1 Tow-away alarm off switch
2 Indicator lamp
85
Safety and Security

Anti-theft systems
Canceling the alarm
With KEYLESS-GO*
To cancel the alarm:
With the SmartKey

switch.
or
Press the or button on the

SmartKey.
86
or
Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop

button.
Controls in detail
Seats
Memory function
Lighting
Instrument cluster
Control system
Good visibility
Automatic climate control
Audio system
Power windows
Soft top
Driving systems
Loading
Useful features
87
Controls in detail
In the Controls in detail section you will
find detailed information on how to operate the equipment installed on your vehicle. If you are already familiar with the
basic functions of your vehicle, this section
will be of particular interest to you.
To quickly familiarize yourself with the basic functions of the vehicle, refer to the
Getting started section of this manual.
The corresponding page numbers are given at the beginning of each segment.
SmartKeys
Your vehicle comes supplied with two
SmartKeys, each with remote control and
a removable mechanical key. The locking
tabs for the mechanical key portion of the
two SmartKeys are a different color to help
distinguish each SmartKey unit.
The SmartKey provides an extended operating range. To prevent theft, however, it is
advisable to only unlock the vehicle when
you are in close proximity to it.
!
To prevent possible malfunction, avoid
exposing the SmartKey to high levels of
electromagnetic radiation.
The SmartKey centrally locks and unlocks:
88
the doors
the glove box
the trunk lid
the fuel filler flap
SmartKey with remote controls
1 Lock button
3 Mechanical key locking tab
4 Unlock button
5 Battery check lamp
i
You can also open and close the soft
top ( page 222) and the power windows ( page 213) using the
SmartKey.
Controls in detail
Factory setting
Global unlocking
Press button .
All turn signal lamps flash once. The
locking knobs in the doors move up.
The vehicle will lock again automatically

within approximately 40 seconds of unlocking if neither door nor trunk is opened,
the SmartKey is not inserted in the starter
switch, or the central locking switch is not
activated.
Global locking
Press button .
down.
Selective setting
Restoring to factory setting
If you frequently travel alone, you may wish

to reprogram the SmartKey so that
pressing only unlocks the drivers
door and the fuel filler flap.
Press and hold buttons and

simultaneously for about five seconds
until battery check lamp 5 flashes
twice.
The SmartKey will then function as follows:
Unlocking drivers door and fuel filler
flap
Press button once.
Global unlocking

simultaneously for about six seconds
twice.
Warning!

unlocked vehicle. It is possible for children
to open a locked door from the inside, which
personal injury.
Press button twice.
Global locking
Press button .
89
Controls in detail
!
Checking the batteries
If you can no longer lock or unlock the

vehicle with the SmartKey, then the
batteries in the SmartKey are discharged, the SmartKey is malfunctioning or the vehicle battery is drained.
Check the batteries in the

SmartKey and replace them if necessary ( page 350).
Use the mechanical key to unlock
the doors ( page 348) and the
trunk ( page 349).
Press button or .
Battery check lamp 5 comes on briefly to indicate that the SmartKey batteries are in order.
!
If battery check lamp 5 does not
come on briefly during check, then the
SmartKey batteries are discharged.
Replace the batteries ( page 350).
Have the vehicle battery and the

battery connections checked.
You can obtain the required batteries

at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Use the mechanical key to lock the

doors and the trunk ( page 349).
If the SmartKey is malfunctioning, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
90
If the batteries are checked within signal range of the vehicle, pressing
the or button will lock or
unlock the vehicle accordingly.
Unlocking and opening the trunk lid

You can unlock and open the trunk lid separately.
A minimum height clearance of 5.41 ft
(1.65 m) is required to open the trunk lid.
Press and hold button until the

trunk lid unlocks and begins to open.
!
The trunk lid swings open upwards automatically. Always make sure there is
sufficient overhead clearance.
Vehicles with trunk lid opening/closing
system*: To stop the opening procedure, press button . The Trunk lid
stops moving.
Controls in detail
Loss of SmartKey or mechanical key
If the trunk lid does not open, it is still

locked separately (if applicable)
( page 106)
If you lose a SmartKey or mechanical key,

you should do the following:
If the vehicle was previously centrally

locked, the trunk lid will lock automatically when closed ( page 100). The
turn signals will flash three times to
confirm locking.
The trunk lid can also be opened from its
inside in an emergency, see Trunk lid
emergency release ( page 105).
Have the SmartKey deactivated by an

authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Report the loss of the SmartKey or the

mechanical key immediately to your
car insurance company.
If necessary, have the mechanical lock

replaced.
Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center

will be glad to supply you with a replacement.
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*

Specially equipped vehicles come with two
SmartKeys with KEYLESS-GO, each with
remote control and a removable mechanical key. The locking tabs for the mechanical key portion of the two SmartKeys are a
different color to help distinguish each
SmartKey unit.
The KEYLESS-GO function is integrated
into the SmartKey. On these vehicles, the
validity of the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
is checked every time you pull a door
handle.
!
To prevent possible malfunction, avoid
exposing the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO to high levels of electromagnetic radiation.
91
Controls in detail
If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* is valid,
your vehicle unlocks
the doors
the glove box
the trunk lid
the fuel filler flap
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
1 Lock button
4 Unlock button
5 Battery check lamp
92
For more information on using the

SmartKey buttons, see SmartKeys
( page 88)
Warning!
i
If the vehicle has been parked for a
longer period of time, you must pull the
door handle in order to activate the
KEYLESS-GO function.

SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO with you and
Important notes on using KEYLESS-GO*
You can also use the SmartKey with

KEYLESS-GO like a normal SmartKey
( page 88).
You can combine KEYLESS-GO functions with normal SmartKey functions

(e.g. unlocking with KEYLESS-GO and
locking with the remote control).
You can also open and close the soft

top ( page 222) and the power windows ( page 213) using the
SmartKey.
Always carry the SmartKey with

KEYLESS-GO with you.
Never store the SmartKey with

KEYLESS-GO together with:
electronic items such as a cellular

phone or another SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO
metallic objects such as coins or

metal foil
Controls in detail
Doing so could impair the function of
the KEYLESS-GO system.
To lock or unlock the vehicle, the

SmartKey with KEYLESS-Go must be located outside the vehicle within approximately 3 ft (1 m) of a door or the
trunk.
In order to start the engine with the

SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO:
the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO

must be located in the vehicle
all the doors must be closed
the brake pedal must be depressed
If you have started the engine with the

KEYLESS-GO start/stop button, you
can only turn it off again with this button, even if you have put the SmartKey
in the starter switch in the meantime.
This does not apply if, after starting, the

gear selector lever is still in position P.
and the SmartKey is then inserted in
the starter switch. The SmartKey will
then have priority over the
KEYLESS-GO function and the vehicles
electrical system will operate according to the position of the SmartKey in
the starter switch, even stopping the
engine.
If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is
positioned farther away from the vehicle the system may no longer recognize
the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO. The
vehicle cannot be locked or the engine
started via the KEYLESS-GO system.
If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is removed from the vehicle while the ignition is switched on (e.g. if passenger
exits the vehicle with the SmartKey
with KEYLESS-GO), the message Key
not recognized! will appear in the
multifunction display.
Find the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO or
change its present location immediately (e.g. place it on the front passenger
seat or insert it in shirt pocket).
Remember that the engine can be

started by anyone with a SmartKey
with KEYLESS-GO that is left inside the
vehicle. If you leave the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO behind when exiting and
locking the vehicle, the message Key
recognized in vehicle! will appear in
the multifunction display.
93
Controls in detail
Factory setting
Global unlocking
Pull the door handle.
The vehicle will lock again automatically

within approximately 40 seconds of unlocking if neither door nor trunk is opened.
i
The vehicles could inadvertently be unlocked if the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO is within 3 ft (1 m) of the
vehicle and:
the door handle is splashed with

water, or
you attempt to clean the door

handle.
Selective setting
Restoring to factory setting
If you frequently travel alone, you may wish

to reprogram the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO so when you, grasp the drivers door handle only the drivers door and
the fuel filler flap unlocks.

simultaneously for about five seconds
twice.
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO will
then function as follows:
Unlocking drivers door and fuel filler
flap
Global unlocking
Global locking
Press lock button at door handle

( page 56) or trunk lid ( page 95).
94
Grasp the drivers door handle.

Grasp the door handle on the passenger side.
Global locking
Press lock button at door handle or

trunk lid.

simultaneously for about six seconds
twice.
Warning!

unlocked vehicle. It is possible for children
to open a locked door from the inside, which
personal injury.
Controls in detail
Locking the vehicle
!
If you can no longer lock or unlock the
vehicle with the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO, then the batteries in the
SmartKey are discharged, the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is malfunctioning or the vehicle battery is
drained.
Check the batteries in the

SmartKey and replace them if necessary ( page 350).
Use the mechanical key to unlock

the doors ( page 348) and the
trunk ( page 349).
Press button or .
Battery check lamp 5 comes on briefly to indicate that the SmartKey batteries are in order.
!
If battery check lamp 5 does not
come on briefly during check, then the
SmartKey batteries are discharged.
1 Lock button at trunk
Replace the batteries ( page 350).
You can obtain the required batteries

at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Press the lock button 1.
or
Have the vehicle battery and the

battery connections checked.
Use the mechanical key to lock the

doors and the trunk (if applicable)
( page 349).
or
If the SmartKey is malfunctioning, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Checking the batteries
Press the lock button at the drivers

door ( page 56).
system*, press the KEYLESS-GO locking/closing switch at the trunk lid
( page 104).
i
If the batteries are checked within signal range of the vehicle, pressing
the or button will lock or
unlock the vehicle accordingly.
The vehicle locks. The turn signals

blinks three times to confirm locking.
95
Controls in detail
Unlocking and opening the trunk lid
Closing the side windows

The handle is located in the rear license

plate recess.

system*: To stop the opening procedure, press button . The Trunk lid
stops moving.
1 Handle
Pull on handle 1.
The trunk opens.
or

trunk unlocks and begins to open.
96
Press and hold lock button at door

( page 56) until the side windows are
closed.
Warning!
When closing the windows, make sure there

is no danger of anyone being harmed by the
closing procedure.

( page 106)
If potential danger exists, proceed as follows:
Release the lock button.

confirm locking.
Pull on the door handle and hold firmly.

The side windows will open for about
two seconds if the door handle is held
but the door not opened.
The trunk can also be opened from its inside in an emergency, see Trunk lid emergency release ( page 105).
Controls in detail
Loss of the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
If you lose your SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO, you should do the following:
Have the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO

deactivated by an authorized
Report the loss immediately to your car

insurance company.
Have the mechanical lock replaced if

necessary.
Opening the doors from the inside

You can open a locked door from the inside. Open doors only when conditions are
safe to do so.
i
If the vehicle has previously been
locked from the outside with the
SmartKey, opening a door from the inside will trigger the anti-theft alarm system.
To cancel the alarm, do one of the
following:
With the SmartKey
Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center

will be glad to supply you with a
replacement.
1 Locking knob
2 Inside door handle
Pull on door handle 2.

If door was locked, locking knob 1 will
move up.

switch.
Press button or on the

SmartKey.
With KEYLESS-GO*
Press the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop

button.
97
Controls in detail
i
If you open a door, the side windows on
that side of the vehicle will lower slightly. The windows close again when you
close the door.
Opening the trunk
Opening the trunk from outside

(vehicles without KEYLESS-GO*)

The handle is located in the rear license

plate recess.

( page 106).
The vehicle must be unlocked.
The trunk can also be opened using the
SmartKey ( page 90) or from its inside in
an emergency, see Trunk lid emergency
release ( page 105).
1 Handle
Pull on handle 1.
The trunk opens
98
Controls in detail
Opening the trunk from the inside
You can open the trunk from the inside if

the vehicle is stationary.

The switch is located on the drivers door.

i
( page 106).
confirm locking.
1 Remote trunk lid switch with indicator

lamp
Press remote trunk lid switch 1.

The trunk lid opens. The indicator lamp
in the switch remains lit as long as the
trunk is open.
99
Controls in detail
Closing the trunk
Warning!
Only drive with the trunk closed. Among other dangers, such as your view being blocked,
exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle
interior.
i
Do not place the SmartKey in the open
trunk. You may lock yourself out.
Trunk lid opening/closing system*

Opening the trunk from the inside
You can open the trunk from the inside if
the vehicle is stationary.
The switch for opening and closing the
trunk is located on the drivers door.
1 Handle
Lower trunk lid by pulling firmly on

handle 1.
Close trunk lid with hands placed flat
on it.
Warning!

keep hands and fingers away from the trunk
lid opening when closing the trunk. Be especially careful when small children are
around.
100
i
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
To prevent a possible inadvertent lockout, the trunk lid will open automatically if a SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* is
recognized inside the vehicle or in the
trunk.
1 Remote trunk lid opening switch
2 Remote trunk lid closing switch
Press remote trunk lid opening

switch 1 until the trunk lid begins to
open.
Controls in detail
The trunk lid opens. The indicator lamp
in the switch comes on and remains lit
until the trunk is closed.
!
sufficient overhead clearance. To stop
the opening procedure, press the remote trunk lid opening or closing
switch.

Closing the trunk from the inside
Press the remote trunk lid closing

switch 2 ( page 100) until the indicator lamp in the switch goes out and
the trunk lid is closed.
To interrupt the closing procedure:
Release remote trunk lid closing

switch 2.

( page 106).
Warning!

confirm locking.
interior.
Warning!
Maintain sight of trunk area while operating

the door mounted switch. Monitor the closing procedure carefully to ensure that no
one is in danger of being injured.
To interrupt the closing procedure, release
the door mounted remote trunk lid closing
switch.
SmartKey with you and lock your vehicle. Do
not leave children unattended in the vehicle,
or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may
injury.
If the trunk lid comes into contact with an

object while closing (e.g. luggage that has
been piled too high), the closing procedure
is stopped and the trunk reopens slightly.
101
Controls in detail
Closing the trunk from outside
(vehicles without KEYLESS-GO*)
1 Trunk lid closing switch
Press trunk lid closing switch 1 briefly.

The trunk lid closes.

102
Warning!
Monitor the closing procedure carefully to

ensure that no one is in danger of being injured. To prevent possible personal injury,
always keep hands and fingers away from
the trunk opening when closing the trunk.
Be especially careful when small children
are around. To stop the closing procedure,
press the remote trunk lid opening or closing switch (on drivers door), the trunk lid
closing switch 1, or the button on the
SmartKey.
SmartKey with you and lock your vehicle. Do
not leave children unattended in the vehicle,
or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may
injury.
Warning!
interior.
i
Controls in detail
Closing the trunk from the outside
(vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*)
i
trunk.
Warning!
1 Trunk lid closing switch
Make sure you have the SmartKey with

Press trunk lid closing switch 1 briefly.

The trunk lid closes.

interior.
Warning!

SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO.
103
Controls in detail
Closing the trunk and locking the vehicle from the outside (vehicles with
KEYLESS-GO*)

i
trunk.
1 KEYLESS-GO locking/closing switch

You can close the trunk lid and lock the vehicle simultaneously.
Make sure you have the SmartKey with

Press switch 1 briefly.

The vehicle is locked and the trunk lid
closes automatically. The turn signals
flash three times to confirm locking.
104
Warning!
interior.
Warning!

SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO.
Controls in detail
Trunk lid emergency release
The emergency release button is located

on the inside of the trunk lid.
The emergency release button does

not open the trunk lid if the vehicle battery is discharged or disconnected.
If the emergency release button is

pressed and the vehicle was centrally
locked, the exterior lamps will flash and
the alarm will sound as the trunk lid
opens. To cancel the alarm, do one of
the following:
Briefly press emergency release

button 1.
The trunk unlocks and the trunk lid
opens.
i
1 Emergency release button
Illumination of the emergency release button:
The button will flash for 30 minutes after opening the trunk.
The button will flash for 60 minutes after closing the trunk.
The emergency release button unlocks

and opens the trunk while the vehicle is
standing or driving.
press button or on the

SmartKey.
insert the SmartKey in the starter

switch.
In vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
pull the outside door handle.
press the start/stop button.
105
Controls in detail
Separately locking the trunk
The lock is located next to the recessed

handle.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a function permitting the separate locking of the
trunk using the mechanical key. If present,
this feature can permit you to deny any unauthorized person access to the trunk by
locking the trunk separately and leaving
the SmartKey less the mechanical key with
the vehicle.
To verify the presence of this feature, use
the mechanical key to lock the trunk and
then attempt to open the trunk by pulling
the trunk lid handle after the vehicle has
been centrally unlocked with the
SmartKey.
106
The trunk remains locked even when the

vehicle is centrally unlocked.
i
You can only cancel the separate trunk
locking mode by means of the
mechanical key.
1 Neutral position
2 Locked
Close the trunk lid ( page 100)
Pull the mechanical key out of the

SmartKey ( page 348).
Insert the mechanical key in the trunk

lid lock.
Turn the mechanical key clockwise to

position 2.
Controls in detail
Separately unlocking the trunk
Automatic central locking
Pull the mechanical key out of the

Insert the mechanical key in the trunk

lid lock.
The doors and the trunk automatically lock

when the ignition is switched on and the
wheels are turning at vehicle speeds of approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or more.
Turn the mechanical key counterclockwise to neutral position 1.

You can now open the trunk
( page 98).

Warning!
interior.
You can open a locked door from the inside. Open door only when conditions are
safe to do so.
i
The doors unlock automatically after an
accident if the force of the impact exceeds a preset threshold.
The vehicle automatically locks when
the ignition is switched on and the
wheels are turning at vehicle speeds of
approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or
more. You could therefore lock yourself
out when the vehicle
is pushed or towed
is on a test stand
You can deactivate the automatic locking

using the control system ( page 149).
For more information on towing the vehicle, see Towing the vehicle ( page 390).
107
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking from the inside
The switch is located in the center console.
You can lock or unlock the doors and the

trunk from inside using the central locking
switch. This can be useful, for example, if
you want to lock the vehicle before starting
to drive.

108
Press lower half 2 of the central locking switch.

The vehicle unlocks.
i
You can open a locked door from the
inside. Open door only when conditions
are safe to do so.
The fuel filler flap will not be locked or unlocked with the central locking switch.
Warning!
Unlocking
Central locking switch
1 Locking
2 Unlocking
Locking
Press upper half 1 of the central locking switch.

locked with the SmartKey or the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*, it will
not unlock using the central locking
switch.
If the vehicle was previously locked
with the central locking switch
while in the global remote control

mode, the vehicle is completely unlocked when a door is opened from
the inside.
while in the selective remote control mode, only the door opened
from inside is unlocked.
If both doors are closed, the vehicle

locks.
Controls in detail
Seats
Seats
Information on seat adjustment can be
found in the Getting started section
( page 34).
Easy-entry/exit feature
With the easy-entry/exit feature activated,
the steering wheel tilts upwards and the
drivers seat moves to the rear.
This allows easier entry into and exit from
the vehicle when the drivers door is
opened. However, the engine must be
turned off.
When the SmartKey is inserted in the starter switch or you have pressed the
KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button once and
the drivers door is closed, the steering
wheel and the drivers seat return to their
last set positions.
You can activate the following functions:
You must ensure that no one can become

trapped or injured by the moving steering
wheel and drivers seat when the
easy-entry/exit feature is activated, the
drivers door is being opened, and the engine is turned off or the SmartKey removed
from the starter switch. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Children could
open the driver's door and unintentionally
activate the easy-entry/exit feature, which
personal injury.
Only the steering column is adjusted.
Warning!
Steering column:
Steering column and seat:
Both the steering column and the seat
are adjusted.
The easy-entry/exit feature can be

switched on or off in the convenience submenu of the control system ( page 150).
i
To cancel seat /steering wheel movement, do one of the following:
Press seat adjustment switch

( page 35).
Move the steering column stalk

( page 38).
Press the memory button

( page 116)
109
Controls in detail
Seats
Removing and installing front seat
head restraints
Information on head restraint adjustment
can be found in the Getting started section ( page 36).
Warning!
Installing front head restraints:
Tilt the seat backrest to the rear for

easier removal and installation of the
head restraints.
Press switch 1 upwards and hold for

about five seconds.
Push the head restraint down until it

engages.
Adjust head restraint to desired position ( page 36).
Front seat head restraints
For your protection, drive only with properly

positioned head restraints.
Adjust head restraint so that the center of
the head restraint supports the back of the
head at eye level. This will reduce the potential for injury to the head and neck in the
event of an accident or similar situation.
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat
head restraints. Head restraints are intended to help reduce injuries during an accident.
110
Removing front head restraints
Press switch 1 upwards and hold until

the head restraint is fully extended.
Pull out head restraint.
Controls in detail
Seats
Rear seats head restraints
Warning!
Raising rear head restraints
Lowering rear head restraints
1 Rear seat head restraint
1 Rear head restraint lowering switch

to position 1 or 2 or press the
KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button once
or twice.
Push the rear head restraints lowering

switch 1.
For safety reasons, always drive with the

rear head restraints in the raised position
when the rear seats are occupied.
Keep the area around head restraints clear
of articles (e.g. clothing) to not obstruct the
lowering/raising operation of the head restraints.
Pull head restraint 1 to its highest

position.
The rear head restraints are lowered.
111
Controls in detail
Seats
Multicontour seat*
Seat cushion depth
The multicontour seat has a movable seat

cushion and inflatable air cushions built
into the backrest to provide additional lumbar and side support.
The seat cushion movement, backrest
cushion height and curvature can be continuously varied with switches on the right
side of the seat after starting the engine.
Backrest contour
1 Seat cushion depth

2 Backrest bottom
3 Backrest center
4 Side bolster adjustment
112
Adjust the seat cushion depth to the

length of your upper leg using
switch 1.
Start the engine.
Adjust the contour of the backrest to

the desired position using switches 2
and 3.
Backrest side bolsters
Adjust the backrest side bolsters so

that they provide good lateral support
using switch 4.
Controls in detail
Seats
Seat ventilation*
Both switches for the front seats are located in the center console.
All lamps in the instrument cluster

come on.
If one or all of the lamps flash on the

seat ventilation switch, there is insufficient voltage due to too many electrical
consumers being switched on. The seat
ventilation switches off automatically.
Switching on seat ventilation
Press lower switch position 1.

Two blue indicator lamps on the switch
come on.
1 Seat ventilation
The blue indicator lamps on the switch
show which ventilation level you have
selected:
The seat ventilation will switch back on

again automatically as soon as sufficient voltage is available.
Continue pressing switch 1 until the

desired seat ventilation level is
reached.
Switching off seat ventilation
Press lower switch position 1 repeatedly until all blue indicator lamps go
out.
Level
2
1
off
Two indicator lamps on

One indicator lamp on
No indicator lamp on
113
Controls in detail
Seats
Seat heating*
Switching on seat heating
Switching off rapid seat heating
Vehicles without seat ventilation*
Press upper switch position 1.

A red indicator lamp on the switch
comes on.
Switching off seat heating
Press upper switch position 1 again.
i
The seat heating will be automatically
switched off after approximately
20 minutes.
Switching on rapid seat heating
1 Normal heating
2 Rapid heating

come on.
114

Both red indicator lamps on the switch
come on.
i
The system switches over to normal
heating mode after approximately ten
minutes. Only one indicator lamp remains lit.
!
If one or both of the lamps on the seat
heater switch are flashing, there is insufficient voltage available since too
many electrical consumers are turned
on. The seat heater switches off automatically.
The seat heater will switch back on
Controls in detail
Seats
Vehicles with seat ventilation*

come on.
The system switches over to normal

heating mode after approximately ten
minutes. Only one indicator lamp remains lit.
Switching on seat heating
Press upper switch position 1 twice.

A red indicator lamp on the switch
comes on.
Switching off seat heating
Press upper switch position 1 again.
1 Seat heating
The red indicator lamps on the switch

show the heating level you have selected:
The seat heating will be automatically

switched off after approximately
20 minutes.
Level
2
1
off
Two indicator lamps on
Switching on rapid seat heating
One indicator lamp on
No indicator lamp on
Switching off rapid seat heating mode
Press switch position 1 twice.
!
If one or both of the lamps on the seat
heating switch are flashing, there is insufficient voltage due to too many electrical consumers are turned on. The
seat heating switches off
automatically.
The seat heating will switch back on
Press upper switch position 1 once.

Both red indicator lamps on the switch
come on.
115
Controls in detail
Memory function
Memory function
!
Prior to operating the vehicle, the driver should check and adjust the seat
height, seat position fore and aft, and
seat backrest angle if necessary, to ensure adequate control, reach and comfort. The head restraint should also be
adjusted for proper height. See also the
section on airbags ( page 59) for
proper seat positioning.
The memory button and stored position

switch are located on the door.
You can store up to three different settings
per SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO*.
The following settings are saved for each
stored position:
Drivers seat, backrest and restraint

position
In addition, adjust the steering wheel to

ensure adequate control, reach, operation and comfort. Both the inside and
outside rear view mirrors should be adjusted for adequate rear vision.
Settings for multicontour seat*
Steering wheel position
Drivers side exterior rear view mirror

position
Fasten seat belts. Infants and small

children should be seated in a properly
secured restraint system that complies
with U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards 213 and 225 and Canadian
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213
and 210.2.
Passenger side exterior rear view mirror position
116
These key-dependent memory settings

can be deactivated if desired
( page 151).
Warning!
Do not activate the memory function while

driving. Activating the memory function
while driving could cause the driver to lose
control of the vehicle.
1 Memory button
2 Stored position button
Make sure the ignition is switched on

or the relevant door is open and the
SmartKey is inserted in the starter
switch.
Controls in detail
Memory function
Storing positions into memory
Recalling positions from memory
Warning!
Adjust the seats, steering wheel and
rear view mirrors to the desired position ( page 34).
Turn button 2 to selected memory position.
Press memory button 1.
Release memory button and push

button 2 within three seconds.
All the settings are stored at the selected position.
Turn button 2 to selected memory position.

Press and hold button 2 until the seat,
steering wheel and rear view mirrors
have fully moved to the stored positions.
Do not operate the power seats using the

memory button if the seat backrest is in an
excessively reclined position. Doing so
could cause damage to front or rear seats.
First move the seat backrest to an upright
position.
i
Releasing the button immediately
stops movement to the stored positions.
117
Controls in detail
Memory function
Storing exterior rear view mirror parking position
For easier parking, you can adjust the passenger-side exterior rear view mirror so
that you can see the right rear wheel as
soon as you engage reverse gear R.
For information on activating the parking
position feature, see Setting parking position for exterior rear view mirror
( page 151).
i
You can store a parking position for the
passenger-side exterior rear view mirror for each SmartKey or SmartKey
with KEYLESS-GO*.
Adjust the exterior rear view mirror

with button 2 so that you see the rear
wheel and the road curb.
Press memory button 1.
Within three seconds, press bottom of

adjustment button 2.
The parking position is stored if the
mirror does not move.
1 Memory button
2 Adjustment button
3 Passenger side exterior rear view mirror button
Stop the vehicle.
Switch on ignition (if not already on).
Press button 3.
The passenger-side exterior rear view
mirror is selected.
118
i
If the mirror does move, repeat the
above steps. After the setting is stored
you can move the mirror again.
Controls in detail
Lighting
Lighting
For notes on how to switch on the headlamps and use the turn signals, see
Switching on headlamps ( page 47).
i
If you drive in countries where vehicles
drive on the other side of the road than
the country where the vehicle is registered, you must have the headlamps
modified for symmetrical low beams.
Relevant information can be obtained
at your authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center
Exterior lamp switch

The exterior lamp switch is located on the
dashboard to the left of the steering wheel.
M Off
U Automatic headlamp mode
C Parking lamps (also side marker
lamps, tail lamps, license plate
lamps, instrument panel lamps)
Canada only:
When engine is running, the low
beam is also switched on.
B Low beam plus parking lamps or
high beam headlamps (combination
switch pushed forward).
Standing lamps, right (turn left one
stop)
Standing lamps, left (turn left two
stops)
119
Controls in detail
Lighting
Manual headlamp mode
If you remove the SmartKey and open

the drivers door while the parking
lamps or low beam headlamps are
switched on,
The low beam headlamps and parking

lamps can be switched on and off with the
exterior lamp switch. For exterior lamp
switch, see Exterior lamp switch
( page 119).
a warning sounds
$ appears in the multifunction

display
the message Turn off lamps! appears in the multifunction display
i
With the daytime running lamp mode
activated and the engine running, the
low beam headlamps cannot be
switched off manually.
120
Automatic headlamp mode

The parking lamps, low beam headlamps
and license plate lamps switch on and off
automatically depending on the brightness
of the ambient light.
Turn the exterior lamp switch to U.
Warning!
If the exterior lamp switch is set to U,
the headlamps may switch off unexpectedly when the system senses bright ambient light, for example light from
oncoming traffic.
the headlamps will not be automatically

switched on under foggy conditions.
To minimize risk to you and to others, activate headlamps by turning exterior lamp
switch to B when driving or when traffic
and/or ambient lighting conditions require
you to do so.
In low ambient lighting conditions, only
switch from position U to B with the
vehicle at a standstill. Switching from U
to B will briefly switch off the headlamps. Doing so while driving in low ambient
lighting conditions may result in an accident.
The automatic headlamp feature is only an
aid to the driver. The driver is responsible for
the operation of the vehicle's lights at all
times.
Controls in detail
Lighting
Daytime running lamp mode
USA only
With the daytime running lamp mode

activated, the low beam headlamps will
not be switched off automatically.
The high beam headlamps can also be activated when driving with the daytime running lamp mode activated and exterior
lamp switch in position M.
i
The front fog lamps and rear fog lamp
cannot be switched on manually with
exterior lamp switch in position U.
To activate the fog lamps, turn exterior
lamp switch to position B and pull
the exterior lamp switch to first or second stop ( page 122).
Turn exterior lamp switch to

position M or U.
When the engine is running, the low beam

headlamps are automatically switched on.
In low ambient light conditions the parking
lamps will also switch on.
Canada only
When you shift from a driving position to
position N or P, the low beam switches off
(with a three-minute delay).
For nighttime driving you should turn the
exterior lamp switch to position B to
permit activation of the high beam headlamps.
To activate the daytime running lamp

mode, see Setting daytime running lamp
mode (USA only) ( page 145).
i
See notes on the exterior lamp switch
( page 119).
Locator lighting and night security illumination
Locator lighting and night security illumination are described in the control system
section, see Setting locator lighting
( page 146) and see Setting night security illumination (Exterior lamps delayed
shut-off) ( page 147).
121
Controls in detail
Lighting
Switching on fog lamps
Warning!
In low ambient lighting or foggy conditions,

only switch from position U to B with
the vehicle at a standstill. Switching from
U to B will briefly switch off the headlamps. Doing so while driving in low ambient
lighting conditions may result in an accident.
i
Fog lamps will operate with the parking
lamps and/or the low beam headlamps
on. Fog lamps should only be used in
conjunction with low beam headlamps.
Consult your State or Province Motor
Vehicle Regulations regarding permissible lamp operation.
122
Switching on rear fog lamp
The front fog lamps and rear fog lamp

cannot be switched on manually with
exterior lamp switch in position U.
To activate the fog lamps, turn exterior
lamp switch to position B and pull
the exterior lamp switch to first or second stop ( page 122).
Make sure the low beam headlamps

are switched on.
Pull out exterior lamp switch to second

stop.
Switching on front fog lamps
Make sure the low beam headlamps

are switched on.
Pull out exterior lamp switch to first

stop.
The green indicator lamp beside
the lamp switch comes on.
The yellow indicator lamp beside

the lamp switch comes on.
Controls in detail
Lighting
The high beam indicator A on the
instrument cluster is illuminated
( page 22).
Combination switch
left side of the steering column.
High beam flasher
Pull the combination switch briefly in

direction 2.
Hazard warning flasher

The hazard warning flasher can be activated with the ignition switched on or off. It is
activated automatically when an airbag is
deployed.
1 High beam
2 High beam flasher
Switching on high beams
Turn exterior lamp switch to

position B or to U
( page 119).
Push the combination switch in
direction 1.
1 Hazard warning flasher switch

Switching on the hazard warning
flasher
Press the hazard warning flasher

switch.
All turn signals will flash.
123
Controls in detail
Lighting
i
With the hazard warning flasher activated and the combination switch set
for either left or right turn, only the respective left or right turn signal will operate when the SmartKey in the starter
switch is in position 1 or 2.
Interior lighting
The controls are located in the overhead
control panel.
Press hazard warning flasher switch

again.
i
If the hazard warning flasher was activated automatically, press switch 1
twice.
124
Press the rocker switch 2 to the center position.

Interior lamps are switched on in darkness, even when you:
Switching off the hazard warning

flasher
Activating automatic control
unlock the vehicle
open a door
remove the SmartKey from the

starter switch
The interior lamps are switched off after a

preset time ( page 148).
1 Left front reading lamp
2 Rocker switch for automatic control
system
3 Right front reading lamp
i
If the door remains open, the interior
lamps switch off automatically after approximately five minutes when the
SmartKey is removed or in starter
switch position 0.
Controls in detail
Lighting
Deactivating automatic control
Press the = symbol on rocker

switch 2.
The interior lighting remains switched
off in darkness, even when you:
unlock the vehicle
open a door
remove the SmartKey from the

starter switch
Switching right front reading lamp on

and off
The right reading lamp comes on.
Switching left front reading lamp on and

off
Manual control
Press right button X again.

The right reading lamp goes out.
Switching all front interior lights on and

off
Press right button X.
Press left button X.

The left reading lamp comes on.
Press left button X again.
Door entry lamps

The appropriate door entry lamp switches
on if a door is opened in darkness and if
the interior lighting is switched to automatic function.
The entry lamp switches off automatically
when the door is closed.
i
If you turn the SmartKey in the starter
switch to position 0 and switch off the
exterior headlamps, the door entry
lamps will remain lit for approximately
five minutes.
The left reading lamp goes out.
Press the W symbol on rocker

switch 2.
The front interior lights come on.
Press rocker switch 2 to center

position to activate the automatic
control.
125
Controls in detail
Instrument cluster
Instrument cluster
A full view illustration of the instrument
cluster can be found in the At a glance
section of this manual ( page 22).
Instrument cluster illumination
To brighten illumination
The instrument cluster is activated when

you
open a door
turn on the ignition
press the reset button, see

( page 126)
switch on the exterior lamps
You can change the instrument cluster settings in the Instrument cluster submenu of
the control system ( page 142).
The instrument cluster illumination will

brighten.
To dim illumination
1 Reset button
Use the reset button to adjust the illumination brightness for the instrument cluster.
i
The instrument cluster illumination is
dimmed or brightened automatically to
suit ambient light conditions.
also be adjusted automatically when
you switch on the vehicles exterior
lamps.
126
Turn reset button 1 in the instrument

cluster clockwise.
Turn reset button 1 in the instrument

cluster counterclockwise.
dim.
Controls in detail
Instrument cluster
Coolant temperature indicator
Warning!
Driving when your engine is overheated

can cause some fluids which may have
leaked into the engine compartment to
catch fire. You could be seriously
burned.
Steam from an overheated engine can
cause serious burns and can occur just
by opening the hood. Stay away from
the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it.
During severe operating conditions, e.g.

stop-and-go traffic, the coolant temperature may rise close to 120C.
The engine should not be operated with
the coolant temperature above 120C. Doing so may cause serious engine damage
which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Trip odometer
Make sure you are viewing the trip odometer display ( page 129).
Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle

and do not stand near the vehicle until the
engine has cooled down.
i
Excessive coolant temperature triggers
a warning in the multifunction display
( page 329) and the red coolant warning lamp in the instrument cluster
comes on ( page 315).
If it is not displayed, press button

or on the multifunction steering
wheel repeatedly until the trip odometer appears.
Press and hold reset button 1 on the
instrument cluster ( page 126) until
the trip odometer is reset.
Tachometer
The red marking on the tachometer denotes excessive engine speed.
!
Avoid driving at excessive engine
speeds, as it may result in serious engine damage that is not covered by the
To help protect the engine, the fuel supply
is interrupted if the engine is operated
within the red marking.
CLK 55 AMG
The tachometer of the CLK 55 AMG does
not have a red marking denoting excessive
engine speed
To help protect the engine, the fuel supply
is interrupted if the engine is operated at
an excessive engine speed.
127
Controls in detail
Instrument cluster
Outside temperature indicator
Warning!
The outside temperature indicator is not designed to serve as an ice-warning device and
is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.
Indicated temperatures just above the freezing point do not guarantee that the road surface is free of ice. The road may still be icy,
especially in wooded areas or on bridges.
The outside temperature is displayed in

the multifunction display ( page 22). For
information on how to select the unit of the
displayed temperature, i.e. degrees Celsius (C) or degrees Fahrenheit (F), see
Selecting temperature display mode
( page 142)
128
The temperature sensor is located in the

front bumper area. Due to its location, the
sensor can be affected by road or engine
heat during idling or slow driving. This
means that the accuracy of the displayed
temperature can only be verified by comparison to a thermometer placed next to
the sensor, not by comparison to external
displays (e.g. bank signs etc.).
When moving the vehicle into colder ambient temperatures (e.g. when leaving your
garage), you will notice a delay before the
lower temperature is displayed.
A delay also occurs when ambient temperatures rise. This prevents inaccurate temperature indications caused by heat
radiated from the engine during idling or
slow driving.
Controls in detail
Control system
Control system
The control system is activated as soon as
the SmartKey in the starter switch is
turned to position 1 or as soon as the
KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button is in
position 1. The control system enables you
to
call up information about your vehicle
change vehicle settings
For example, you can use the control system to find out when your vehicle is next
due for service, to set the language for
messages in the instrument cluster display, and much more.
i
The displays for the audio systems (radio, CD player, cassette player) will appear in English, regardless of the
language selected.
Warning!
Multifunction display
A drivers attention to the road and traffic

must always be his/her primary focus when
driving.
For your safety and the safety of others, selecting features through the multifunction
steering wheel should only be done by the
driver when traffic and road conditions permit it to be done safely.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately 13.5 m) every second.
1 Outside temperature
2 Trip odometer
3 Automatic transmission program mode
4 Main odometer
5 Current gear selector lever position
The control system relays information to

129
Controls in detail
Control system
The displays in the multifunction display
and the settings in the control system are
controlled by the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel ( page 24).
1 Multifunction display in the speedometer

Operating the control system
2 Selecting the submenu or setting
the volume
down / to decrease
up / to increase
3 Telephone*
to take a call
to end a call
4 Menu systems
for next menu
for previous menu
5 Moving within a menu
j for next display
k for previous display
130
Pressing any of the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel will alter what is
shown in the multifunction display.
The information available in the multifunction display is arranged in menus, each
containing a number of functions or submenus.
The individual functions are then found
within the relevant menu (radio or CD operations under Audio, for example). These
functions serve to call up relevant information or to customize the settings for your
vehicle.
Controls in detail
Control system
It is helpful to think of the menus, and the
functions within each menu, as being arranged in a circular pattern.
If you press button or repeatedly, you will pass through each

menu one after the other.
If you press button k or j repeatedly, you will pass through each
function display, one after the other, in
the current menu.
In the Settings menu, instead of functions

you will find a number of submenus for
calling up and changing settings. For instructions on using these submenus, see
Settings menu ( page 139).
The number of menus available in the system depends on which optional equipment
is installed in your vehicle.
The menus are described on the following
pages.
131
Controls in detail
Control system
Menus
132
This is what you will see when you scroll

through the menus.
The table on the next page provides an

overview of the individual menus.
Controls in detail
Control system
Commands/submenus
Menus, submenus and functions

Menu 1
Menu 2
Menu 3
Menu 4
Menu 5
Menu 6
Menu 7
Menu 8
Standard display
AUDIO
NAVI*
Distronic*
Malfunction
memory
Settings
Trip computer
Telephone
Digital speedometer
Select radio Activate

station
route guidance
Call up settings
Call up malfunc- Reset to factory Fuel consumption Load phone

tion messages
settings
statistics after
book
start
Call up FSS
Select
satellite radio station
Check engine oil Operate CD

level
player*
Operate cassette player
Instrument clus- Fuel consumption Search for

ter submenu
statistics since
name in
the last reset
phone book
Time submenu
Call up range
Lighting submenu
Vehicle submenu
Convenience
submenu
133
Controls in detail
Control system
Standard display menu
AUDIO menu
The headings used in the menus table

are designed to facilitate navigation
within the system and are not necessarily identical to those shown in the
control system displays.
You can select the functions in the standard display menu with button k
or j.
The functions in the Audio menu operate

the audio equipment which you currently
have turned on.
The following functions are available:
If no audio equipment is currently turned

on, the message Audio off is shown in the
display.
The first function displayed in each

menu will automatically show you
which part of the system you are in.
Function
Page
Call up digital speedometer
134
Call up FSS
303
Check engine oil level
289
Display digital speedometer
Press the j or k button repeatedly until you see the digital speedometer appear in the display.
The current vehicle speed is shown in
134
The following functions are available:

Function
Page
Select radio station
135
Select satellite radio station* 135

Operate CD player*
136
Operate cassette player
136
Controls in detail
Control system
Select radio station
Turn on the radio ( page 186). Vehicles with COMAND*: Refer to separate
operating instructions.
Press button or repeatedly
until you see the currently tuned station in the display.
The type of search depends on the setting

for the station tuning ( page 149):
The next stored station is selected (SP)
The Sirius -Satellite - Radio is treated as a

radio application.
Station search
Select SAT radio with the corresponding softkey in the radio menu.
You can only store new stations using

the designated feature on the radio
( page 191). Vehicles with
COMAND*: Refer to separate operating instructions.
You can also operate the radio in the
usual manner.
1 Waveband
2 Setting for station selection using
memory
3 Station frequency
Select satellite radio station*
1 SAT mode and preset number

2 Setting for station selection using
memory
3 Channel name or number
Press button k or j repeatedly

until the desired channel is found.

until the desired station is found.
135
Controls in detail
Control system
Operate the CD player*
Operate the Cassette player*
Feature description is based on preliminary information available at time of

printing.
Turn on the radio and select the CD

player ( page 199). Vehicles with
COMAND*: Refer to separate operating instructions.
Turn on the radio and select the cassette player ( page 196). Vehicles
with COMAND*: Refer to separate operating instructions.

until the settings for the CD currently
being played are shown in the display.

until the settings for the cassette currently being played are shown in the
display.
For more information on satellite radio

operation, see Satellite radio (SAT)*
(USA only) ( page 192).
Vehicles with COMAND*: Refer to separate operating instructions.
1 Current CD (for CD changer*)

2 Current track

until the desired track is selected.
Press button j to fast forward to

the next track.
Press button k to rewind the cassette to the beginning of the current

track.
To select a CD from the magazine,

press a number on the audio system or
the COMAND* system key pad located
in the center dashboard.
136
1 Current side
Controls in detail
Control system
i
To select the reverse side of the tape,
press button below track number on
the audio system display, or enter request on the COMAND* system located in the center dashboard.
NAV menu
The Nav menu contains the functions needed to operate your navigation system.

until you see the message Nav in the
display.
If the navigation system is switched off,

the message Nav off is shown in the
display.
If the navigation system is on, the message Nav active is shown in the display.
Distronic* menu
Use the Distronic menu to display the current settings for your Distronic system.
What information is shown in the display
depends on whether the Distronic system
is active or inactive.
Please refer to the Driving systems section of this manual ( page 229) for instructions on how to activate Distronic.

until you see one of the following two
pictures in the display.
Distronic deactivated
When Distronic is deactivated you will see
the standard display in the display.
1 Vehicle ahead, if detected

2 Actual distance to vehicle ahead
3 Preset distance threshold to vehicle
ahead
4 Your vehicle
5 Symbol for activated distance warning
function
Please refer to the COMAND* manual for

instructions on how to activate the route
guidance system*.
137
Controls in detail
Control system
Distronic activated
When you activate Distronic, you will see
the set speed for about five seconds in the
Distronic display. The following display
then appears:
Use the malfunction memory menu to scan

malfunction and warning messages that
may be stored in the system. What information is shown in the display depends on
whether malfunctions have actually occurred.
Warning!
1 Distronic activated
138
Malfunction memory menu
Malfunction and warning messages are only

indicated for certain systems and are intentionally not very detailed. The malfunction
and warning messages are simply a reminder with respect to the operation of certain
systems and do not replace the owners
and/or drivers responsibility to maintain
the vehicles operating safety by having all
required maintenance and safety checks
performed on the vehicle and by bringing
the vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center to address the malfunction and
warning messages ( page 320).

until you see the malfunction message
memory in the display.
No malfunction messages
If no malfunctions have occurred, the message in the display is:
No Malfunction
Malfunctions have occurred

If malfunctions have occurred, you will see
the number of malfunctions in the display:
1 Number of malfunctions
Press button k or j.
The stored messages will now be displayed in order. See the Practical
hints section for malfunction and
warning messages ( page 320).
Controls in detail
Control system
Should any malfunctions occur while driving, the number of malfunctions will reappear in the display when the SmartKey in
the starter switch is turned to position 0 or
removed from the starter switch.
Settings menu
In the Settings menu there are two functions:
The function Reset to factory settings?, with which you can reset all the
settings to the original factory settings.
A collection of submenus with which

you can make individual settings for
your vehicle.

until the Settings menu is seen in the
display.
i
The message memory will be cleared
when you turn the SmartKey in the
starter switch to position 1 or 2. You
will then only see High-priority malfunctions ( page 320).
Resetting all settings

You can reset all the functions of all submenus to the factory settings.
Press the reset button in the instrument cluster for approximately three
seconds.
In the display you will see the request
to press the reset button again to confirm.
Press the reset button again.

The functions of all the submenus will
reset to factory settings.
i
The settings you have changed will not
be reset unless you confirm the action
by pressing the reset button a second
time. After approximately five seconds,
you will see the Settings... menu
again.
139
Controls in detail
Control system
Submenus in the Settings menu
Press button k or j.
In the display you see the collection of
the submenus.
The submenus are arranged by hierarchy.

Scroll down with the button, scroll up
with the button.
Move within the submenus with the k
or j button to the individual functions.
The settings themselves are made with
button or .
Press button .
The selection marker moves to the next
submenu.
140
Resetting the functions of a submenu

For each submenu you can reset all the
functions to the factory settings.
Move to a function in the submenu.
Press the reset button ( page 126) in

the instrument cluster for approximately three seconds.
In the display you will see the request
to press the reset button again to confirm.
Press the reset button again.

All functions of the submenu will reset
to factory settings.
Controls in detail
Control system
The table below shows what settings can
be changed within the various menus. Detailed instructions on making individual
settings can be found on the following pages.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER TIME
LIGHTING
Select temperature display mode
Set daytime running lamp Set station selection

mode (USA only)
mode (radio)
Activate easy-entry/exit
feature
Select speedometer dis- Set time (minutes)

play mode
Set locator lighting
Set key-dependency
Select language
Exterior lamps delayed

shut-off
Select display (speed display or outside temperature) for status display
Interior lighting delayed

shut-off
Set time (hours)
VEHICLE
Set automatic locking
CONVENIENCE
Set parking position for

exterior rear view mirror
Select display (speed display or outside temperature) for standard display
141
Controls in detail
Control system
Instrument cluster submenu
Selecting temperature display mode
Selecting speedometer display mode
Access the Instr. cluster submenu via

the Settings menu. Use the Instr. cluster submenu to change the instrument
cluster display settings. The following
functions are available:
Move the selection marker with

the or button to the Instr.
cluster submenu.

cluster submenu.
Press button j or k repeatedly

until you see this message in the display: Temp. indicator.

until you see this message in the display: Display unit.
Function
Page
Select temperature display

mode
142
Select speedometer display

mode
142
Select language
143
Select display (speed display or 143

outside temperature) for status
display
Select display (speed display or 144
outside temperature) for standard display
142
The selection marker is on the current

setting.
Press or to set the temperature unit to degrees Celsius (C) or degrees Fahrenheit (F).

setting.
Press or to set speedometer unit to km or miles.
Controls in detail
Control system
Selecting language

cluster submenu.
until you see this message in the display: Language.
setting.
Press or to select the language to be used for the multifunction

display messages.
Selecting display (speed display or outside temperature) for status indicator

cluster submenu.

until you see this message in the display: Status line display.
Available languages:
German
English
French
Italian
Spanish

setting.
Press or to select the status line to degrees Fahrenheit (F) or

miles
i
You will see the status indicator when
you have called up a different display
from the standard display.
143
Controls in detail
Control system
Selecting display (speed display or outside temperature) for standard display

cluster submenu.
until you see this message in the display: Basic display.
setting.
Press or to select the display permanently shown in the multifunction display.
Time submenu
Set time (hours)
This function is only available in vehicles

with audio system.

the or button to the Time
submenu.

until you see this message in the display: Clock, hours.
i
Vehicles with COMAND*:
For information on setting the time, refer to the separate COMAND operating
instructions.
The selection marker is on the hour setting.
Access the Time submenu via the Settings

menu. Use the Time submenu to change
the time display settings. The following
Function
Page
Set time (hours)
144
Set time (minutes)
145
Press or to set the hour.
Press the reset button in the instrument cluster to confirm.

The hour is set and stored.
144
Controls in detail
Control system
Set time (minutes)
Lighting submenu
Access the Lighting submenu via the Settings menu. Use the Lighting submenu
to change the lamp and lighting settings on
your vehicle. The following functions are
available:

the or button to the Time
submenu.
until you see this message in the display: Clock, minutes.
The selection marker is on the minute
setting.
Press or to set the minutes.
Press the reset button in the instrument cluster to confirm.

The minutes are set and stored.
Function
Setting daytime running lamp mode

(USA only)

the or button to the Lighting submenu.

until you see this message in the display: Lamp circuit headlamp.
Page
Set daytime running lamp mode 145

(USA only)
Set locator lighting
146
Exterior lamps delayed

switch-off
147
Interior lighting delayed

switch-off
148

setting.
Press or to select manual or

daytime running lamp (constant)
mode. This function is not available in
countries where daytime running
lamps are mandatory.
145
Controls in detail
Control system
With daytime running lamp mode selected and the exterior lamp switch at
position 0, the following lamps will
come on automatically when the engine is turned on:
Parking lamps and low beam headlamps
License plate lamps (in low ambient

light conditions)
Setting locator lighting
During darkness, the following lamps will

come on when the exterior lamp switch is
in position U, the locator lighting feature is activated, and the vehicle is unlocked by remote control:

the or button to the Lightning submenu.

until you see this message in the display: Function Surround lighting.
Parking lamps
Tail lamps
License plate lamps
Front fog lamps
If you turn the exterior lamp switch to

another position, the corresponding
lamp(s) will switch on.
To activate locator lighting:
For safety reasons, resetting the

Lighting submenu to factory settings
( page 140) while driving will not reset the daytime running lamp mode.
Make sure the function surround lighting is set to on, see ( page 146).
Turn the exterior lamp switch to position U.
In the display you will then see the message: Lighting Cannot be completely reset to factory settings
while driving.
146
The locator lighting switches off when the

drivers door is opened. It switches off automatically after a period of approximately
40 seconds.

setting.
Press or to select the desired setting.

The locator lighting will be switched on
or off.
Controls in detail
Control system
Setting night security illumination
(Exterior lamps delayed shut-off)
Use the Headlamps delayed shut-off
function to set whether and for how long
you would like the exterior lamps to illuminate during darkness after all doors are
closed. When the delayed shut-off feature
is activated and the exterior lamp switch is
in position U, the following lamps will
remain lit after you remove the SmartKey
from the starter switch:
Parking lamps
Tail lamps
License plate lamps
Front fog lamps
To activate night security illumination:
You can select:
Select delayed shut-off period,

see ( page 147).
Turn the exterior lamp switch to position U.
To select delayed shut-off period:

until you see this message in the display: Headlamps delayed shut-off.
deactivated
15 s, 30 s, 45 s or 60 s, the delayed
shut-off feature is activated

You can temporarily deactivate the delayed shut-off feature:
Before leaving the vehicle turn the

position 0.
Then turn it to position 2 and back

to 0.

setting.
The delayed shut-off feature is deactivated. It will reactivate as soon as you

reinsert the SmartKey in the starter
switch.
For vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
You can reactivate this function within

ten minutes by opening a door.
If you do not open a door after removing the SmartKey, the lamps will automatically switch off after 60 seconds.
0 s, the delayed shut-off feature is
Press or to select the desired lamp-on period.
Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button on the gear selector lever

( page 33).
147
Controls in detail
Control system
Interior lighting delayed shut-off
Use this function to set whether and for
how long you would like the interior lighting to remain lit during darkness after the
SmartKey is removed from the starter
switch.


until you see this message in the display: Interior lamp delayed
shut-off.
setting.
148
Press or to select the desired lamp-on time period. You can select:
Vehicle submenu
0 s, the delayed shut-off feature is

deactivated.
Access the Vehicle submenu via the Settings menu. Use the Vehicle submenu to
make general vehicle settings. The following functions are available:
5 s, 10 s, 15 s or 20 s, the delayed
Function
Page
Set station selection mode

(radio)
149
Set automatic locking
149
shut-off feature is activated.
Controls in detail
Control system
Setting station selection mode
Setting automatic locking
Convenience submenu
Use the Audio Search function to select

the manual or memory station selection
mode for the radio ( page 135).
Use this function to activate or deactivate

the automatic central locking. With the automatic central locking system activated,
the vehicle is centrally locked at vehicle
speeds of approximately 9 mph
(15 km/h).
Access the Convenience submenu via the

Settings menu. Use the Convenience sub-

the or button to the Vehicle submenu.
until you see this message in the display: Audio Search function.
setting.

the or button to the Vehicle submenu.
until you see this message in the display: Automatic door lock.
menu to change the settings for a number

of convenience features. The following
Function
Page
Activate easy-entry/exit feature 150

Set key-dependency
151
Set parking position for exterior 151

rear view mirror

setting.
Press or to select the desired station selection mode. You can

select:
freq.
memory selects next stored station
Press or to switch
Automatic door lock on or off.
149
Controls in detail
Control system
Activating easy-entry/exit feature
Use this function to activate and deactivate the easy-entry/exit feature. When the
feature is activated, the steering wheel and
drivers seat will move back to facilitate exiting when you
remove the SmartKey from the starter

switch
open the drivers door
However, the engine must be turned off.
150
Warning!
You must make sure no one can become

trapped or injured by the moving steering
wheel and the drivers seat when the
easy-entry/exit feature is in operation and
the drivers door is being opened or the
SmartKey is removed from the starter
switch.
Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Children could open the drivers door and
unintentionally activate the easy-entry/exit
feature, which could result in an accident
After entering the vehicle, the steering

wheel and seat will move into the position
stored in memory when
the drivers door is closed.
you put the SmartKey in the starter

switch or press the KEYLESS-GO*
start/stop button.
press the appropriate stored position

button on the memory switch
( page 116).
i
To cancel seat/steering wheel movement, do one of the following:
Press seat adjustment switch

( page 35)
Move the steering column stalk

( page 38)
Press the memory switch

( page 116)
Controls in detail
Control system

the or button to
the Convenience submenu.

until you see this message in the display: Function Easy-entry feature.
off
The easy-entry/exit feature is deactivated.
Steering col.
Only the steering

column is moved.
Steer. col. + seat Both the steering

setting.
column and the

seat are moved.
Setting key-dependency
Press or to change the

easy-entry/exit setting.
The following settings are available for
the easy-entry/exit feature:
Use this function to set whether the memory settings for the seats, the steering
wheel and the mirrors should be stored
separately for each SmartKey or SmartKey
with KEYLESS-GO ( page 116).

the or button to

until you see this message in the display: Key-dependent.
Press or to set key-dependency to on or off.
Setting parking position for exterior rear

view mirror
Use the Mirror adjustment parking aid
function to select whether the passenger-side exterior rear view mirror should be
turned downward during parking maneuvers, when reverse gear is engaged. For
additional information, see Activating exterior rear view mirror parking position
( page 169).

setting.
151
Controls in detail
Control system

the or button to
until you see this message in the display: Mirror adjustment parking aid.
setting.
Trip computer menu
Fuel consumption statistics after start
Use the trip computer menu to call up statistical data on your vehicle. The following
information is available:
Function
Page
Fuel consumption statistics after 152

start
Fuel consumption statistics
since last reset

until you see the first function of the
Trip computer menu.

until you see this message in the left
display: After start.
153
Call up range (distance to empty) 153
Press or to switch function

on or off.
152
1 Distance driven since start

2 Time elapsed since start
3 Average speed since start
4 Average fuel consumption since start
Controls in detail
Control system
Call up range (distance to empty)
All statistics stored since the last engine start will be reset approximately
four hours after the SmartKey in the
starter switch is turned to position 0 or
removed from the starter switch.

Trip computer menu.

until you see this message in the display: Range.
Resetting will not occur if you turn the

SmartKey back to position 1 or 2 within this time period.
Fuel consumption since last reset

Trip computer menu.
until you see this message in the display: After reset.
1 Distance driven since last reset

2 Time elapsed since last reset
3 Average speed since last reset
4 Average fuel consumption since last reset
In the display you will see the calculated range based on the current fuel tank
level.
Resetting fuel consumption statistics

Trip computer menu.

until you see the reading that you want
to reset in the display.
Press and hold the reset button in the

instrument cluster ( page 126) until
the value is reset to 0.
153
Controls in detail
Control system
TEL menu*
Warning!
A drivers attention to the road must always

be his/her primary focus when driving. For
your safety and the safety of others, we recommend that you pull over to a safe location
and stop before placing or taking a telephone call. If you choose to use the telephone while driving, please use the
hands-free device and only use the telephone when weather, road and traffic conditions permit.
Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from
using a cellular telephone while driving a vehicle.
covering a distance of approximately
44 feet (approximately 13.5 m) every second.
154
Never operate radio transmitters equipped

with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. without being connected to an external antenna)
from inside the vehicle while the engine is
running. Doing so could lead to a malfunction of the vehicles electronic system, possibly resulting in an accident and or
personal injury.
You can use the functions in the Tel menu

to operate your telephone, provided it is
connected to a hands-free system and
switched on.
Switch on the telephone and Audio or

COMAND*.

steering wheel repeatedly until you see
the Tel menu in the display.
Which messages will appear in the display

field depends on whether your telephone is
switched on or off:
If the telephone is off, the message in

the multifunction display is: Tel off.
If the telephone is on:

The telephone will then search for a
network. During this time the display is
empty.
As soon as the telephone has found a
network, READY is indicated in the display.
1 Signal strength
This standby message indicates that your
telephone is ready for use and you can operate it using the control system.
Controls in detail
Control system
Answering a call
Ending a call
Vehicles with Audio system:

The signal strength is indicated in the
top right corner, for example S9. The
higher the number, the stronger the
signal from the cellular network.
When your telephone is ready to receive

calls, you can answer a call at any time. In
the display you will then see the message:
Vehicles with COMAND*:

The signal strength is indicated by bars
in the top left corner. The higher the
number of bars, the stronger the signal
from the cellular network.
Press button .
You have ended the call. In the display
you will again see the standby message.
Dialing a number from the phone book
Press button .
You have answered the call. In the display you see the length of the call.
i
If you do not wish to accept a call,
press button .
If your telephone is ready to receive calls,

you may select and dial a number from the
phone book at any time.

until you see the Tel menu in the display.
Press button j or k.
The control system reads the phone
book which is stored in the telephone.
This may take up to 30 seconds. In the
display you will see the message
Please wait.
When the message Please wait disappears, the phone book has been load
ed.
155
Controls in detail
Control system

until the desired name appears in the
display.
The stored names are displayed in ascending or descending alphabetical order.
Press button .
Redialing
The system dials the selected phone

number.
The control system stores the most recently dialed phone numbers. This eliminates
the need to search through your entire
phone book.
If connection is successful, the

name of the party you called and
the duration of the call will appear
in the display.
If you press and hold j or k for

longer than one second, the system
scrolls rapidly through the list of names
until you release the button again.
Cancel the quick search mode by
pressing .

until you see the Tel menu in the display.
Press button .
In the display you see the first number
in the redial memory.
If no connection is made, the control system stores the dialed number in the redial memory.

until the desired name appears in the
display.
i
If you do not want to use the telephone,
press button .
Press button .
The control system dials the selected
phone number.
156
Controls in detail
Information on driving with an automatic
transmission is found in the Getting
started section ( page 44).
Your vehicles transmission adapts its gear
shifting process to your individual driving
style by continually adjusting the shift
points up or down. These shift point adjustments are performed based on current
operating and driving conditions.
If the operating conditions change, the
automatic transmission reacts by
adjusting its gear shift program.
The automatic transmission selects individual gears automatically, depending on:
the gear selector lever position D with

gear ranges 4, 3, 2, 1 ( page 159)
the selected shift program

(C/S) ( page 163)
Warning!
It is dangerous to shift the gear selector

lever out of P or N if the engine speed is
higher than idle speed. If your foot is not
firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could
accelerate quickly forward or reverse. You
could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and when
your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
or
(C/S/M) (CLK 55 AMG only)
( page 163)
the position of the accelerator pedal

( page 163)
the vehicle speed
During the brief warm-up, transmission

upshifting is delayed. This allows the
catalytic converter to heat up more
quickly to operating temperature.
The current gear selector lever position

and shift program (C/S) or (C/S/ M) appear
in the multifunction display ( page 129).
An additional indication of the current gear
selector lever position can be found on the
cover of the shifting-gate. The indicators
come on when you activate a switch (e.g.
unlocking the vehicle or opening a door)
and go out after approximately
15 minutes.
When the gear selector lever is in

position D, you can influence transmission
shifting by
limiting the gear range
changing gears manually
157
Controls in detail
One-touch gearshifting
Even with an automatic transmission you
can change the gears manually when the
gear selector lever is in position D.
Downshifting
Briefly press the gear selector lever to

the left in the D direction.
The transmission will shift from the current

gear to the next lower gear. This action
simultaneously limits the gear range of the
transmission ( page 159).
Warning!

result in drive wheel slip and reduced
vehicle control. Your vehicles ABS will not
prevent this type of loss of control.
158
Canceling gear range limit
To avoid overrevving the engine when

the gear selector lever is moved to
the D direction, the transmission will
not shift to a lower gear if the engine's
max. speed would be exceeded.
Upshifting

the right in the D+ direction.

gear to the next higher gear as permitted
by the shift program. This action simultaneously extends the gear range of the
transmission.
Press and hold the gear selector lever

in the D+ direction until D reappears in

gear range directly to gear range D.
Shifting into optimal gear range
Press and hold the gear selector lever

in the D direction.
The transmission will automatically select

the gear range suited for optimal
acceleration and deceleration. This will
involve shifting down one or more gears.
Controls in detail
Gear ranges
With the gear selector lever in position D,
you can limit the transmissions gear range
by pressing the gear selector lever to the
left (D-), and reverse the gear range limit
by pressing the gear selector lever to the
right (D+).
The selected gear range appears in the

multifunction display. If you press on the
accelerator when the engine has reached
its rpm limit, the transmission will upshift
beyond any gear range limit selected.
Effect
The transmission shifts through

fourth gear only.

third gear only.
With this selection you can use

the braking effect of the engine.
Effect

second gear only.
Allows the use of engines

braking power when driving:
on steep downgrades
in mountainous regions
under extreme operating

conditions
The transmission operates only

in first gear.
For maximum use of engines

braking effect on very steep or
lengthy downgrades.
159
Controls in detail
Effect
Park position
when the vehicle is parked. Place
gear selector lever in position P
only when vehicle is stopped.
The park position is not intended
to serve as a brake when the
vehicle is parked. Rather, the
driver should always set the
parking brake in addition to
placing the gear selector lever in
position P to secure the vehicle.
Effect
The SmartKey can only be
removed from the starter switch
with the gear selector lever in
position P. With the SmartKey
removed, the gear selector lever
is locked in position P.
If the vehicles electrical system
is malfunctioning, the gear
selector lever could remain
locked in position P
( page 352).
Reverse gear
Place gear selector lever in
position R only when vehicle is
stopped.
Effect
Neutral
No power is transmitted from the
engine to the drive axle. When
the brakes are released, the
vehicle can be moved freely
(pushed or towed).
To avoid damage to the transmission, never engage N while
driving.
If the ESP is deactivated or
malfunctioning:
Move gear selector lever to N
only if the vehicle is in danger of
skidding, e.g. on icy roads.
Drive
The transmission shifts
automatically. All five forward
gears are available.
160
Controls in detail
!
Coasting the vehicle, or driving for any
other reason with gear selector lever
in N can result in transmission damage
that is not covered by the
Warning!
Getting out of your vehicle with the gear

selector lever not fully engaged in position P
is dangerous. Also, position P alone is not
intended to or capable of preventing your
vehicle from moving, possibly hitting people
or objects.
Always set the parking brake in addition to
shifting to position P ( page 46).
When parked on an incline, turn the front
wheels towards the road curb.
Warning!

unlocked vehicle. Children could move the
gear selector lever from position P, which
personal injury.

(Speedshift) CLK 55 AMG
In the manual shift program mode you can
change the gears manually on the steering
wheel or by using the gear selector lever
( page 158).
Allow engine to warm up under low load
use. Do not place full load on the engine
until the operating temperature has been
reached. Shift into reverse gear only when
the vehicle is stopped.
!
extended period when driving off on
slippery road surfaces. This may cause
serious damage to the drive train which
is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
Do not park this vehicle in areas where combustible materials such as gras, hay, or
161
Controls in detail
The steering wheel gearshift buttons are
located to the left and right of the steering
wheel.
Downshifting
Upshifting
Press button 2 on the left side of the

steering wheel.
When driving in the manual program mode

( page 164), the transmission will shift
from the current gear to the next lower
gear ( page 165).
Warning!
1 Shift button
2 Left button: downshift
3 Right button: upshift

i
You cannot shift with the steering
wheel gearshift buttons when the gear
selector lever is in position P, N or R.
162
Press button 3 on the right side of the

steering wheel.
When driving in the manual program mode

( page 164), the transmission will shift
from the current gear to the next higher
gear ( page 165).
i
You cannot shift with the steering
wheel gearshift buttons when the gear
selector lever is in position P, N or R.
Controls in detail
Program mode selector switch
The program mode selector switch is
located on the lower part of the center
console.
Press the program mode selector

switch 1 repeatedly until the letter of
the desired shift program appears in
the multifunction display ( page 129).
Accelerator position
Select C for comfort driving:
Less throttle
Earlier upshifting
The vehicle starts out in second

gear (both forward and reverse) for
gentler starts. This does not apply if
full throttle is applied or gear
range 1 is selected.
More throttle
Later upshifting
Traction and driving stability are

improved on icy roads.
Upshifts occur earlier even when

you give more gas. The engine then
operates at lower rpms and the
wheels are less likely to spin.
1 Program mode selector switch

S Sport
For standard driving
C Comfort
For comfort driving
!
Never change the program mode when
the gear selector lever is out of
position P. This could result in a
change of driving characteristics for
which you may not be prepared.
The power transmission ratio for

gear selector lever position R
changes depending on the program
mode selected (S or C).
Your driving style influences the

transmissions shifting behavior:
Kickdown
Use kickdown when you want maximum
acceleration.
Press the accelerator past the point of
resistance.
The transmission shifts into a lower
gear.
Ease on the accelerator when you have

reached the desired speed.
The transmission shifts up again.
163
Controls in detail
Manual shift program CLK 55 AMG
In the manual shift program mode you can
change the gears manually on the steering
wheel ( page 161) or by using the gear
selector lever ( page 158).
Activating manual shift program
The program mode selector switch is

located on the lower part of the center
console.
The program mode switches to manual

program mode M. Automatic shifting is
switched off. The gear range is not
limited.
Allow engine to warm up under low load

use. Do not place full load on the engine
until the operating temperature has been
reached. Shift into reverse gear only when
the vehicle is stopped.
You can change the gears manually when

the gear selector lever is in position D. You
can upshift or downshift through the gears
in succession.
!
extended period when driving off on
slippery road surfaces. This may cause
serious damage to the drive train which
is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
1 Program mode selector switch

S Sport
For standard driving
C Comfort
For comfort driving
M Manual
For manual gear shifting
The selected shift program (C/S/M) is

indicated in the multifunction display
( page 129).
164
Press program mode selector

switch 1 repeatedly until the M for
manual shift program appears in the
The current gear selector lever position

and the selected shift program (C/S/M) is
indicated in the multifunction display
( page 129).
Controls in detail
Downshifting
Upshifting
Deactivating manual shift program

the left in the D- direction
( page 158).
or

the right in the D+ direction
( page 158).
or
Press button 2 on the left side of the
steering wheel ( page 161).
The transmission shifts to the next
lower gear.
Warning!

Press the program mode selector

switch repeatedly until S or C appears
in the right multifunction display field.
or
Press button 3 on the right side of the
steering wheel ( page 161).
The transmission shifts to the next
higher gear.
Restart the engine.

The transmission will go into the last
shift program mode selected (S or C).
Program mode M is not stored.
i
The last selected automatic program
mode (S or C) is switched on when the
engine is restarted in the automatic
program mode.
165
Controls in detail
Emergency operation (Limp Home
Mode)
If vehicle acceleration worsens or the
transmission no longer shifts, the transmission is most likely operating in limp
home (emergency operation) mode. In this
mode, only second gear and reverse gear
can be activated.
Stop the vehicle.
Move gear selector lever to P.
Turn off the engine.
Wait at least ten seconds before

restarting.
Restart the engine.
Move gear selector lever to position D

(for second gear) or R.
Have the transmission checked at an

authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
soon as possible.
166
Controls in detail
Good visibility
Good visibility
Windshield wipers
More information on the windshield wipers
can be found in the Getting started section ( page 48).
i
Intermittent wiping is interrupted when
the vehicle is at a standstill and a door
is opened.
A rain sensor automatically controls the
windshield wipers depending on how wet
the windshield is.
Switch ignition on.
Set the wiper switch to position I

( page 49).
After the initial wipe, pauses between

wipes are automatically controlled by the
rain sensor.
!
Do not leave windshield wipers in intermittent setting when the vehicle is taken to an automatic car wash or during
windshield cleaning. Wipers will operate in the presence of water sprayed on
the windshield, and wipers may be
damaged as a result.
The switch should not be left in intermittent setting as the wipers will wipe
the windshield once every time the engine is started. Dust that accumulates
on the windshield might scratch the
glass and/or damage the wiper blades
when wiping occurs on a dry windshield.
Headlamp cleaning system*

The switch is located on the left side of the
dashboard.
1 Headlamp washer switch
Switch on ignition.
Press switch 1.
The headlamps are cleaned with a
high-pressure water jet.
For information on filling up the washer

reservoir, see Windshield washer system
and headlamp cleaning system*
( page 416).
167
Controls in detail
Good visibility
Rear view mirror
Warning!
More information on setting the rear view
mirrors can be found in the Getting started section ( page 38).
Automatic antiglare rear view mirror
The reflection brightness of the exterior
rear view mirror on the drivers side and
the interior rear view mirror will respond
automatically to glare when
The automatic antiglare function does not

react if incoming light is not aimed directly
at sensors in the interior rear view mirror.
The interior rear view mirror and the exterior
rear view mirror on the drivers side do not
react, for example, if the wind screen is installed.
Glare can endanger you and others.
incoming light from headlamps falls on

the sensor in the interior rear view mirror.
The rear view mirror will not react if
reverse gear is engaged
the interior lighting is turned on
168
Warning!
Warning!
Exercise care when using the passenger

side exterior rear view mirror. The mirror
surface is convex (outwardly curved surface
for a wider field of view). Objects in mirror
are closer than they appear. Check your interior rear view mirror or glance over your
shoulder before changing lanes.
the ignition is switched on,

and
In the case of an accident, liquid electrolyte

may escape from the mirror housing if the
mirror glass breaks.
Electrolyte has an irritating effect. Do not allow the liquid to come into contact with
eyes, skin, clothing, or respiratory system.
In case it does, immediately flush affected
area with water, and seek medical help if
necessary.
Electrolyte drops coming into contact

with the vehicle paint finish can be
completely removed only while in the
liquid state by applying plenty of water.
Controls in detail
Good visibility
Activating exterior rear view mirror
parking position
The exterior rear view mirror returns to its

previously stored driving position:
Follow these steps to activate the mirror

parking position so that the passenger-side exterior rear view mirror will be
turned downward to the stored position.
ten seconds after you put the gear selector lever out of position R
immediately once your vehicle exceeds

a speed of approximately 6 mph
(10 km/h)
immediately when you press button 3

for drivers side mirror.
Make sure you have stored a parking

position for the passenger-side exterior
rear view mirror ( page 118).
Make sure the Mirror adjustment

parking aid function in the
Convenience submenu of the control
system is switched to on ( page 151).
Switch on ignition (if not already on).
Press button 2 for the passenger-side

exterior rear view mirror.
Place the gear selector lever in reverse

gear R.
1 Adjustment button
2 Passenger-side exterior rear view
mirror button
3 Drivers side exterior rear view mirror
button
The passenger-side exterior rear view

mirror will be turned downward to the
stored position.
169
Controls in detail
Good visibility
Sun visors
The sun visors protect you from sun glare
while driving.
Warning!
Do not use the vanity mirror while driving.

Keep the mirrors in the sun visors closed
while vehicle is in motion. Reflected glare
can endanger you and others.
Swing sun visors down when you experience glare.
1 Mounting
2 Sun visor
3 Mirror cover
4 Mirror lamp
If sunlight enters through a side window:
The sun visors are extendable.
To use mirror, lift up cover 3.
disengage sun visor from mounting 1.
pivot sun visor to the side.
Adjust the sun visors by pushing or

pulling in the direction of the arrows.
i
If you disengage the sun visor from
mounting 1, mirror lamp 4 will
switch off.
170
Controls in detail
Good visibility
Rear window defroster
Warning!
The rear window defroster uses a large
amount of power. To keep battery drain to
a minimum, switch off the defroster as
soon as the rear window is clear. The defroster is automatically deactivated after
approximately 6 to 17 minutes of operation depending on the outside temperature.
Activating
Press button F ( page 173).

The indicator lamp on the button
comes on.
Deactivating
Press button F ( page 173) again.

The indicator lamp on the button goes
out.
Any accumulation of snow and ice should be

removed from the rear window before driving. Visibility could otherwise be impaired,
endangering you and others.
!
If the rear window defroster switches
off too soon and the indicator lamp
starts flashing, this means that too
many electrical consumers are operating simultaneously and there is insufficient voltage in the battery. The system
responds automatically by deactivating
the rear window defroster.
As soon as the battery has sufficient
voltage, the rear window defroster
automatically switches on again.
171
Controls in detail
172
Controls in detail
Item
Item
1 Left side air vent, adjustable
1 Temperature control, left, lowering
2 Left center air vent, adjustable
2 Temperature control, left, raising
3 Thumbwheel for air volume control

for center air vents
3 Left-side air distribution

(automatic or manual operation)
4 Right center air vent, adjustable
4 Activated charcoal filter
5 Right side air vent, adjustable
5 Display
6 Automatic climate control panel

for right side center air vent
Automatic climate control panel
6 Right-side air distribution

(automatic or manual operation)
7 Temperature control, right, raising
8 Thumbwheel for lowering temperature, center and side air vents
8 Temperature control, right,

lowering

for left side center air vent
9 Rear window defroster
i
For draft-free ventilation, move the sliders for the center air vents 1, 2, 4,
5 to the middle position.
a AC cooling on/off
Residual heat/ventilation
b Air volume control
c Automatic climate control on/off
(complete system)
d Air recirculation
e Defrosting
173
Controls in detail
The automatic climate control is operational whenever the engine is running. You can
operate the climate control system in either the automatic or manual mode. The
system cools or heats the interior depending on the selected interior temperature
and the current outside temperature.
Warning
When operating the automatic climate control, the air that enters the passenger compartment through the air vents in the
footwell can be very hot or very cold (depending on the set temperature). This may
cause burns or frostbite on unprotected skin
in the immediate area of the air vents. Always keep sufficient distance between unprotected parts of the body and the footwell
air vents. If necessary change the air flow
using the air distribution controls to direct
the air away from the footwell air vents
( page 176).
174
Nearly all dust particles, pollutants and

odors are filtered out before outside air enters the passenger compartment through
the air distribution system.
The air conditioning will not engage (no
cooling) if the mode is selected
( page 181).
Warning!
Follow the recommended settings for heating and cooling given on the following pages. Otherwise the windows could fog up,
impairing visibility and endangering you and
others.
i
Severe conditions (e.g. strong air pollution) may require replacement of the filter before its scheduled interval. A
clogged filter will reduce the air volume
to the interior.
If the vehicle interior is hot, ventilate
the interior before driving off.
Keep the air intake grille in front of the
windshield free of snow and debris.
Do not obstruct air flow by placing objects on the air flow-through exhaust
slots below the rear window.
Controls in detail
Setting the temperature
Use temperature controls ( page 173) 1
and 2 for the left side or 7 and 8 for
the right side to separately adjust the air
temperature on each side of the passenger
compartment. You should raise or lower
the temperature setting in small increments, preferably starting at 72F (22C).
i
When operating the climate control
system in automatic mode, you will
only rarely need to adjust the temperature, air volume and air distribution.
Increasing
Adding outside air
Push temperature control 2

and/or 7.
The automatic climate control system
will correspondingly adjust the interior
air temperature.
Turn thumbwheel 8 in dashboard

( page 172) to increase flow of outside air through air vents for center, left
and right sides, as well as dashboard
top center and rear passenger compartment.
Decreasing
Push temperature control 1

and/or 8.
The automatic climate control system
will correspondingly adjust the interior
air temperature.
175
Controls in detail
Adjusting air distribution
Use the air distribution controls 7 and 9
( page 172) to separately adjust the air
distribution on each side of the passenger
compartment. The following symbols are
found on the controls:
Symbol
Function
Directs air through the center,

side and rear passenger compartment air vents
Adjusting manually
Press left or right U button.
The U pops out, the a, Z,

X and Y symbols are visible.
Switch the windshield wipers on, see

Windshield wipers ( page 48).
Switch to manual mode.
Close the air vent at dashboard top

center.
Turn the air distribution control

to a or Y.
Air distribution can be adjusted manually.

Adjusting automatically
Press left or right U button again.
Z
X
Directs air to the windows
The a, Z, X and Y symbols are no longer visible.
Directs air into the entire vehicle interior
The air distribution is adjusted automatically.
Directs air to the footwells
176
Windshield fogged on the outside
Controls in detail
Adjusting air volume
Adjusting manually
Seven blower speeds are available.
Press left M or right Q side of air

volume control switch until the requested blower speed is attained.
The display AUTO disappears and the
automatic mode is switched off. The
selected blower speed is shown in the
display.
Adjusting automatically
Maximum cooling MAXCOOL
Defrosting
If the left and right air distribution controls

as well as the airflow volume control are
set to U and there is a high need for
cooling, the display MAXCOOL appears.
This provides the fastest possible cooling

of the vehicle interior (when windows and
soft top are closed).
Activating
These settings should only be selected

for a short time.

comes on.
Switch off air recirculation, if selected.
The air volume is adjusted automatically.
Press button , ( page 173).

out.
Press left or right U button until it

clicks in.
The a, Z, X and Y symbols are no longer visible.
Press button P ( page 173).
Close center air vents.
Adjust side air vents upwards.
Deactivating
Press button P ( page 173).

out. Defrosting is turned off.
177
Controls in detail
Air recirculation mode
Activating
Switch to air recirculation mode to prevent

unpleasant odors from entering the vehicle
from the outside. This setting cuts off the
intake of outside air and recirculates the
air in the passenger compartment.
Warning!
When the outside temperature is below

41F (5C), only switch to air recirculation
mode for short periods to prevent window
fogging.

comes on.
If you keep button , pressed, the

side windows will close.
Warning
Never operate the side windows if there is

the possibility of anyone being harmed by
the closing procedure.
In the event that the procedure causes potential danger, the closing of the side windows can be immediately halted by
releasing the , button or by pressing or
pulling the respective window switch.
178
i
The air recirculation mode is activated
automatically:
at high outside temperatures
if the concentration of carbon monoxide and nitrogen oxide in the outside air increases, for example in a
tunnel
Please note that the charcoal filter

must be activated ( page 179) for the
air recirculation mode to be activated
automatically.
If you have turned off the air conditioning system ( page 181) or the outside
temperature is below 41F (5C), the
air recirculation mode will not switch
on automatically.
Controls in detail
Deactivating

out.
The air recirculation mode is deactivated automatically:
after five minutes if the outside

temperature is below
approximately 41F (5C)
after five minutes if the air conditioning is turned off
If you keep button , pressed, the

side windows will return to their previous position.
Charcoal filter
after 30 minutes if the outside temperature is above approximately

41F (5C)
At outside temperatures above 79F

(26C) the system will not automatically switch back to outside air. A quantity
of outside air is added after approximately 30 minutes.
An activated charcoal filter markedly reduces bad odors and removes pollutants
from air entering the passenger compartment.
Activating
Press button e ( page 173).

comes on.
If you keep button e pressed, the

side windows will close.
179
Controls in detail
Warning
Never operate the side windows if there is

the possibility of anyone being harmed by
the closing procedure.
In the event that the procedure causes potential danger, the closing of the side windows can be immediately halted by
releasing the e button or by pressing or
pulling the respective window switch.
Deactivating
Press button e ( page 173).

out.
180
If you keep button e pressed, the

side windows will return to their previous position.
The system switches automatically to the
air recirculation mode if the carbon
monoxide (CO) or nitrogen oxide (NOX)
concentration of the outside air increases
beyond a predetermined level.
The automatic air recirculation mode does
not function if economy mode is selected or if the outside temperature has
fallen below 41F (5C).
The activated charcoal filter should be
switched off when windows fog up on the
inside, or if the passenger compartment
needs to be quickly heated or cooled
down.
Deactivating the climate control system

Deactivating
It is possible to deactivate the automatic
climate control system.
Press button M ( page 173) until

the display is cleared.
The climate control system is deactivated.
Reactivating
Press button Q ( page 173).
i
With the automatic climate control system deactivated, the air flow and circulation are also switched off.
Only choose this setting temporarily to
prevent the windows from fogging up.
Controls in detail
Air conditioning
The air conditioning is operational while
the engine is running and cools the interior
air to the temperature set by the operator.
i
Condensation may drip out from underneath the vehicle. This is normal and
not an indication of a malfunction.
Deactivating
It is possible to deactivate the air conditioning (cooling) function of the automatic
climate control system. The air in the vehicle will then no longer be cooled or dehumidified.
Press button ( page 173).

comes on.
Activating
Moist air can fog up the windows. You can
dehumidify the air with the air conditioning.
Press again ( page 173).

goes out.
The air conditioning system uses the refrigerant R134a. This refrigerant is free of
CFCs which are harmful to the ozone layer.
!
If the button on the automatic climate control panel starts to flash, this
indicates that the air conditioning system is losing refrigerant. The compressor has turned itself off. The air
conditioning cannot be turned on
again.
Residual heat and ventilation*

With the engine switched off, it is possible
to continue to heat or ventilate the interior
for up to 30 minutes. This feature makes
use of the residual heat produced by the
engine.
Activating

to position 1 or 0, or remove it from
the starter switch.

The indicator lamp on button
comes on.
Have the air conditioning system

181
Controls in detail
Deactivating
Rear passenger compartment adjustable air vents
The indicator lamp on button

goes off.
The residual heat is automatically turned
off:
when the ignition is switched on
after about 30 minutes
if the battery voltage drops
i
How long the system will provide heating depends on the coolant temperature and the temperature set by the
operator. The blower will run at speed
setting 1 regardless of the air
distribution control setting.
The booster blower allows airflow

speed to the rear passenger compartment to be increased at four different
levels.
The temperature at the air vents for
rear passenger compartment 2
and 3 is the same as at the dashboard
center air vents.
1 Thumbwheel for center air vents with

adjustable booster blower
2 Left center air vent
3 Right center air vent
To open center air vents and to adjust the
booster blower:
182
Turn thumbwheel 1.
Controls in detail
Audio system
Audio system
Audio and telephone, operation
Operating safety
These instructions are intended to help

you become familiar with your
Mercedes-Benz audio system. They contain useful tips and a detailed description
of the user functions.
Warning!
In order to avoid distraction which could

lead to an accident, the driver should enter
system settings with the vehicle at a standstill and operate the system only when road
and traffic conditions permit. Always pay full
attention to traffic conditions first before
operating system controls while driving.
(approximately 50 km/h), your car is covering a distance of 50 feet (approximately
14 m) every second.
Warning!
Sound system
Your vehicle is equipped with a sound system. The subwoofer is located between the
rear seats.
Any alterations made to electronic components can cause malfunctions.

The radio, amplifier, CD changer*, satellite
radio*, telephone* and voice control system* are interconnected. When one of the
components is not operational or has not
been removed/replaced properly, the function of other components may be impaired.
This condition might seriously impair the
operating safety of your vehicle.
We recommend that you have any service
work on electronic components carried out
by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
!
Make sure no objects fall into the openings of the subwoofer between the rear
seats.
If necessary, contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center to remove any
objects which may have fallen into the
openings.
183
Controls in detail
Audio system
Operating and display elements
184
Controls in detail
Audio system
Item
Page
Item
Page
1 CD mode selector
199
5 Alpha-numeric keypad
2 Manual tuning
(radio)
189
Band selection,
station buttons (radio)
189
Fast forward/reverse
(cassette, CD)
198,
202
CD selection (CD)
201
204
Speed dialing memory

(telephone*)
207
Telephone number entry,

retrieving speed dialing
memory (telephone)
3 Radio mode selector

4 Display panel
Cassette compartment
behind display panel
189
Page
9 Function keys
6 Scanning (radio, cassette,

CD)
191,
198,
202
7 Function button
190
8 Light-emitting diode
Item
a Cassette eject
197
b Cassette mode selector
196
c Telephone* mode selector
203
d Seek tuning (radio)
190
Track search (cassette,

CD)
197,
202
Speed dialing memory

(telephone)
207
e On/off
186
Volume
186
185
Controls in detail
Audio system
Button and soft key operation
In these instructions, the alpha-numeric
keypad (right side of radio panel) and the
function buttons (left side of radio panel)
are referred to as buttons. The four keys
below the display panel are referred to as
soft keys.
Operation
Switching on/off
Switching on:
Turn SmartKey in starter switch to

position 1 or 2.
or
!
Do not press directly on the display
face. Otherwise, the display will be
damaged.
Turn control knob a.
The volume will increase or decrease

depending on the direction turned.
i
The volume setting can be selected
separately for the telephone*, audio
system and voice control system*.
Adjusting audio functions
If the radio is switched on without the

SmartKey in the starter switch, it will
automatically switch off again after approx. 30 minutes.
Press the AUD key to call up the bass, treble, balance and fader functions in the various operating modes. Settings for bass
and treble are stored separately for the AM
and FM frequency bands, satellite radio
(SAT) mode, cassette mode and CD mode.
Remove SmartKey from starter switch.
or
Switching off:
186
Adjusting the volume
Controls in detail
Audio system
Bass
Treble
Regardless of operating mode, press

the AUD key repeatedly until BASS
appears on the display.
Press + or - key to increase or decrease level.
or
Fader

the AUD key repeatedly until TREBLE
i
Your vehicle may or may not have the
fader function, depending on the
vehicle equipment and model.

the AUD key repeatedly until FADER
Press F or R key to shift sound accordingly to the front or rear speakers.
Press + or - key to increase or

decrease level.
or
Press both + and - keys simultaneously
to reset the Bass to its center (flat) level.
Press both + and - keys simultaneously

to reset the Treble to its center (flat)
level.
or
Press both F and R keys simultaneously

to reset the Fader to its center level.
187
Controls in detail
Audio system
Balance

the AUD key repeatedly until BALANCE
Returning audio functions to factory

settings
Press L or R key to shift sound accordingly to the left or right speakers.
or
Press both L and R keys simultaneously

to reset the Balance to its center level.
188

the AUD key.
The sound settings menu appears on
the display.
Audio system sound selection (EXT)*
Press the EXT key.
Press one of the function keys.

and hold AUD key longer than two
seconds. RESET will appear on the
display.
All settings for bass, treble and balance
are returned to the center level and the
volume is set to a predefined level.
Controls in detail
Audio system
You can select from among the
following settings:
Radio operation
DRV: The tone level is set to the
Selecting radio mode
Driver position; sound is directed

toward the passengers.
Press b button.
You can now receive radio stations

over the analog FM, AM or WB station
frequencies or you can receive channels digitally via satellite radio (SAT)*.
SP: The tone level is set for Speech,
optimizing the sound for the spoken

word.
AMB: The tone level is set for
Press FM, AM or WB key repeatedly until desired band has been selected.
The FM, AM and WB frequency bands
are called up one after the other.
The frequency band currently selected
appears in the upper left-hand corner
of the display.
Selecting a station
Ambience, producing a
three-dimensional sound.
Analog station frequencies
The following options are available for

selecting a station:
OFF: The audio system sound
Selecting the band
selection is turned off.
You can select from among FM, AM or WB

frequency bands.
Direct frequency band input

( page 190)
Manual tuning ( page 190)
Automatic seek tuning ( page 190)
Scan tuning ( page 191)
FM frequency band:
FM
87.7......107.9 MHz
Preset buttons ( page 191)
Automatic station memory (Autostore)

( page 191)
Telephone* muting
If a telephone has been installed in the
vehicle, the radio will switch to telephone
mode when a call is incoming. The current
audio source is muted.
Weather band ( see page 192).
AM frequency band:
MW (medium wave) 530......1710 KHz
189
Controls in detail
Audio system
Direct frequency input
Manual tuning
Automatic seek tuning
Select the desired frequency band.
Press and hold either the d or c

button until the desired frequency is
reached.
Press either the f or e button.
Press button.
Enter desired frequency using

buttons 4 to M.
i
You can only enter frequencies within
the respective waveband.
If a button is not pressed within four
seconds, the radio will return to the
station last tuned to.
190
Step-by-step station tuning takes place

in ascending or descending order of
frequency. The first three tuning steps
will take place without muting. Afterwards, the radio will be muted and
highspeed tuning will take place until
the button is released.
The radio will tune to the next higher or

next lower receivable frequency.
Controls in detail
Audio system
Scan tuning
Manual station memory (Presets)
Automatic station memory (Autostore)
Starting scan tuning
You can store ten AM and ten FM stations.
The Autostore memory function provides

an additional memory level. The station
memory for manually stored stations is not
overwritten.
Select desired frequency band.
Storing stations
Tune in the desired station.
Press and hold desired station

button 4 to M until a brief
signal tone is heard.
Calling up Autostore memory level
Briefly press the AS key.

AS is highlighted in the display.
The radio finds the ten stations with

the strongest signals. These
stations are stored on the station
buttons 4 to M in order of
signal strength.
Press 2 button.
SC will appear on the display. The
radio briefly tunes in all receivable
stations on the band selected. The
first scan cycle will tune in only the
stations with a strong signal. The
second scan cycle will tune in every
receivable station.
The frequency is stored on the

selected station button.
The frequency band and station
button number are shown in the upper left-hand corner of the display.
Ending scan tuning
Press 2 button or d, c,
f or e button.
SC disappears from the display.
Retrieving a station from memory
Press desired station button 4

to M.
Retrieving a station from memory
Press desired station button 4

to M.
Leaving the Autostore memory level
Press the AS key.

The highlighted AS in the display
disappears.
191
Controls in detail
Audio system
Weather band
Satellite radio (SAT)* (USA only)
Press the WB key.

The weather band station last selected
is tuned in.
Select the desired weather band

station with buttons 4 to 7.
If a station cannot be tuned in, a scan
is automatically started.
Press f or e button. The next

receivable weather band station is
tuned in.
192
Additional optional satellite radio

equipment and a subscription to satellite radio service provider is required
for the satellite radio operation described here. Feature description is
based on preliminary information available at time of printing.
At time of printing, no date for availability of optional equipment required for
satellite radio operation had been set.
Contact your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center for details and
availability for your vehicle.
Satellite radio service may be unavailable or interrupted from time to time
for a variety of reasons, such as environmental or topographic conditions
and other things we can't control. Service might also not be available in certain places (e.g., in tunnels, parking
garages, or within or next to buildings)
or near other technologies.
Sirius Satellite Radio provides 100 channels of digital-quality radio, among others
music, sports, news, and entertainment,
free of commercials. Sirius Satellite Radio
uses a fleet of high-power satellites to
broadcast 24 hours per day
coast-to-coast.
This diverse, satellite-delivered programming is available for a monthly subscription fee.
For more information, call the Sirius service or contact www.siriusradio.com
Program categories
The channels are categorized. The categories allow you to tune to stations broadcasting a certain type of program
(PTY mode) ( page 195).
Controls in detail
Audio system
Starting satellite radio (SAT)
Start radio mode.

If the radio was in SAT radio mode before being turned off or changed to another operating mode, the last SAT
channel selected is called up.
The first time SAT radio is called up, you

must give your SAT radio provider the Electronic Serial Number (ESN) of your SAT receiver over the telephone.
or
Entering the Electronic Serial Number

(ESN)
Press the SAT key.

The radio switches to SAT mode.
CALL SIRI appears on the display.
Press the SAT key.

When you call up the SAT radio mode
for the first time, ACQUIRING will appear
on the display during the initialization
process.
Press the ESN key repeatedly until all

required information has appeared on
the display.
Call the telephone number and give

provider your ESN number.
i
Credit card information is also required
for your application.
The activation process takes approximately five to ten minutes after calling
the SIRIUS Service Center.
or
The last channel selected is called up.
Press the ESN key.

The providers phone number will appear first. After pressing the ESN key
again, the ESN number will appear.
Make note of the phone number and
ESN number.
193
Controls in detail
Audio system
Channel selection
The following options are available for selecting a channel:
Only inputs for available channels are

possible.
Direct channel input ( page 194)
Manual tuning ( page 194)
If a button is not pressed within four

seconds, the radio will return to the last
station tuned.
Preset channels ( page 194)
Direct channel input
Enter desired channel number using

buttons 4 to M.
194
Tune in the desired channel.
Press and hold desired channel button 4 to M until a brief signal

tone sounds.
Press and hold f, d, c or

e button until the desired channel
has been reached.
You can store up to ten channels.

Press key.
Manual tuning
Preset channels
Storing channels
Retrieving a channel from memory
Press the desired channel button

4 to M.
The channel is stored on the selected

channel button.
Controls in detail
Audio system
Program type (PTY) mode
Selecting channel category
Program Descriptive Text (PDT)
In PTY mode, you can tune in and select

channels of a specific program type.
In PDT mode, you can call up additional information on the channel, the current track
and the performing artist(s).
Press d or c button.
The individual program types are selected.
Calling up PTY mode
Start SAT radio mode.
Tuning in a PTY channel
Press the PTY key.
Once you have selected a program type,

you can tune in channels broadcasting a
program that corresponds to the selected
program type.
The name of the channel currently

being received is shown.
Leaving PTY mode
Press the CH key.

The number of the channel currently
being received is shown.
Press f or e button.
The radio will tune to the next highest
or lowest channel broadcasting this
type of program.
Press the TXT key.

The station category appears on the
display.
Press the TXT key again within four

seconds.
The title of the current track appears.
Press the TXT key again within four

seconds.
The name of the musician(s) of the current track appear on the display.
195
Controls in detail
Audio system
Cassette operation
Playing cassettes
A warning signal will sound after 20

seconds if the display panel is left in
the down position. Fold display panel
back up. If the display panel is not
closed, a warning signal will sound and
the radio will be muted.

face. Otherwise the display will be
damaged.
Track selection
Insert cassette into the cassette compartment until it engages and tap it
gently.
The cassette will be pulled in automatically. The system switches to cassette
mode. Side 1 will be played and SIDE 1
appears in the display. Side 1 is the
side of the cassette which is facing upward. The cassette deck will automatically detect the type of tape.
Press 3 button.
The display panel folds down and the
cassette compartment becomes accessible.
Fold display panel back up and press

gently on the display panel frame to
lock it in place.
or
If a cassette is already in the

mechanism, press j button.
The current track will be displayed as

SIDE 1 or SIDE 2.
196
Press the TRK key.
You can switch sides at any time.

The side will be changed automatically
at the end of the tape.
Controls in detail
Audio system
Cassette eject
Press eject button 3.
Track search
Track search forward
Track search backward
The display folds down and the cassette is ejected. The system will switch
back to radio mode automatically.
SEEK RWD will appear on the display.

Track search will run the tape backward to the start of the track currently
playing and switch to Play.
Fold display panel back up and press

gently on the display panel frame to
lock it.
Stopping track search
Press f button.

face. Otherwise the display will be
damaged.
SEEK FWD will appear in the display.
The cassette will not be ejected when

the system is switched off or switched
to another operating mode.
Press e button.
Track search will run the tape forward

to the start of the next track and switch
to Play.
Press d, c, f or
e button.
The cassette will switch over to Play.
The beginning of a track can only be

found if there is pause of at least
four seconds between tracks.
197
Controls in detail
Audio system
Scanning
Starting scan
Starting cassette fast forward mode
Skipping blank sections (skip blank)

Switching on the skip blank function
Press the SB key.

SB is highlighted in the display.
Press 2 button.
SC will appear on the display.
Each track on the cassette will be

played briefly in ascending order.
Starting cassette fast reverse mode
Stopping scan
Press 2, d, c, f or
e button.
The system will switch to Play.
Press d button.
FORWARD will appear on the display.
Press c button.
REWIND will appear on the display.
The cassette will automatically switch over

to the play mode at the end or beginning of
the tape.
Stopping the cassette fast forward/reverse mode
Press d, c, f or
e button.
The cassette will switch over to the
play mode.
198
If the system does not detect a sound

signal, the cassette will automatically
fast forward to the next sound signal.
Switching off the skip blank function
Press the SB key.

The highlighted SB in the display disappears.
Controls in detail
Audio system
Dolby NR1 (noise reduction system)
Switching on
To enable optimum sound reproduction of

cassettes recorded using Dolby B NR, the
Dolby NR system should be switched on.
i
The Dolby NR function should be
switched off when playing cassettes
not recorded with Dolby B NR.
Press the NR key.

NR is highlighted in the display.
Switching off
CD changer* operation
Press the NR key.

The highlighted NR in the display disappears.
General notes
Should excessively high temperatures occur while in CD mode, CD TEMP HIGH will
appear on the display and the CD will be
muted. The unit will then switch back to
the last operating mode used until the temperature has decreased to a safe operating
level.
Should excessively low temperatures occur while in CD mode, CD TEMP LOW will appear on the display, but the CD will
continue to play.
1
DOLBY and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
The Dolby noise reduction system is manufactured
under license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing
Corporation.
Handle CDs carefully to prevent interference during playback. Avoid fingerprints

and dust on CDs. Do not write on CDs or
apply any labels or other material to them.
199
Controls in detail
Audio system
Only use original CDs. Using copied CDs
may create problems during playback.
Clean CDs from time to time with a commercially available cleaning cloth. Do not
use solvents, anti-static sprays, etc. for
cleaning. Replace the CD in its case after
use. Protect CDs from heat and direct sunlight.
Your CD drive has been designed to

play CDs which correspond to the
EN 60908 standard.
If you insert thicker data carriers, e.g.
ones that have data on both sides (one
side with DVD data, the other side with
audio data), they cannot be ejected and
will damage the drive.
Warning!
Only use CDs, which bear the label shown

and that conform to the compact disc
digital audio standard (IEC 60908). You
can therefore only use CDs with a maximum thickness of 1.3 mm.
i
Use of CDs which do not meet this
standard may cause damage to the CD
changer. Do not play single-CDs
(80 mm) with an adapter.
200
The CD changer* is a Class 1 laser product.

There is a danger of invisible laser radiation
if the cover is opened or damaged.
Do not remove the cover. The CD changer*
does not contain any parts which can be serviced by the user. For safety reasons, have
any service work which may be necessary
performed only by qualified personnel.
Operational readiness of CD changer

If a CD changer has been installed in the
system, it can be operated from the front
control panel of the radio. A loaded magazine must be installed to play CDs.
Loading/unloading the CD magazine
Slide changer door to the right and

press eject button g.
The magazine will be ejected.
Controls in detail
Audio system
Selecting CDs
CDs which have been inserted improperly or are unreadable will not be
played.
Push magazine into CD changer in direction of arrow and close sliding door.
Playing CDs
1 CD
2 CD changer
3 CD tray
4 CD magazine
Remove magazine and pull CD tray fully

out.
Place CD in recess of tray, label side

up.
Push tray into magazine in direction of

arrow.
Press i button.
CD will appear on the display.
The last CD listened to will then start playing at the point where it was switched off.
After the last track on a CD has finished,
the next CD is automatically played.
You can select from among the CDs in

the CD magazine using buttons 4
to 6.
CD and the magazine slot number of the
selected CD appear on the display. The

number of the current track is displayed after TRACK.
If there is no CD in the selected magazine slot, NO CD appears on the display

with the corresponding slot number.
201
Controls in detail
Audio system
Skipping tracks forward/backward
Skipping tracks forward
Press f button.
Press e button.
If the track has been playing for
more than ten seconds, it will revert
to the start of that track. If it has
been playing for less than ten seconds, it will revert to the preceding
track.
Scanning
Press 2 button.
Each track on the current CD will be

played for approx. eight seconds in
ascending order.
202
Press the RDM key.

RDM is highlighted in the display.
SC appears in the display.
Press and hold d button until

desired point has been reached.
Switching on random play
Starting scan
Press 2, d, c, f or
e button.
The random play function (RDM) plays the

tracks on the current CD in random order.
Pressing the f or e button repeatedly will result in multiple tracks being

skipped.
Fast forward
Ending scan
Random play
The relative time of the track is shown

on the display during the search.
Skipping tracks backward
Press and hold c button until

desired point has been reached.
The next track will be played.
Fast reverse
Switching off random play
Press the RDM key.

The highlighted RDM in the display
disappears.
Controls in detail
Audio system
Repeat
Track and time display
The repeat function (RPT) repeats the current track.
Various car telephone* functions and operating steps for the car telephone can be
performed and displayed via the audio system.
Switching on repeat:
Further operating instructions not covered

here can be found in the operating
instructions for the multifunction steering
wheel, voice control* and the telephone*.
Press the T key.
Press the RPT key.
The total number of tracks and the total

playing time of the CD appear in the
display.
The highlighted RPT in the display disappears.
The CD main menu appears again after

eight seconds.
Switching off repeat:
Press the T key.

The number of the track being played
and the elapsed playing time appear in
the display.
Press the RPT key.

RPT is highlighted in the display.
Telephone* operation
i
The Random play and Repeat function
cannot be used simultaneously.
203
Controls in detail
Audio system
Switching on the telephone
Switching off the telephone
Press h button.
If you have programmed an unlock
code for the telephone, you must enter
the code now.
Enter the desired telephone number

using buttons 4 to M.
If necessary, correct number entered

with the CLR key. Press key briefly to
delete the last digit entered; press key
and hold to delete the complete number.
Press the OK key after entering correct

code.
The telephone is unlocked. If you have
entered the wrong code, you must repeat the entering procedure with the
correct code.
204
Press h button repeatedly until

PHONE OFF appears in the display.
Placing a call
Entering a telephone number and
starting the dialing process
The receiving symbol in the display

disappears.
Adjusting the volume
Turn control knob a during telephone operation.

The volume increases or decreases depending on the direction in which the
knob is turned.
The number can have up to 32 digits,

but only 13 of these are visible on the
display.
i
The volume can be adjusted separately
for the telephone*, voice control system* and radio.
Enter the desired telephone number

using buttons 4 to M.
If necessary, correct number entered with

the CLR key.
Press key briefly to delete the last digit

entered.
Press key and hold to delete the complete number.
After correct telephone number has

been entered, press the SND key.
Controls in detail
Audio system
Phone book
The numbers stored in the phone book can
be called up either by name or number.
Switching between name search and

number search
The stored entries are selected according to the alphabetical order of the initial letter.
Press the ABC key.

The name search is called up.
Calling up the phone book
or
or
Press the NUM key.
Searching and calling up phone book entries by name

Press d, c, f or e button.

The stored entries are selected in
increments of four.
The number search is called up.
Press either the d or c button.
or
Press the desired numerical key2 to

9.
The stored entries are selected according to the alphabetical order of the initial letters (e.g. for B -Brown, press
button 2 twice).
Press the ABC key.
The current name is highlighted on the

display.
Several characters and symbols cannot

be shown on the display for technical
reasons. They have been replaced with
spaces.
205
Controls in detail
Audio system
Searching and selecting phone book entries by number
Starting dialing process
Manual repeat dialing (redial)
Once you have selected a number,

press the SND key.
Repeat dialing
Press the NUM key.

The current number is marked in the
display.
If the number dialed is busy, you can again

place calls to the last ten telephone numbers dialed using the repeat dialing function.
The last number dialed is shown in the

display.
Press either the d or c button.

The stored entries are selected
according to numerical order.
The stored entries are selected in
increments of 5 (e.g. Entry M5, Entry
M10,etc.)
206
Select the desired telephone number

using d, c, f or
e button.
The abbreviation L and the number of
the entry are shown in the top line of
the display.
or
Press the SND key.
When you have selected a number,

press the SND key.
The call will be made.
Controls in detail
Audio system
Automatic repeat dialing (redial)
Speed dialing
Quick-dialing
If a call cannot be connected, press

the SND key.
A maximum of two digits can be entered.
REDIAL will appear on the display and repeated attempts to place the call will be
made for the next four minutes.
Selecting numbers directly from the

directory
Enter previously selected 3-digit

(1-999) number of the entry using
number keys 4 to M.
Press the RCL key.
Input desired entry number using

number keys 4 to M.
If necessary, correct the last number

entered with the CLR key.
Press the SND key.

The telephone number stored under
that entry will be dialed. The number, L
and the full entry number will be shown
in the display.
Press one of the desired number

buttons 4 to M longer than one
second.
The telephone number saved under
that number will be dialed.
Please be aware that button 4

might already be reserved for an emergency call number.
The telephone number stored under

that entry will be dialed.
Press the SND key.

The call will be made.
207
Controls in detail
Audio system
Emergency call
Press button 4 longer than one

second.
A call will be placed to the saved number (e.g. 911).
!
Please be aware that the 911 emergency call system is a public service. Using
it without due cause is a criminal offense.
You can make an emergency call to an
emergency rescue station with a mobile
communications network.
The emergency call will be placed as long
as the corresponding mobile communications network is available. To do this,
switch the telephone on if this has not already been done.
208
The call will also be placed even if the unlock code is not entered.
Emergency calls may not be possible with
all telephone networks or if certain network services and/or telephone functions
are active. Check with your local network
operation company. It may take some time
to set up an emergency call.
To use this function you must ensure that
the number stored in memory location 1 is
the number to be dialed in case of emergency.
If an emergency call cannot be connected,
the message SYSTM BUSY appears.
Accepting an incoming call

Accepting an incoming call in telephone
mode
With an incoming call, a ringing tone can
be heard and the callers telephone number, or the name under which this telephone number has been saved in the
telephone book, appears on the display. If
the callers number is not transmitted,
CALL will appear in the display.
Press the SND key to accept call.
Controls in detail
Audio system
Accepting an incoming call in cassette,
CD or radio mode
If the telephone is activated in the background (receiving symbol S visible on display), the audio source is muted when a
call is received. The ringing tone is heard
and the callers telephone number or the
name under which this telephone number
has been saved in the telephone book appears on the display. If the callers number
is not transmitted, CALL appears in the display.
Press the SND key to accept the call.
Muting a call
Call waiting
It is possible to mute a call; the caller is

then no longer able to hear you.
If you receive another call during an already active call, you can accept the second call and switch between the two.
Mute on
Press the MUT key.
Accepting a second call
Mute off
Press the SND key.

You are connected with the second
caller, the first call is muted.
Press the MUT key.
Terminating a call
Switching between the calls
Press the END key.

The current call is terminated.
Press the SND key.
Terminating the second call
Press the END key.

The current call will be terminated. You
are connected with the muted call
again.
209
Controls in detail
Power windows
Power windows
Opening and closing the windows
Warning!
The side windows can be opened and
closed electrically. The switches for all the
side windows are on the drivers door. The
switches for the respective windows are
on the front passenger door and the rear
side trim panels.
When closing the windows, make sure there

closing procedure.
The closing of the door windows can be immediately halted by releasing the switch or,
if switch was pulled past the resistance
point and released, by either pressing or
pulling the respective switch.
The closing of the rear side windows can be
immediately halted by releasing the switch.
1 Left front window

2 Right front window
3 Right rear window
4 Left rear window
5 Rear window override switch
( page 74)
210
The door windows are equipped with the express-close and automatic reversal function. If a door window encounters an
obstruction that blocks its path in a circumstance where you pulled the switch past the
resistance point and released it to close the
window, the automatic reversal function will
stop the window and open it slightly.
If a door window encounters an obstruction

that blocks its path in a circumstance where
you are closing the window by pulling and
holding the switch, by pressing and holding
button on the SmartKey, or by pressing and holding the lock button
(vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*) on the door
handle, the automatic reversal function will
not operate.
SmartKey from starter switch, take the
Controls in detail
Power windows
Opening the windows
You can also open or close the windows using the:
Soft top switch ( page 212)
SmartKey (summer opening/convenience feature) ( page 213)
button , in the control panel of

the automatic climate control
( page 173).
button e in the control panel of

the automatic climate control
( page 173).
Turn SmartKey in the starter switch to

position 1 or 2 or press the
KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button.
Press switch 1 to 4 to the resistance

point.
Fully opening the door windows

(Express-open)
The corresponding window will move

downwards until you release the
switch.
Closing the windows
Pull on switch 1 to 4 to the resistance point.

The corresponding window will move
upwards until you release the switch.
Press switch 1 or 2 past the resistance point and release.

The corresponding window opens completely.
Fully closing the door windows

(Express-close)
Pull switch 1 or 2 past the resistance point and release.

The corresponding window closes completely.
Warning!
If you pull and hold the switch up when closing the window, and upward movement of
the window is blocked by some obstruction
including but not limited to arms, hands, fingers, etc., the automatic reversal will not operate.
211
Controls in detail
Power windows
!
If the upward movement of a door window is blocked during the closing procedure, the door window will stop and
open slightly.
Remove the obstruction, pull the
switch again past the resistance point
and release.
If the door window still does not close
when there is no obstruction, then pull
the switch and hold it. The door window
will then close without the obstruction
sensor function.
Warning!
Driver's door only:

If within five seconds you again pull the
switch past the resistance point and release, the automatic reversal will not function.
Opening and closing the windows with

the soft top switch
The soft top switch is located in the center
console.
Stopping windows
Press or pull respective switch again.
1 Soft top switch

In addition to the power window switches,
the windows can also be opened or closed
with the soft top switch 1.
212
Controls in detail
Power windows
Warning!
Opening
Never operate the windows if there is the

possibility of anyone being harmed by the
opening or closing procedure.
In case the procedure causes potential danger, the procedure can be immediately halted by releasing the soft top switch. To
reverse direction of movement press soft
top switch twice for opening or lift soft top
switch twice for closing.

to position 1 or 2 or press the
KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button once
or twice.
Press soft top switch 1 twice. Press

the switch briefly the first time. Then
press the switch a second time and
hold it until the side windows have
reached the desired position.
Closing
Pull soft top switch 1 twice. Pull the

switch briefly the first time. Then pull
the switch a second time and hold it
until the side windows have reached
the desired position.
Opening and closing the windows with

the SmartKey
The soft top ( page 215) will also be
opened or closed when the power windows
are operated with the SmartKey.
Warning!
Never operate the windows or soft top if

there is the possibility of anyone being
harmed by the opening or closing procedure.
In the event that the procedure causes potential danger, the procedure can be immediately halted by releasing the button on the
SmartKey. To reverse direction of movement press for opening or for
closing.
Aim transmitter eye at the front door

handle.
213
Controls in detail
Power windows
Opening (Summer opening feature)
Press and hold button after unlocking the vehicle.
The windows and soft top begin to

open after approximately one second.
Release the button to stop procedure.
Closing (Convenience feature)
Press and hold button after locking the vehicle.

close after approximately one second.
Release the button to stop procedure.
Make sure all side windows and the

soft top are properly closed before leaving
the vehicle.
214
Synchronizing power windows
Closing the side windows with

KEYLESS-GO*
Press and hold lock button at door
( page 56) until the side windows are
closed.
Warning!
When closing the windows make sure there

closing procedure.
The windows will not automatically re-open
if blocked during convenience closing.
If potential danger exists, proceed as follows:
Release the lock button.
Pull on the door handle and hold firmly.

The side windows will open for about
two seconds if the door handle is held
but the door not opened.
The power windows must be resynchronized each time
after the battery has been disconnected.
if the power windows cannot be fully

opened (Express-open) or closed
(Express-close).
Synchronizing the power windows
Switch ignition on.
Pull the power window switches until

the side windows are closed.
Hold the switches for approximately
one second.
The power windows are adjusted.
Controls in detail
Soft top
Soft top
Opening and closing the soft top
Warning!
For safety reasons, the soft top can only be
opened and closed when the vehicle is
standing still.
Warning!
Before operating the switch for the soft top,

make sure no persons can be injured by the
moving parts (roll bar, soft top frame, and
soft top compartment cover).
Hands must never be placed near the roll
bar, soft top frame, upper windshield area,
shelf behind roll bar, or soft top storage
compartment while the soft top is being
raised or lowered. Serious personal injury
may occur.
If potential danger exists, release the soft
top switch. This immediately interrupts the
raising or lowering procedure. You then can
operate the soft top switch to raise or lower
the soft top away from the danger zone.

SmartKey from starter switch, take the
!
Never sit or place heavy objects on the
rear shelf. Doing so could cause damage to the soft top and the rear shelf.
!
When opening and closing the soft top,
make sure:
there is sufficient clearance for the

soft top to move up
the ski sack roller blind is closed
the luggage cover is engaged in

place
the trunk is only loaded to the

height of the luggage cover
the luggage/cargo does not push

the closed luggage cover up
the trunk lid is closed
nothing is placed on the soft top

compartment cover
the outside temperature is above

+5F (-15C)
Otherwise the soft top and other parts

of the vehicle could be damaged.
215
Controls in detail
Soft top
Luggage cover
Latch luggage cover
The luggage cover is located in the trunk.
Never place anything behind the side

nets when the luggage cover has been
folded back or the ski sack roller blind
is open. You could forget objects
placed there, which could result in
damage when operating the soft top.
Pull luggage cover 1 out in direction

of arrow until it engages in place.
Folding back luggage cover
Press luggage cover in direction of rear

seat.
!
To prevent damage to the soft top or
luggage/cargo when lowering the roof:
1 Luggage cover
216
load trunk only to the height of the

luggage cover
do not permit luggage/cargo to

push up the closed luggage cover
do not place anything on the shelf

behind the roll bar
do not place anything on the soft

top compartment cover
Controls in detail
Soft top
Ski sack roller blind*
The ski sack roller blind is located in the

trunk.
Closing ski sack roller blind
1 Left hinge
2 Right hinge
3 Pull strap
Pull ski sack roller blind downward using pull strap 3.
Manually fold left 1 and right

hinges 2 of ski sack roller blind all the
way down.
To snap ski sack roller blind into place,

press left and right hinges where the
word PRESS can be seen.
Opening ski sack roller blind
!
Never place anything behind the side
nets when the luggage cover has been
folded back or the ski sack roller blind
is open. You could forget objects
placed there, which could result in
damage when operating the soft top.
1 Left hinge
2 Right hinge
3 Pull strap
Pull ski sack roller blind upward using

pull strap 3.

way up.
217
Controls in detail
Soft top
Opening the soft top
Soft top switch
1 Indicator lamp
2 Soft top opening
Before pulling on the soft top switch, you

must make sure:
the parking brake is engaged

( page 46)
the luggage cover is latched, see

Latch luggage cover ( page 216)
the ski sack roller blind is closed, see

( page 217)
the ignition is switched on (SmartKey in

starter switch position 2 or press the
KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button twice)
Pull up on the soft top switch as indicated by the arrow 2 until the soft top
is completely lowered into its trunk
storage compartment and the indicator
lamp 1 in the soft top switch goes
out.
During the opening procedure the multifunction display shows the message
Top in operation.
If the opening procedure is finished,
the multifunction display will briefly
show the message Top open.
If you continuously pull on the soft top
switch, the windows will close.
However, the windows can also be

closed/opened later on, for more information see Opening and closing the windows
with the soft top switch ( page 212), or
see Opening and closing the windows
( page 210)
218
Controls in detail
Soft top
i
For safety reasons, the soft top cannot
be opened while driving.
Make sure the soft top is dry before you
open it. Otherwise water may enter the
trunk interior.
!
To prevent mildew, the soft top must be
dry before lowering it into the storage
compartment.
Do not lower a frozen soft top until
thawed and dry. Doing so may result in
damage not covered by the
Warning!
Closing the soft top
Do not place anything on the soft top compartment cover.

The soft top compartment cover must never
be used by any persons as a seat bench.
Raising of the roll bars could result in serious personal injury.
Soft top switch
1 Indicator lamp
2 Soft top closing
219
Controls in detail
Soft top
Before pressing the soft top switch, you
must make sure:
the parking brake is engaged

( page 46)
the ignition is switched on (SmartKey in

starter switch position 2 or press the
KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button twice)
Press the soft top switch as indicated

by the arrow 2 until the soft top is
completely closed and locked.The indicator lamp 1 in the soft top switch
goes out.
During the closing procedure the multifunction display shows the message
Top in operation.
If the soft top is closed and locked, the
multifunction display will briefly show
the message Top closed.
If you continuously press on the soft
top switch the windows will close.
220
However, the windows can also be

closed/opened later on, for more information see Opening and closing the windows
with the soft top switch ( page 212) or
see Opening and closing the windows
( page 210)
i
For safety reasons, the soft top cannot
be opened while driving.
Warning!
Locking the soft top after raising/lowering

Warning!
The soft top is not fully closed and locked or

not fully opened if:
the indicator lamp in the soft top switch

remains lit
the message Top in operation! is

shown in the multifunction display and
the indicator lamp in the soft top switch
does not go out
the indicator lamp flashes and a warning

sounds for 10 seconds and the message
Lock top is shown in the multifunction
display when starting to drive
To prevent possible accidents, drive the vehicle only with the soft top either completely
closed and locked, or fully lowered into its
storage compartment.
To prevent possible accidents, drive the vehicle only with the soft top either completely
closed and locked, or fully lowered into its
storage compartment.
If the soft top is not properly locked, lock it

as described below.
Controls in detail
Soft top
Unlocked status noticed when stopped
Switch on the ignition.
To lock the soft top in its fully closed

position, press soft top switch.
The message Top closed will be shown
in the multifunction display.
Unlocked status noticed while driving

Warning!
Warning!
Stop the vehicle and lock the soft top before

continuing to drive. You could otherwise endanger yourself and others.
or:
To lock the soft top in its fully opened

position, pull up on the soft top switch.
The message Top open will be shown in
Stop the vehicle.
Leave the ignition switched on.
To lock the soft top in its fully closed

position, press soft top switch.
The message Top closed will be shown
If the soft top does not completely open or

close, the roof hydraulics will lose pressure
and the soft top is lowered
after approximately seven minutes

when the ignition is switched on
after approximately 15 seconds when

the ignition is switched off
Shortly before the soft top is lowered, a

warning will sound and the soft top switch
lamp will flash. In the multifunction display
you will see K, and the message Top
being lowered! appears
or:
Properly lock the soft top ( page 220)

before continuing to drive
To lock the soft top in its fully opened

position, pull up on the soft top switch.
The message Top open will be shown in
221
Controls in detail
Soft top
Opening and closing the soft top with
the SmartKey
Opening (Summer opening feature)
The windows will also be opened or closed

when you operate the power windows with
the SmartKey.
Warning!
Hands must never be placed near the roll

bar, soft top frame, upper windshield area,
shelf behind roll bar, or soft top storage
compartment while the soft top is being
raised or lowered. Serious personal injury
may occur.
If potential danger exists, release the respective button on the SmartKey. This immediately interrupts the raising or lowering
procedure. You then can operate to
lower or to raise the soft top away
from the danger zone.
222

open after approximately one second.
During the opening procedure the multifunction display shows the message
Top in operation.
Before operating the soft top, make sure no

persons can be injured by the moving parts
(roll bar, soft top frame, and soft top compartment cover) due to negligence.

soft top is completely open.
If the opening procedure is finished,

the multifunction display will briefly
show the message Top open.
Aim the transmitter eye at the door

handle.
Release transmit button to interrupt procedure.
Controls in detail
Soft top
Closing (Convenience feature)
Aim the transmitter eye at the door

handle.
soft top is completely closed.
close after approximately one second.
During the closing procedure the multifunction display shows the message
Top in operation.
If the soft top is closed and locked, the
multifunction display will briefly show
the message Top closed.
Warning!
If the soft top does not completely open or

close a warning sounds and the soft top
switch flashes. In the multifunction display
you will see K, and the message Top
being lowered! appears. After about
15 seconds the roof hydraulics lose pressure.
Properly lock the soft top ( page 220) before continuing to drive.
Wind screen
Warning!
The wind screen can restrict the drivers vision to the rear of the vehicle. To prevent a
possible accident when visibility is limited
(e.g. in darkness), the upper part of the wind
screen should be folded back.
The wind screen deflects drafts away from

the driver and passenger when the soft top
is lowered. It is stored in a separate storage bag in the trunk.
Release transmit button to interrupt procedure.
Ensure that all side windows and the

soft top are properly closed before leaving
the vehicle.
223
Controls in detail
Soft top
Installing
Remove the wind screen from its storage bag.
1 Upper section
2 Lower section
Fold sections 1 and 2 together.
224
3 Catch
4 Retainer claw
5 Snap fastener
6 Retaining lugs
7 Mounting fixture on right side
8 Catch
Fold retaining lugs 6 out.
Slide pre-assembled wind screen into

mounting fixture on right side 7 using
retaining pin on right side. Simultaneously, retaining lugs 6 should slide
into seat belt passage in rear bench
seat.
Press retainer claw 4 on upper section into snap fastener 5 of lower section.
Controls in detail
Soft top
Pull catch 8 back and guide left retaining pin into mounting fixture on left
side.
Fold upper section of wind screen up
toward head restraints until it stops.
Warning!
Removing
Fold upper section of wind screen back

down.
Pull catch 8 back and pull wind

screen out toward front of vehicle. Be
careful not to damage interior trim with
guide tabs.
Fold retaining lugs 6 back.
Check for secure locking by pulling up on

the wind screen.
To prevent personal injury, remove wind
screen if rear seats are to be occupied by
passengers.
9 Catch
Press catch 9 and fold upper and lower sections back.
Place the wind screen back into the

bag.
225
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Driving systems
The driving systems of your vehicle are described on the following pages:
Cruise control and Distronic*, with

which the vehicle can maintain a preset
speed
Parktronic*, which serves as a parking
assistant.
For information on the BAS, ABS, and ESP

driving systems, see Driving safety systems ( page 76).
Cruise control
Warning!
Cruise control automatically maintains the
speed you set for your vehicle.
Use of cruise control is recommended for
driving at a constant speed for extended
periods of time. You can set or resume
cruise control at any speed over 20 mph
(30 km/h).
The cruise control function is operated by
means of the cruise control lever.
The cruise control lever is the uppermost
lever found on the left-hand side of the
steering column ( page 20).
Cruise control is a convenience system designed to assist the driver during vehicle operation. The driver is and must remain at all
times responsible for the vehicle speed and
for safe brake operation.
Only use cruise control if the road, traffic
and weather conditions make it advisable to
travel at a steady speed.
The use of cruise control can be dangerous on winding roads or in heavy traffic
because conditions do not allow safe
driving at a steady speed.
The use of cruise control can be dangerous on slippery roads. Rapid changes in
tire traction can result in wheel spin and
loss of control.
Deactivate cruise control when driving

in fog.
The Resume function should only be operated if the driver is fully aware of the previously set speed and wishes to resume this
particular preset speed.
226
Controls in detail
Driving systems
On uphill or downhill grades, cruise

control may not be able to maintain the
set speed. Once the grade eases, the
set speed will be resumed.
Moving gear selector lever to

position N while driving also cancels
cruise control. However, the gear selector lever should not be moved to
position N while driving except to coast
when the vehicle is in danger of skidding (e.g. on icy roads).
Canceling cruise control

There are several ways to cancel cruise
control:
1 Set current or higher speed
2 Set current or lower speed
3 Cancel cruise control
4 Resume at last set speed
Setting current speed
Accelerate or decelerate to the desired

speed.
Briefly lift 1 or depress 2 the cruise

control lever.
Step on the brake pedal.
or
i
The last stored speed is canceled when
you turn off the engine.
Briefly push the cruise control lever to

position 3.
Cruise control will be canceled. The
last speed set will be stored for later
use.
The current speed is set.
Remove your foot from the accelerator

pedal.
Cruise control is activated.
227
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Setting a higher speed
When you use the cruise control lever

to decelerate, the transmission will automatically downshift if the engines
braking power does not brake the vehicle sufficiently.
Lift cruise control lever to position 1

and hold it up until the desired speed is
reached.
Release cruise control lever.
The new speed is set.
i
Depressing the accelerator pedal does
not deactivate cruise control. After
brief acceleration (e.g. for passing),
cruise control will resume the last
speed set.
Setting a lower speed
Depress cruise control lever to

position 2 and hold it down until the
desired speed is reached.
Release cruise control lever.

228
Fine adjustment in 1 mph

(Canada: 1 km/h) increments
Faster
Briefly tip cruise control lever in the direction of arrow 1.
Setting to last stored speed

(Resume function)
Warning!
The speed stored in memory should only be

set again if prevailing road conditions permit. Possible acceleration or deceleration
differences arising from returning to preset
speed could cause an accident and/or serious injury to you and others.
Slower
Briefly tip cruise control lever in the direction of arrow 2.
Briefly push cruise control lever to

position 4.
The cruise control will resume the last
set speed.

pedal.
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Distronic*
When activated, the Distronic adaptive
cruise control system increases the driving
convenience afforded by the cruise control
during travel on expressways and other
major roads.
If the Distronic distance sensor detects

a slower moving vehicle directly ahead,
your vehicle speed will be reduced so
that you follow that vehicle at a preset
distance.
If there is no vehicle directly ahead of
you, Distronic will function in the same
way as cruise control ( page 226).
Warning!
Distronic adaptive cruise control is no substitute for active driving involvement. It does
not react to stationary objects, nor recognize or predict the curvature and lane layout
or the movement of vehicles ahead. Distronic can only apply a maximum of 20% of the
vehicles braking power.
It is the drivers responsibility at all times to

be attentive to traffic and road conditions
and to provide the steering, braking and other driving inputs necessary to retain control
of the vehicle.
Warning!
Distronic is a convenience system. Its speed

adjustment reduction capability is intended
to make cruise control more effective and
usable when traffic speeds vary. However, it
is not intended to, nor does it, replace the
need for extreme care. The responsibility for
the vehicle speed and the distance to the vehicle ahead, including most importantly
brake operation to assure safe stopping distance, always rests with the driver.
Distronic cannot take street and traffic conditions into account.
Warning!
Distronic requires familiarity with its operational characteristics. We strongly recommend that you review the following
information carefully before operating the
system.
i
For operation in the USA only: This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
This device may not cause harmful

interference, and
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired
operation.

229
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Warning!
Distronic cannot take street and traffic conditions into account. Only use Distronic if
the road, traffic and weather conditions
make it advisable to travel at a steady
speed.
Warning!
Use of Distronic can be dangerous on slippery roads. Rapid changes in tire traction
can result in wheel spin and loss of control.
Distronic does not act upon adverse sight
distance conditions. Do not use Distronic
during conditions of fog and heavy rain,
snow or sleet.
Warning!
Close attention to road and traffic conditions is imperative at all times, regardless of
whether or not Distronic is activated.
Use of Distronic can be dangerous on winding roads or in heavy traffic because conditions do not allow safe driving at a steady
speed.
Distronic will not react to stationary objects
in the roadway (e.g. a stopped vehicle in a
traffic jam or a disabled vehicle). Distronic
will also not respond to oncoming vehicles.
Switch off Distronic:
when changing from the left to the right

lane if vehicles are moving more slowly
in the left lane
when entering a turn lane or highway off

ramp
in complex driving situations, such as in

highway construction zones
In these situations, Distronic will continue to

maintain the set speed unless deactivated.
230
Distronic is designed and intended only to

maintain a set speed and keep a set distance from moving objects in front of it.
Warning!
The Resume function should only be operated if the driver is fully aware of the previously set speed and wishes to resume this
particular preset speed.
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Distronic displays in the speedometer

dial
Immediately brake the vehicle to avoid

a collision.
Under no circumstances should the
driver await the intermittent warning
sound before braking. See the following warning note.
1 Segments
1 Set speed
If Distronic is activated, one or two segments come on around the set speed.
i
The vehicle speed displayed on the
speedometer can briefly vary from the
speed setting on the Distronic system.
The intermittent warning sound ceases

and the Distronic warning lamp l
goes out when the necessary distance
to the vehicle ahead is reestablished.
If Distronic detects a vehicle directly

ahead, the segments (representing the difference) between the speed of the vehicle
ahead and the set speed come on.
If Distronic calculates that there is a danger of collision when the distance warning
function is activated ( page 238):
The Distronic warning lamp l in the

instrument cluster comes on.
An intermittent warning sounds.
231
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Warning!
Warning!
An intermittent warning sounds and the

Distronic warning lamp in the instrument
cluster is illuminated if the Distronic system
calculates that the distance to the vehicle
ahead and your vehicles current speed indicate that Distronic will not be capable of
slowing the vehicle sufficiently to maintain
the preset following distance, which creates
a danger of a collision.
Distronic brakes your vehicle with a maximum of 6.5 ft/s2 (2 m/s2). This corresponds to about 20% of the maximum
deceleration ability of your vehicle.
Immediately brake the vehicle to increase

the distance to the vehicle in front of you.
The warning sound is intended as a final caution that you have not interceded with your
own braking inputs to avoid a potentially
dangerous situation. Do not wait for the operation of the warning signal to intercede
with your own braking, as that will result in
potentially dangerous emergency braking
which will not always result in an impact being avoided.
Keep drivers foot area clear at all times, including the area under the brake pedal. Objects stored in this area may impair pedal
movement which could interfere with the
braking ability of the Distronic system.
Tailgating increases the risk of an accident.
232
Distronic brakes the vehicle in an effort to

restore the preset distance or to maintain
the speed. The brake pedal is automatically
applied as this happens which results in the
brake pedal moving.
Do not place your foot under the brake pedal

your foot could become caught.
Distronic menu in the control system

In the Distronic menu you see the current
settings for Distronic. What appears in the
display depends on whether Distronic and
the distance warning function are turned
on or off.

until you see one of the following displays.
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Distronic deactivated
Distronic activated
Cruise control lever
If Distronic is deactivated the standard display of Distronic appears in the multifunction display.
When you turn Distronic on, you will see

the set speed in the multifunction display
for about five seconds. If Distronic is
activated, you can see the following display in the multifunction display.
The Distronic system is operated by means

of the cruise control lever.
1 Vehicle ahead, if detected

2 Actual distance to vehicle ahead
3 Preset distance treshold to vehicle
ahead
4 Your vehicle
5 Symbol for activated distance warning
function
The cruise control lever is the uppermost

lever found on the left-hand side of the
steering column.
1 Distronic activated
1 Set current or higher speed

2 Set current or lower speed
3 Deactivate Distronic
4 Resume at last set speed
233
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Activating Distronic
Setting the current speed
Setting a higher speed
You can activate Distronic if
Accelerate or decelerate to the desired

speed.
Briefly lift or depress the cruise control

lever.
you are driving between 25 mph

(40 km/h) and 110 mph (180 km/h)
the ESP is activated ( page 79)
If Distronic has not been activated after

pressing the cruise control lever you will
see the message --- in the multifunction
display.
In the following cases you cannot activate
Distronic:
up to two minutes after starting the engine.
when you brake.
if you have set the parking brake.
if the gear selector lever is in

position P, R or N.
if ESP is switched off.
234
Distronic is activated and the current

speed is set.

pedal.
i
If you do not take your foot off of the
accelerator completely, the following
message will appear in the multifunction display:
Distronic override.
Distronic will not work to maintain the
distance to slower moving vehicles in
front of you. Your vehicle speed will
then be determined only by the accelerator pedal position.
Briefly tip cruise control lever in the direction of arrow 1 ( page 233) to increase vehicle speed in increments of
5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h).
The stored speed is displayed in the
multifunction display for approximately
five seconds ( page 233), and one or
two segments around the stored speed
come on, on the speedometer
( page 231).
i
Depressing the accelerator pedal does
not deactivate Distronic. After brief acceleration (e.g. for passing), the cruise
control will resume the last speed set.
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Setting a lower speed
Briefly tip cruise control lever in the direction of arrow 2 ( page 233) to decrease vehicle speed in increments of 5
mph (Canada: 10 km/h).
The stored speed is displayed in the
five seconds ( page 233), and one or
two segments around the stored speed
come on, on the speedometer
( page 231).
Fine adjustment in 1 mph

(Canada: 1 km/h) increments
Faster
Briefly tip cruise control lever in the direction of arrow 4 ( page 233).

(Resume function)
Warning!
The speed stored in memory should only be

set again if prevailing road conditions permit. Possible acceleration or deceleration
differences arising from returning to the preset speed could cause an accident and/or
serious injury to you and others.
i
When you use the cruise control lever
to decelerate, the transmission will automatically downshift if the rate of deceleration is too low.
Distronic is set to the last stored
speed.

pedal.
235
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Deactivating Distronic
Distronic deactivates automatically when
There are several ways to deactivate the

Distronic system:
you set the parking brake
you drive slower than 25 mph

(40 km/h)
the ESP is active ( page 79) or you deactivate the ESP
Step on the brake pedal.
you move the gear selector lever into

position N.
or
Distronic will be deactivated. The last

speed set will be stored into memory.
i
The following message will appear in
the multifunction display for approximately five seconds: Distronic off.
The last stored speed is deleted when
you turn off the engine.
236
A signal will sound. The Distronic off

message appears in the multifunction
display for approximately five seconds.
Warning!
Distronic switches off and releases the

brakes when the vehicle decelerates below
the minimum speed of approximately
25 mph ( 40 km/h) by operation of the system. At that time the driver must apply the
brakes in order to reduce vehicle speed further or bring it to a stop.
Setting the following distance in

Distronic
You can set the specified following distance for Distronic by varying the time setting between 1.0 and 2.0 seconds. Using
this time setting and the current speed of
your vehicle, Distronic calculates and sets
the required following distance to the vehicle ahead. The set distance will be shown
in the multifunction display field.
The thumbwheel for making the time setting is located on the lower section of the
center console.
Warning!
It is up to the driver to exercise discretion to

select the appropriate setting given road
conditions, traffic, drivers preferred driving
style and applicable laws and driving recommendations for safe following distance.
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Decreasing distance
Decreasing the distance setting causes
Distronic to maintain a shorter following
distance to the vehicle ahead.
Turn thumbwheel 3 towards .
Distance warning function
1 Distance warning function on/off

switch
2 Control lamp
3 Thumbwheel for setting distance
When Distronic is deactivated, this function will continue to warn you when recognizing a stationary obstacle or a slower
vehicle moving in the vehicles path and
the danger of a collision exists:
The distance warning lamp l in the

instrument cluster comes on
An intermittent warning sounds.
Increasing distance
Increasing the distance setting causes Distronic to maintain a greater following distance to the vehicle ahead.
Turn thumbwheel 3 towards .
If these warnings are issued, you must

brake manually to maintain a safe distance
and avoid a collision with the vehicle
ahead.
When pressing the brake pedal, the warning sound stops. The warning sound also
stops when the distance to the vehicle
ahead is sufficient again without applying

the brake pedal. In this case the distance
warning lamp also extinguishes.
Warning!
If the distance warning lamp l in the instrument cluster comes on while driving
and/or an intermittent warning sounds, immediate attention on the part of the driver is
required.
As required by the traffic situation, apply the
brakes and navigate around a possible obstacle. However, do not drive by relying on
the distance warning function, as this will result in an emergency braking application.
Especially depending on road surface conditions and driver reaction, this will not always
enable you to avoid a collision.
i
Complex driving situations are not always fully recognized by Distronic. This
could result in wrong or missing distance warnings.
237
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Activating
Driving with Distronic
This section describes a number of driving

situations where special precaution is required on the part of the driver. Be prepared to brake in such situations. This will
deactivate the Distronic system.
Press switch 1.
Indicator lamp 2 on the switch comes
on. A loudspeaker symbol appears in
the multifunction display ( page 233).
Deactivating
Press switch 1.
Warning!
Indicator lamp 2 on the switch goes

out. No loudspeaker symbol appears in
Distronic works to maintain the speed selected by the driver unless a moving obstacle proceeding directly ahead of it in the
same travel direction is detected (e.g. following another vehicle ahead of you at a distance set by Distronic). This means that:
238
Your vehicle can pass another vehicle

after you change lanes.
While in a sharp turn or if the vehicle in

front is in a sharp turn, Distronic could
lose sight of a vehicle traveling in front
of it. Your vehicle could then accelerate
to the previously selected speed.
Distronic regulates only the distance between your vehicle and those directly ahead
of it, but does not register stationary objects
in the road, e.g.:
a stopped vehicle in a traffic jam
a disabled vehicle
an oncoming vehicle
The driver must always be on the alert, observe all traffic and intercede as required by
steering or braking the vehicle.
Warning!
Distronic should not be used in snowy or icy

road conditions.
Controls in detail
Driving systems
The most likely cause for a malfunctioning
system is a dirty sensor (located behind
the hood grille), especially at times of snow
and ice or heavy rain. In such a case, Distronic will switch off, and the message
Distronic
Currently unavailable!
see oper. manual
disappears during driving and the last

speed stored flashes for approximately
five seconds, the dirt (e.g. slush) has
dissolved; Distronic works again.
appears in the multifunction display.

For cleaning and care of the Distronic sensor, see Cleaning the Distronic* system
sensor cover ( page 308).
Turns and bends
If the message
Distronic
see oper. manual
In turns or bends, Distronic may not detect

a moving vehicle in front, or it may detect
one too soon. This may cause your vehicle
to brake late or unexpectedly.
239
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Offset driving
Lane changing
Narrow vehicles
A vehicle traveling in your lane but offset

from your direct line of travel may not be
detected by Distronic. There will be insufficient distance to the vehicle ahead.
Distronic has not yet detected the vehicle

changing lanes. There will be insufficient
distance to the lane changing vehicle.
Because of its narrow profile, the vehicle

traveling near the edge of the roadway has
not yet been detected by Distronic. There
will be insufficient distance to the vehicle
ahead.
240
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Parktronic (Parking assist)*
Warning!
Warning!
Parktronic is a supplemental system. It is

not intended to, nor does it replace, the
need for extreme care. The responsibility
during parking and other critical maneuvers
always rests with the driver.
Special attention must be paid to objects
with smooth surfaces or low silhouettes
(e.g. trailer couplings, painted posts or road
curbs). Such objects may not be detected by
the system and can damage the vehicle.
The operational function of the Parktronic
system can be affected by dirty sensors, especially at times of snow and ice, see
Cleaning the Parktronic* system sensors
( page 308).
Make sure no persons or animals are in the

area in which you are maneuvering. You
could otherwise injure them.
The Parktronic system monitors the surroundings of your vehicle with six sensors
in the front bumper and four sensors in the
rear bumper.
The Parktronic system is an electronic aid

designed to assist the driver during parking maneuvers. It visually and audibly indicates the relative distance between the
vehicle and an obstacle.
The Parktronic system is automatically activated when you switch on the ignition
and release the parking brake. The Parktronic system deactivates at speeds over
approximately 11 mph (18 km/h). At lower speeds the Parktronic system turns on
again.
1 Sensors in the front bumper
Interference caused by other ultrasonic signals (e.g. working jackhammers or the air
brakes of trucks) can cause the system to
send erratic indications, and should be taken into consideration.
241
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Range of the sensors
To function properly, the sensors must be
free of dirt, ice, snow and slush. Clean the
sensors regularly, being careful not to
scratch or damage the sensors.
Front sensors
Center
approx. 39 in (100 cm)
Corners
approx. 23,5 in (60 cm)
Rear sensors
Center
Corners
During parking maneuvers, pay special

attention to objects located above or
below the height of the sensors (e.g.
planters or trailer hitches). The Parktronic system will not detect such objects at close range and damage to
your vehicle or the object may result.
Ultrasonic signals from outside sources (e.g. truck air brakes or jackhammers) may impair the operation of the
Parktronic system.
Minimum distance
Center
Corners
If the system encounters an obstacle in

this range, all the warning lamps come on
and you hear a warning signal. If the obstacle is closer than the minimum distance,
the actual distance may no longer be indicated by the system.
242
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Warning indicators
Visual signals indicate to the driver the relative distance between the sensors and an
obstacle. The warning indicator for the
front area is located above the center air
vents in the dashboard. The warning indicator for the rear area is integrated between the rear backrests.
Front area warning indicator
1 Left side of the vehicle

2 Right side of the vehicle
Each warning indicator is divided into six

yellow and two red segments for either
side of the vehicle. The Parktronic system
is ready when the border around the indicator is illuminated.
As your vehicle approaches an object, one

or more segments will come on, depending
on the distance. When the eighth segment
comes on, you have reached the minimum
distance.
The position of the gear selector lever determines which warning indicators will be
activated.
Front area: An intermittent acoustic

warning will sound as the first red segment comes on and a constant acoustic warning lasting a maximum of three
seconds will sound for the second red
segment. The signal is canceled when
the gear selector lever is placed in
position P.
Rear area: An intermittent acoustic

warning will sound as the first red segment comes on and a constant acoustic warning lasting a maximum of three
seconds will sound for the second red
segment. The signal is canceled when
the gear selector lever is placed in position D or P.
Warning indicator
Front area activated
R or N
Front and rear area

activated
Neither activated
243
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Switching the Parktronic system
on/off
Switching off the Parktronic system
You can switch off the Parktronic system

manually.
Press upper half 1 of the switch.

Indicator lamp 2 comes on.
The Parktronic switch is located in the center console.
Switching on the Parktronic system
Press lower half 3 of the switch.

Indicator lamp 2 goes out.
1 Parktronic off
2 Indicator lamp
3 Parktronic on
244
Controls in detail
Loading
Loading
Ski sack*
Unfolding and loading
Close soft top completely

( page 219).
Open trunk lid.
Fold luggage cover back in direction of

the arrow.
1 Left hinge
2 Right hinge
3 Pull strap
4 Handle
5 Cover
6 Armrest
Pull ski sack roller blind upward using

pull strap 3.
Fold armrest 6 down (arrow).

way up.
Pull handle 4 and swing cover 5

down.
245
Controls in detail
Loading
7 Velcro strap
Unfasten velcro strap 7.
Pull ski sack into passenger compartment and unfold.
8 Flap
9 Catch
Pull down catch 9.
Open the flap 8 downwards in the direction of the arrow.
From trunk, slide skis into ski sack.
Warning!
The ski sack is designed for up to two pairs

of skis. Do not load the ski sack with other
objects.
Always fasten the ski sack securely. In an
accident, an unfastened ski sack can cause
injury to vehicle occupants.
246
Controls in detail
Loading
Unloading and folding
a Strap
Tighten strap a by pulling at the loose

end (arrow) until the skis in the ski sack
are tightly secured.
b Hook
c Eye
Connect hook b to eye c located on

center tunnel in front of rear seat
bench.
Tighten strap by pulling at the loose

end (arrow).
Loosen both straps.
Disconnect hook b from eye c.
Unload skis.
Close flap 8 in trunk.
Fold and flatten ski sack lengthwise.
Place folded ski sack inside recess of

backrest.
Fasten velcro strap
Close ski sack compartment cover.
247
Controls in detail
Loading
To snap ski sack roller blind into place,

press left and right hinges where the
word PRESS can be seen.
Fold luggage cover back and close it
securely ( page 216).
Removal of ski sack

For removal of the ski sack we recommend
that you contact an authorized
Warning!
1 Left hinge
2 Right hinge
3 Pull strap
Pull ski sack roller blind downward using pull strap 3.

way down.
248
Never drive vehicle with trunk open while

the ski sack is removed. Deadly carbon
monoxide (CO) gases may enter vehicle interior, resulting in unconsciousness and
death.
i
To prevent unauthorized persons from
access to the trunk, always close the
flap.
Controls in detail
Loading
Loading instructions
The total load weight including vehicle occupants and luggage/cargo should not exceed the vehicle capacity weight indicated
on the certification tag which can be found
on the left door pillar.
The handling characteristics of a fully loaded vehicle depend greatly on the load distribution. It is therefore recommended to
load the heaviest items being placed towards the front of the vehicle.
Always place items being carried against
rear seat backrests, and fasten them as securely as possible.
The heaviest portion of the cargo should always be kept as low as possible since it influences the handling characteristics of
the vehicle.
!
To prevent damage to the soft top or
luggage/cargo when lowering the roof:
load trunk only to the height of the

luggage cover
do not permit luggage/cargo to

push up the closed luggage cover
do not place anything on the shelf

behind the roll bar
do not place anything on the soft

top compartment cover
Warning!
Always fasten items being carried as securely as possible.

In an accident, during hard braking or sudden maneuvers, loose items will be thrown
around inside the vehicle and can cause injury to vehicle occupants unless the items
are securely fastened in the vehicle.
To help avoid personal injury during a collision or sudden maneuver, exercise care
when transporting cargo. Put luggage or cargo in the trunk if possible. Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the seat backs.
Do not place anything on the shelf below the
rear windows.
Never drive vehicle with trunk open. Deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) gases may enter vehicle interior resulting in unconsciousness
and death.
249
Controls in detail
Useful features
Useful features
Interior storage spaces
Warning!
To help avoid personal injury during a collision or sudden maneuver, exercise care
when stowing objects in the vehicle. Put luggage or cargo in the trunk if possible. Do not
pile luggage or cargo higher than the seat
backs.
Opening the glove box
Make sure no objects fall into the openings of the subwoofer between the rear
seats.
If necessary, contact an authorized

Mercedes-Benz Center to remove any
objects which may have fallen into the
openings.
Closing the glove box
Glove box
Luggage nets cannot secure hard or heavy

objects.
The glove box lid opens downward.
Push lid up to close.
i
The glove box lid contains a compartment for eyeglasses.
Close the compartment for glasses first
before closing the glove box.
Keep compartment lids closed. This will help

to prevent stored objects from being thrown
about and injuring vehicle occupants during
an accident.
Audio system/COMAND* with CD

changer*: The CD changer is located in
the glove box.
1 Glove box
2 Glove box lid release
250
Pull lid release 2.
Controls in detail
Useful features
Cup holder in the dashboard
Warning!
Opening cup holder
Armrest storage space
When not in use, keep the cup holder

closed. Place only containers that fit into the
cup holder to prevent spills. Use lids on
open containers and do not fill containers to
a height where the contents, especially hot
liquids, could spill during vehicle
maneuvers.
Push cover 1.
The cup holder opens automatically.
Closing cup holder
Push the cup holder back until it engages.
Opening compartment in armrest
Lift armrest by pulling on handle 1.
Closing
Lower armrest until it locks into place.
!
Do not store any items between the
telephone holder and the cover for the
blower. Otherwise these items could
be damaged when the holder is closed.
Use the space in the front door pocket
for stowing.
251
Controls in detail
Useful features
Opening telephone compartment
Changing inclination of armrest
Storage bags are located on the rear side

of the front seats.
Lift armrest by pushing button 2

or 3.
Closing telephone compartment
Warning!
Lower armrest until it locks into place.
Remove the mechanical key from the

Turn the compartment lock to
position 5.
Unlocking compartment
Turn the compartment lock to

position 4.
Insert the mechanical key in the

SmartKey.
252
Do not place heavy or fragile objects, or objects having sharp edges, in the storage
bags.
Locking compartment
Storage bags
Pull up on armrest.
Lowering armrest
Pull handle 1 to lower armrest.
In an accident, during hard braking or sudden maneuvers, they could be thrown

around inside the vehicle, and cause injury
to vehicle occupants.
Controls in detail
Useful features
Parcel net in front passenger footwell
A small convenience parcel net is located
in the front passenger footwell. It is for
small and light items, such as road maps,
mail, etc.
Warning!
Ashtrays
Center console ashtray
Warning!
Remove front ashtray only with vehicle

standing still. Set the parking brake to secure vehicle from movement. Move gear selector lever to position N. With gear selector
lever in position N, turn off the engine.
Do not place heavy or fragile objects, or objects having sharp edges, in the parcel net.
In an accident, during hard braking or sudden maneuvers, they could be thrown
to vehicle occupants.
Removing ashtray insert
Opening ashtray
Briefly touch cover plate 1.

The ashtray opens automatically.
Secure vehicle from movement by setting the parking brake. Move the selector lever to position N.
Now you have more room to take out
the insert.
Push sliding button 2 to the right.

The ashtray is disengaged and slides a
short way in direction of arrow 3.
Remove insert from ashtray frame.
253
Controls in detail
Useful features
Reinstalling the ashtray insert
Rear seat ashtray
Cigarette lighter
Opening ashtray
1 Cover
2 Cigarette lighter
Install insert by pushing back into

frame until it engages again.
Pull at top of cover to open ashtray.
Turn SmartKey in the starter switch to

position 1 or 2.
Briefly touch cover plate 1.
Push in cigarette lighter 2.
Removing ashtray insert
Press latch 1 to disengage ashtray insert and remove it.
Reinstalling the ashtray insert
254
Install ashtray insert.
Close the ashtray.
The lighter will pop out automatically

when hot.
Controls in detail
Useful features
Warning!
Floormats*
Warning!
Never touch the heating element or sides of

the lighter; they are extremely hot. Hold the
knob only.
Whenever you are using floormats, make

sure there is enough clearance and that the
floormats are securely fastened.

Floormats should always be securely fastened using eyelets 4 and retainer

pins 5.
Removing
Pull floormats off of retainer pins 2 in

direction of arrow 1.
Remove the floormats.
The lighter socket can be used to accommodate electrical accessories up

to a maximum 85 W.
Installing
Lay down the floormat.
Press the floormat eyelets 4 onto retainer pins 5 in direction of arrow 3.
Before driving off, check that the floormats

are securely in place and adjust them if necessary. A loose floormat could slip and
hinder proper functioning of the pedals.
255
Controls in detail
Useful features
Telephone*
Warning!
Warning!
Please do not forget that your primary responsibility is to drive the vehicle. A drivers
attention to the road must always be
his/her primary focus when driving. For
your safety and the safety of others, we recommend that you pull over to a safe location
and stop before placing or taking a telephone call.

running. Doing so could lead to a malfunction of the vehicles electronic system, possibly resulting in an accident and/or serious
personal injury.
If you choose to use the telephone1 while

driving, please use the hands-free device
and only use the telephone when road, traffic and weather conditions permit. Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a
cellular telephone while driving a vehicle.
Radio transmitters, such as a portable telephone or a citizens band unit, should only
be used inside the vehicle if they are connected to an antenna that is installed on
the outside of the vehicle.
The external antenna must be approved by
Mercedes-Benz. Please contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for information on the installation of an approved
external antenna. Refer to the radio transmitter operation instructions regarding use
of an external antenna.
256
Only operate the COMAND* (Cockpit Management and Data System)1 if road, traffic
and weather conditions permit.
1
Observe all legal requirements.

covering a distance of approx. 44 feet (approximately 13.5 m) every second.
You can take and place telephone calls using the and buttons on the
steering wheel. To carry out other telephone functions, use the control system
( page 154).
See separate operating manual for instructions on how to use the telephone.
Controls in detail
Useful features
Tele Aid*
!
The initial activation of the Tele Aid system may only be performed by completing the subscriber agreement and
placing an acquaintance call using the
SOS button. Failure to complete either
of these steps will result in a system
that is not activated. If the system is
not activated, the indicator lamp in the
SOS button stays on after turning
SmartKey in starter switch to
position 2 or pressing KEYLESS-GO*
start/stop button twice to position 2
( page 33). The message Tele Aid
not activated will be shown in the
ten seconds.
If you have any questions regarding activation, please call the Response Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or
1-888-923-8367 (in Canada).
The Tele Aid system
(Telematic Alarm Identification on Demand)
The SOS button is located above the interior rear view mirror.
The Tele Aid system consists of three

types of response:
The Roadside Assistance button

and the Information button are
located below the center armrest cover.
automatic and manual emergency
roadside assistance and
information
The Tele Aid system is operational providing that the vehicles battery is charged,
properly connected, not damaged and cellular and GPS coverage is available.
The speaker volume of a Tele Aid call can
be adjusted when using the volume control
on the multifunction steering wheel. To
raise, press button and to lower,
press button .
To activate, press the SOS button, the

Roadside Assistance button or
the Information button , depending on the type of response required.
Shortly after the completion of your

Tele Aid acquaintance call, you will receive
a user ID and password via first call mail.
By visiting www.mbusa.com and selecting
Tele Aid (USA only), you will have access
to account information, remote door unlock, Info Services profile and more.
!
The Tele Aid system utilizes the cellular
network for communication and the
GPS (Global Positioning System) satellites for vehicle location. If either of
these signals is unavailable, the
Tele Aid system may not function and if
this occurs, assistance must be summoned by other means.
257
Controls in detail
Useful features
System self-check
Initially, after turning the ignition
(position 2) on, malfunctions are detected
and indicated (the indicator lamps in the
SOS button, the Roadside Assistance
button and the Information
button stay on longer than ten seconds or do not come on). The message
Tele Aid defective! Visit workshop!
appears for approximately ten seconds in

i
The Tele Aid system utilizes the cellular
network for communication and the
GPS (Global Positioning System) satellites for vehicle location. If either of
these signals is unavailable, the
Tele Aid system may not function and if
this occurs, assistance must be summoned by other means.
258
Warning!
If the indicator lamps in the SOS button, in

the Roadside Assistance button and/or in
the Information button remain illuminated
constantly in red and/or message
Tele Aid defective! Visit workshop! is displayed in the multifunction display after the system self-check, a
malfunction in the system has been
detected.
If a malfunction is indicated as outlined
above, the system may not operate as expected. Have the system checked at the
nearest Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
possible.
Emergency calls
An emergency call is initiated
automatically:
following an accident in which the

emergency tensioning devices (ETDs)
or airbags deploy
if the anti-theft alarm or the tow-away

alarm stays on for more than
20 seconds, see Anti-theft systems
( page 82) and see Tow-away alarm
( page 84).
An emergency call can also be initiated

manually by opening the cover next to the
interior rear view mirror labeled SOS, then
briefly pressing the button located under
the cover. See below for instructions on
initiating an emergency call manually.
Once the emergency call is in progress, the
indicator lamp in the SOS button will begin
to flash. The message Emergency call
Connecting call appears in the multifunction display.
Controls in detail
Useful features
When the connection is established, the
message Emergency call Call connected appears in the multifunction display. All information relevant to the
emergency, such as the location of the vehicle (determined by the GPS satellite location system), vehicle model, identification
number and color are generated.
A voice connection between the Response
Center and the occupants of the vehicle
will be established automatically soon after the emergency call has been initiated.
When a voice connection is established,
the audio system mutes and the message
Tele Aid Emergency call active appears in the multifunction display. The Response Center will attempt to determine
more precisely the nature of the accident
provided they can speak to an occupant of
the vehicle.
The Tele Aid system is available if:
it has been activated and is operational. Activation requires a subscription

for monitoring services, connection
and cellular air time
the relevant cellular phone network
and GPS signals are available and pass
the information on to the response
center
i
Location of the vehicle on a map is only
possible if the vehicle is able to receive
signals from the GPS satellite network
and pass the information on to the response center.
Warning!
If the indicator lamp in the SOS button is illuminated continuously and there was no
voice connection to the Response Center
established, then the Tele Aid system could
not initiate an emergency call (e.g. the relevant cellular phone network is not available).
The message Emergency call
Call failed appears in the multifunction
display for approximately ten seconds.
Should this occur, assistance must be summoned by other means.
259
Controls in detail
Useful features
Initiating an emergency call manually
Wait for a voice connection to the Response Center.
Close cover 1 after the emergency

call is concluded.
Warning!
1 Cover
2 SOS button
Briefly press on cover 1.

The cover will open.
Press SOS button 2 briefly.

The indicator lamp in SOS button 2
will flash until the emergency call is
concluded.
260
If you feel at any way in jeopardy when in the

vehicle (e.g. smoke or fire in the vehicle, vehicle in a dangerous road location), please
do not wait for voice contact after you have
pressed the emergency button. Carefully
leave the vehicle and move to a safe location. The Response Center will automatically
contact local emergency officials with the
vehicles approximate location if they receive an automatic SOS signal and cannot
make voice contact with the vehicle occupants.
Roadside Assistance button

The Roadside Assistance button is
located below the center armrest cover.
Press and hold the button (for longer

than two seconds).
A call to a Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance dispatcher will be initiated.
The button will flash while the call is in
progress. The message Roadside Assistance Connecting call will appear in the multifunction display.

message Roadside Assistance
Call connected appears in the multifunction display. The Tele Aid system will transmit data generating the vehicle
identification number, model, color and location (subject to availability of cellular
and GPS signals).
Controls in detail
Useful features
A voice connection between the Roadside
Assistance dispatcher and the occupants
of the vehicle will be established. When a
voice connection is established, the audio
system mutes and the message Tele Aid
Roadside Assistance call active appears in the multifunction display.
Describe the nature of the need for assistance.
The Mercedes-Benz Roadside assistance

dispatcher will either dispatch a qualified
Mercedes-Benz technician or arrange to
tow your vehicle to the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center. For services such
as labor and/or towing, charges may apply. Refer to the Roadside Assistance manual for more information.
These programs are only available in the

USA:
Sign and Drive services: Services such

as jump start, a few gallons of fuel or
the replacement of a flat tire with the
vehicle spare tire are obtainable.
Remote Vehicle Diagnostics: This function permits the Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance dispatcher to
download malfunction codes and actual vehicle data.
i
The indicator lamp on the Roadside Assistance button remains illuminated in red for approximately ten
seconds during the system self-check
after turning the ignition (position 2) on
(together with the SOS button and the
Information button ).
If the indicator lamp on the Roadside

Assistance button is illuminated
continuously and there was no voice
connection to the Response Center established, then the Tele Aid system
could not initiate a Roadside Assistance call (e.g. the relevant cellular
phone network is not available). The
message Roadside Assistance
Call failed appears in the multifunction display.
Roadside Assistance calls can be terminated using the button on the
multifunction steering wheel.
See system self-check ( page 258)

when the indicator lamp does not come
on in red or stays on longer than approximately ten seconds.
261
Controls in detail
Useful features
Information button
The Information button is located below the center armrest cover.
Press and hold the button (for longer

than two seconds).
A call to the Customer Assistance Center will be initiated. The button will
flash while the call is in progress. The
message Info Connecting call will
appear in the multifunction display.
mation regarding the operation of your vehicle, the nearest authorized

Mercedes-Benz Center or Mercedes-Benz
USA products and services is available to
you.
For more details concerning the Tele Aid
system, please visit www.mbusa.com and
use your ID and password (sent to you separately) to learn more (USA only).

message Info Call connected appears
in the multifunction display. The Tele Aid
system will transmit data generating the
vehicle identification number, model, color
and location (subject to availability of cellular and GPS signals).
The indicator lamp on the Information

button remains illuminated in red
for approximately ten seconds during
the system self-check after turning the
ignition (position 2) on (together with
the SOS button and the Roadside Assistance button ).
A voice connection between the Customer

Assistance Center representative and the
occupants of the vehicle will be established. When a voice connection is established, the audio system mutes and the
message Tele Aid Info call active
appears in the multifunction display. Infor-
See System self-check ( page 258)

when the indicator lamp does not come
on in red or stays on longer than approximately ten seconds.
262
If the indicator lamp on the Information

button is illuminated continuously and there was no voice connection to
the Response Center established, then
the Tele Aid system could not initiate
an Information call (e.g. the relevant
cellular phone network is not available). The message
Info Call failed appears in the
Information calls can be terminated using the button on the multifunction steering wheel.
Controls in detail
Useful features
!
Upgrade signals
If the indicator lamps do not start flashing after pressing one of the buttons or
remain illuminated (in red) at any time,
the Tele Aid system has detected a
fault or the service is not currently active, and may not initiate a call. Visit
your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
and have the system checked or contact the Response Center at
1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or
1-888-923-8367 (in Canada) as soon
as possible.
The Tele Aid system processes calls using

the following priority.
If the indicator lamp continues to flash

or the system does not reset, contact
the Response Center at
1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or
1-888-923-8367 (in Canada), or
at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(1-800-367-6372) in the USA or
Customer Service at 1-800-387-0100
in Canada.
Automatic emergency First priority
Manual emergency Second priority
Roadside assistance Third priority
Information Fourth priority
Should a higher priority call be initiated

while you are connected, an upgrade (alternating) tone will be heard, and the appropriate indicator lamp will flash. If
certain information such as vehicle identification number or customer information is
not available, the operator may need to
retransmit.
During this time you will hear a beep and
voice contact will be interrupted. Voice
contact will resume once the retransmission is completed. Once a call is concluded, a beep will be heard and the respective
indicator lamp will stop flashing. The
COMAND* system operation will resume.
i
The indicator lamp in the respective
button flashes until the call is concluded. Calls can only be terminated by a
Response Center or Customer Assistance Center representative except
Roadside Assistance and Information
calls, which can also be terminated by
pressing button on the multifunction steering wheel.
263
Controls in detail
Useful features
Remote door unlock
When a Tele Aid call has been initiated,

the audio system or the COMAND* system audio is muted and the selected
mode (radio, tape or CD) pauses. The
optional cellular phone (if installed)
switches off. If you must use this
phone, the vehicle must be parked. Disconnect the coiled cord and place the
call. The COMAND* navigation system
(if engaged) will continue to run. The
display in the instrument cluster is
available for use and spoken commands are only available by pressing
the RPT button on the COMAND* unit.
A pop-up window will appear in the
COMAND* display to indicate that a
Tele Aid call is in progress.
In case you have locked your vehicle unintentionally (e.g. SmartKey inside vehicle),
and the reserve SmartKey is not handy:
Contact the Mercedes-Benz Response

Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA)
or 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada).
The remote door unlock feature is available if the relevant cellular phone network is available.
You will be asked to provide your password which you provided when you
completed the subscriber agreement.
The SOS button will flash and the message Emergency call
Call connected will appear in the multifunction display to indicate receipt of
the door unlock command.
Then return to your vehicle and pull the

trunk recessed handle for a minimum
of 20 seconds until the SOS button is
flashing.
The message Emergency call
Call connected appears in the multifunction display.
As an alternative, you may unlock the vehicle via Internet using the ID and password
sent to you shortly after the completion of
your acquaintance call.
264
The Response Center will then unlock your

vehicle with the remote door unlocking
feature.
Once the vehicle is unlocked,

a Response Center specialist will attempt to establish voice contact with
the vehicle occupants.
If the trunk recessed handle was pulled
for more than 20 seconds before door
unlock authorization was received by
the Response Center, you must wait
15 minutes before pulling the trunk recessed handle again.
Controls in detail
Useful features
Stolen vehicle tracking services
In the event your vehicle was stolen:
Report the incident to the police.

The police will issue a numbered incident report.
Pass this number on to the

Mercedes-Benz Response Center along
with your password issued to you when
you subscribed to the service.
The Response Center will then attempt
to covertly contact the vehicles
Tele Aid system. Once the vehicle is located, the Response Center will contact the local law enforcement and you.
The vehicles location will only be provided to law enforcement.
Garage door opener

The built-in remote control is capable of
operating up to three separately controlled
devices, for example garage door openers,
gate openers, or other devices compatible
with HomeLink or some other systems.
You can program the signal transmitter
buttons.
Remote control integrated into the interior
rear view mirror
Indicator lamp
2 3 4 Signal transmitter button

5
Hand-held transmitter button
Hand-held remote control transmitter (not part of the vehicle

equipment)
265
Controls in detail
Useful features
Warning!
Before programming the integrated remote

control to a garage door opener or gate operator, make sure that people and objects
are out of the way of the device to prevent
potential harm or damage.
When programming a garage door opener,
the door moves up or down. When programming a gate operator, the gate opens or
closes.
Do not use the integrated remote control
with any garage door opener that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by
U.S. federal safety standards (this includes
any garage door opener model manufactured before April 1, 1982). A garage door
that cannot detect an object - signaling the
door to stop and reverse - does not meet
current U.S. federal safety standards.
266
Certain types of garage door openers

are incompatible with the integrated
opener. If you should experience difficulties with programming the transmitter, contact your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center, or call
Center (in the USA only) at
1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer
Service (in Canada) at
1-800-387-0100.
For operation in the USA only:

This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Controls in detail
Useful features
Programming or reprogramming the integrated remote control
Step 3:
The indicator lamp 1 flashes the first

time the signal transmitter button is
programmed. If this button has already
been programmed, the indicator lamp
will only start flashing after 20 seconds.
Step 1:
Switch on ignition.
Step 2:
If you have previously programmed an

integrated signal transmitter button
and wish to retain its programming,
proceed to step 3. Otherwise, press
and hold the two outer signal transmitter buttons 2 and 4 and release
them only when the indicator light begins to flash after approximately 20
seconds (do not hold the button for
longer than 30 seconds). This procedure erases any previous settings for
all three channels and initializes the
memory. If you later wish to program a
second and/or third hand-held transmitter to the remaining two signal
transmitter buttons, do not repeat this
step and begin directly with step 3.
Hold the end of the hand-held remote

control transmitter 6 of the device
you wish to train approximately 2 to
5 in (5 to12 cm) away from the surface
of the integrated remote control located on the interior rear view mirror,
keeping the indicator lamp 1 in view.
Step 4:
Using both hands, simultaneously

press the hand-held transmitter
button 5 and the desired integrated
signal transmitter button (2, 3
or 4). Do not release the buttons until
completing step 5.
The indicator lamp 1 on the integrated remote control will flash, first slowly
and then rapidly.
Step 5:
When the indicator lamp 1 flashes

rapidly, release both buttons.
Step 6:
Press and hold the just-trained integrated signal transmitter button and
observe the indicator lamp 1.
If the indicator lamp 1 stays on constantly, programming is complete and
your device should activate when the
integrated signal transmitter button is
pressed and released.
267
Controls in detail
Useful features
Rolling code programming
Step 9:
If the indicator lamp 1 blinks rapidly

for about two seconds and then turns
to a constant light, continue with programming steps 8 through 12 as your
garage door opener may be equipped
with the rolling code feature.
To train a garage door opener (or other rolling code devices) with the rolling code feature, follow these instructions after
completing the Programming portion
(steps 1 through 6) of this text. (A second
person may make the following training
procedures quicker and easier.)
Step 7:
To program the remaining two buttons,

repeat the steps above starting with
step 3.
268
Step 8:
The training light is activated.

You have 30 seconds to initiate the following step.
Step 10:
Locate training button on the garage

door opener motor head unit.
Exact location and color of the button
may vary by garage door opener brand.
Depending on manufacturer, the training button may also be referred to as
learnor smart button. If there is difficulty locating the transmitting button,
refer to the garage door opener operators manual.
Press training button on the garage

door opener motor head unit.
Firmly press, hold for two seconds and

release the programmed integrated
or 4).
Step 11:
Press, hold for two seconds and release same button a second time to
complete the training process.
Some garage door openers (or other rolling

code equipped devices) may require you to
perform this procedure a third time to
complete the training.
Controls in detail
Useful features
Step 12:
Gate operator/Canadian programming
Step 4:
Canadian radio-frequency laws require

transmitter signals to time-out (or quit)
after several seconds of transmission
which may not be long enough for the integrated signal transmitter to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators
are designed to time-out in the same
manner.
Continue to press and hold the integrated signal transmitter button (2,
3 or 4) while you press and re-press
(cycle) your hand-held remote control transmitter 6 every two seconds
until the frequency signal has been
learned. Upon successful training, the
indicator lamp 1 will flash slowly and
then rapidly after several seconds.
If you live in Canada or if you are having difficulties programming a gate operator (regardless of where you live) by using the
programming procedures, replace step 4
with the following:
Proceed with programming step 5 and

step 6 to complete.
Confirm the garage door operation by

pressing the programmed integrated
or 4).
Step 13:
To program the remaining two buttons,

repeat the steps above starting with
step 3.
Operation of integrated remote control
Switch on ignition.
Select and press the appropriate integrated signal transmitter button (2,
3 or 4) to activate the remote controlled device.
The integrated remote control transmitter continues to send the signal as
long as the button is pressed up to
20 seconds.
269
Controls in detail
Useful features
Erasing the integrated remote control
memory
Reprogramming a single integrated

signal transmitter button
Switch on ignition.
Simultaneously hold down the signal

transmitter buttons 2 and 4, for approximately 20 seconds, until the indicator lamp 1 blinks rapidly. Do not
hold for longer than 30 seconds.
To program a device using a signal transmitter button previously trained, follow

these steps:
The codes of all three channels are

erased.
i
If you sell your vehicle, erase the codes
of all three channels.
270
Press and hold the desired signal transmitter button (2, 3 or 4). Do not release the button.
The indicator lamp will begin to flash after 20 seconds. Without releasing the
integrated signal transmitter button,
proceed with programming starting
with step 3.
Operation
The first 1000 miles (1500 km)
Driving instructions
At the gas station
Engine compartment
Tires and wheels
Winter driving
Maintenance
Vehicle care
271
Operation
In the Operation section you will find detailed information on operating, maintaining and caring for your vehicle.
The more cautiously you treat your vehicle

during the break-in period, the more satisfied you will be with its performance later
on.
!
Additional instructions for AMG vehicles:
During the first 1000 miles

(1500 km), do not exceed a speed
of 85 mph (140 km/h).
During this period, avoid engine

speeds above 4500 rpm in each
gear.
Drive your vehicle during the first

1000 miles (1500 km) at varying but
moderate vehicle and engine speeds.
During this period, avoid heavy loads

(full throttle driving) and excessive engine speeds (no more than 2/3 of maximum rpm in each gear).
Avoid accelerating by kickdown.
Do not attempt to slow the vehicle

down by shifting to a lower gear using
the gear selector lever.
All of the above instructions, as may apply

to your vehicle type, also apply when driving the first 1000 miles (1500 km) after
the engine or the rear differential has been
replaced.
Select positions 3, 2 or 1 only when

driving at moderate speeds (for hill
driving).
After 1000 miles (1500 km), you may

gradually increase vehicle and engine
speeds to the permissible maximum.
i
Always obey applicable speed limits.
272
Operation
Drive sensibly save fuel
Fuel consumption, to a great extent, depends on driving habits and operating conditions.
To save fuel you should:
Keep tires at the recommended inflation pressures.
Remove unnecessary loads.
Allow engine to warm up under low

load use.
Avoid frequent acceleration and deceleration.
Have all maintenance work performed

at the intervals specified in the Service
Booklet and as required by the FSS.
Contact your authorized
Drinking and driving
Warning!
Pedals
Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs

and driving are very dangerous combinations. Even a small amount of alcohol or
drugs can affect your reflexes, perceptions
and judgement.
The possibility of a serious or even fatal accident are greatly increased when you drink
or take drugs and drive.
Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow
anyone to drive who has been drinking or
taking drugs.
Warning!
Keep drivers foot area clear at all times. Objects stored in this area may impair pedal
movement.
Power assistance
Warning!

effort is necessary to brake and steer the vehicle.
Fuel consumption is also increased by driving in cold weather, in stop-and-go traffic,

on short trips and in hilly country.
273
Operation
Brakes
Warning!
After driving in heavy rain for some time

without applying the brakes or through water deep enough to wet brake components,
the first braking action may be somewhat
reduced and increased pedal pressure may
be necessary to obtain expected braking effect. Maintain a safe distance from vehicles
in front.
To help prevent brake disk corrosion after

driving on wet road surfaces (particularly
salted roads), it is advisable to brake the
vehicle with considerable force prior to
parking. The heat generated serves to dry
the brakes.
If your brake system is normally only subject to moderate loads, you should occasionally test the effectiveness of the
brakes by applying above-normal braking
pressure at higher speeds. This will also
enhance the grip of the brake pads.
Resting your foot on the brake pedal will

cause excessive and premature wear of the
brake pads.
It can also result in the brakes overheating,

thereby significantly reducing their effectiveness. It may not be possible to stop the
vehicle in sufficient time to avoid an accident.
Refer to the description of the Brake

Assist System (BAS) ( page 78).
274
Be very careful not to endanger other

road users when you apply the brakes.
If the parking brake is released and the

brake warning lamp in the instrument cluster stays on, the brake fluid level in the reservoir is too low.
Brake pad wear or a leak in the system may
be the reason for low brake fluid in the reservoir.
Have the brake system inspected immediately. Contact your authorized
All checks and service work on the brake
system should be carried out by qualified
technicians only. Contact your authorized
Only install brake pads and brake fluid recommended by Mercedes-Benz.
Operation
Warning!
If other than recommended brake pads are

installed, or other than recommended brake
fluid is used, the braking properties of the
vehicle can be degraded to an extent that
safe braking is substantially impaired. This
could result in an accident.
!
When driving down long and steep
grades, relieve the load on the brakes
by shifting into a lower gear to use the
engines braking power. This helps prevent overheating of the brakes and reduces brake pad wear.
After hard braking, it is advisable to drive
on for some time, rather than immediately
parking, so that the air stream can cool
down the brakes faster.
Driving off
Apply the brakes to test them briefly after
driving off. Perform this procedure only
when the road is clear of other traffic.
Warm up the engine gradually. Do not
place full load on the engine until the operating temperature has been reached.
When starting off on a slippery surface, do
not allow a drive wheel to spin for an extended period. Doing so may cause serious
damage to the drive train which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
!
Simultaneously depressing the accelerator pedal and applying the brake reduces engine performance and causes
premature brake wear and drivetrain
wear.
Parking
!
Set the parking brake whenever parking or leaving the vehicle. In addition,
move gear selector lever to position P.
When parking on hills, turn front wheels
towards the road curb.
Warning!
Do not park this vehicle in areas where combustible materials such as grass, hay or
275
Operation
Warning!
To reduce the risk of personal injury as a result of inadvertent vehicle movement, before turning off the engine and leaving the
vehicle always:
Keep right foot firmly on brake pedal.
Firmly depress parking brake pedal.
Move the gear selector lever to

position P.
Slowly release brake pedal.
When parked on an incline, turn front

wheels towards the road curb.
Turn the SmartKey to starter switch

position 0 and remove, or press
KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*).
Take the SmartKey or the SmartKey with

KEYLESS-GO* with you and lock vehicle
when leaving.
Tires
Warning!
If you feel a sudden significant vibration or

ride disturbance, or you suspect that possible damage to your vehicle has occurred,
you should turn on the hazard warning flashers, carefully slow down, and drive with caution to an area which is a safe distance from
the road.
Inspect the tires and the vehicle underbody
for possible damage. If the vehicle or tires
appear unsafe, have it towed to the nearest
Mercedes-Benz Center or tire dealer for repairs.
Tread wear indicators (TWI) are required by

law. These indicators are located in six
places on the tread circumference and become visible at a tread depth of approximately 116 in (1.6 mm), at which point the
tire is considered worn and should be replaced.
The tread wear indicator appears as a solid
band across the tread.
Warning!
Although the applicable federal motor vehicle safety laws consider a tire to be worn
when the tread wear indicators (TWI) become visible at approximately 1/16 in
(1.6 mm), we recommend that you do not allow your tires to wear down to that level. As
tread depth approaches 1/8 in (3 mm), the
adhesion properties on a wet road are
sharply reduced.
Depending upon the weather and/or road
surface (conditions), the tire traction varies
widely.
276
Operation
Specified tire pressures must be maintained. This applies particularly if the tires
are subject to extreme operating conditions (e.g. high speeds, heavy loads, high
ambient temperatures).
Warning!
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects

the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You
may lose control of the vehicle. Continued
driving with a flat tire or driving at high
speed with a flat tire will cause excessive
heat build-up and possibly a fire.
Tire traction
The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or
icy road is always lower than on a dry road.
You should pay particular attention to the
condition of the road whenever the outside
temperatures are close to the freezing
point.
Warning!
Mercedes-Benz recommends M+S rated

radial-ply tires with a minimum tread depth
of approximately 1/6 in (4 mm) on all four
wheels for the winter season to ensure
normal balanced handling characteristics.
On packed snow, they can reduce your
stopping distance compared to summer
tires. Stopping distance, however, is still
considerably greater than when the road is
not covered with snow or ice. Exercise appropriate caution.
If ice has formed on the road, tire traction

will be substantially reduced. Under such
weather conditions, drive, steer and brake
with extreme caution.
Hydroplaning
Depending on the depth of the water layer
on the road, hydroplaning may occur, even
at low speeds and with new tires. Reduce
vehicle speed, avoid track grooves in the
road and apply brakes cautiously in the
rain.
277
Operation
Tire speed rating
CLK 320
CLK 500
Regardless of the tire rating, local speed

limits should be obeyed. Use prudent driving speeds appropriate to prevailing conditions.
Your vehicle is factory equipped with

H-rated tires, which have a speed rating
of 130 mph (210 km/h) or with W-rated
tires*, which have a speed rating of
168 mph (270 km/h).

Y-rated tires, which have a speed rating
of 186 mph (300 km/h).
Warning!
Even when permitted by law, never operate

a vehicle at speeds greater than the maximum speed rating of the tires.
Exceeding the maximum speed for which
tires are rated can lead to sudden tire failure, causing loss of vehicle control and possibly resulting in an accident and/or
personal injury and possible death, for you
and for others.
An electronic speed limiter prevents your

vehicle from exceeding a speed of
130 mph (210 km/h).
CLK 320 with Appearance Package*
W-rated tires, which have a speed rating
of 168 mph (270 km/h).
130 mph (210 km/h).

130 mph (210 km/h).
CLK 55 AMG
Y-rated tires, which have a speed rating
of 186 mph (300 km/h).
155 mph (250 km/h).
i
For information on tire speed rating for
winter tires, see Winter tires
( page 300).
278
Operation
Winter driving instructions
The most important rule for slippery or icy
roads is to drive sensibly and to avoid
abrupt acceleration, braking and steering
maneuvers. Do not use the cruise control
system under such conditions.
When the vehicle is in danger of skidding,
move gear selector lever to position N. Try
to keep the vehicle under control by corrective steering action.
i
For information on driving with snow
chains, see Snow chains
( page 301).
Warning!

result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle control. Your vehicles ABS will not prevent this type of control loss.
Road salts and chemicals can adversely affect braking efficiency. Increased pedal
force may become necessary to produce
the normal braking effect.
Depressing the brake pedal periodically
when traveling at length on salt-strewn
roads can bring road-salt-impaired braking
efficiency back to normal.
If the vehicle is parked after being driven
on salt-treated roads, the braking efficiency should be tested as soon as possible after driving is resumed.
Warning
Make sure not to endanger any other road

users when carrying out these braking maneuvers.
Warning!
If the vehicle becomes stuck in snow, make

sure snow is kept clear of the exhaust pipe
and from around the vehicle with the engine
running. Otherwise, deadly carbon monoxide (CO) gases may enter vehicle interior resulting in unconsciousness and death.
To assure sufficient fresh air ventilation,
open a window slightly on the side of the vehicle not facing the wind.
Warning!
The outside temperature indicator is not designed to serve as an ice-warning device and
is therefore unsuitable for that purpose. Indicated temperatures just above the freezing point do not guarantee that the road
surface is free of ice.
For more information, see Winter driving

( page 300).
279
Operation
Standing water
!
Do not drive through flooded areas or
water of unknown depth. Before driving
through water, determine its depth.
Never accelerate before driving into
water. The bow wave could force water
into the engine and auxiliary equipment, thus damaging them.
If you must drive through standing water, drive slowly to prevent water from
entering the passenger compartment
or the engine compartment. Water in
these areas could cause damage to
electrical components or wiring of the
engine or transmission, or could result
in water being ingested by the engine
through the air intake, causing severe
internal engine damage. Any such damage is not covered by the
280
Passenger compartment
Warning!
Driving abroad
Always fasten items being carried as securely as possible.

In an accident, during hard braking or sudden maneuvers, loose items will be thrown
to vehicle occupants unless the items are
securely fastened in the vehicle.
The trunk is the preferred place to carry objects.
Abroad, there is an extensive

Mercedes-Benz service network at your
disposal. If you plan to drive into areas
which are not listed in the index of your
Mercedes-Benz Center directory, you
should request pertinent information from
Operation
Control and operation of radio transmitters
Telephones and two-way radios

Warning!
Catalytic converter
COMAND*, radio and telephone*

Warning!
Please do not forget that your primary responsibility is to drive the vehicle safely.
Only operate the COMAND (Cockpit Management and Data System), radio or telephone1 if road, traffic and weather
conditions permit.
covering a distance of approximately
44 feet (approximately 13.5 m) every second.
1
Observe all legal requirements.

running. Doing so could lead to a malfunction of the vehicles electronic system, possibly resulting in an accident and/or serious
personal injury.
Radio transmitters, such as a portable telephone or a citizens band unit should only
be used inside the vehicle if they are connected to an antenna that is installed on
the outside of the vehicle.
Refer to the radio transmitter operation instructions regarding use of an external antenna.
Your Mercedes-Benz is equipped with

monolithic-type catalytic converters, an
important element in conjunction with the
oxygen sensors to achieve substantial control of the pollutants in the exhaust emissions. Keep your vehicle in proper
operating condition by following our recommended maintenance instructions as
outlined in your Service Booklet.
!
To prevent damage to the catalytic converters, only use premium unleaded
gasoline in this vehicle.
Any noticeable irregularities in engine
operation should be dealt with promptly. Otherwise, excessive unburned fuel
may reach the catalytic converter,
causing it to overheat and start a fire.
281
Operation
Warning!
As with any vehicle, do not idle, park or operate this vehicle in areas where combustible materials such as grass, hay, or leaves
can come into contact with the hot exhaust
system, as these materials could be ignited
and cause a vehicle fire.
Emission control
Warning!
Certain systems of the engine serve to
keep the toxic components of the exhaust
gases within permissible limits required by
law.
These systems, of course, will function
properly only when maintained strictly according to factory specifications. Any adjustments to the engine should therefore
be carried out only by qualified
Mercedes-Benz Center authorized technicians.
Engine adjustments should not be altered
in any way. Moreover, the specified service
jobs must be carried out regularly according to Mercedes-Benz servicing requirements. For details refer to the Service
Booklet.
282
Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to

your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon
monoxide, and inhaling it can cause unconsciousness and lead to death.
Do not run the engine in confined areas
(such as a garage) which are not properly
ventilated. If you think that exhaust gas
fumes are entering the vehicle while driving,
have the cause determined and corrected
immediately. If you must drive under these
conditions, drive with at least one window
fully open at all times.
Operation
Coolant temperature
Warning!
During severe operating conditions and
stop-and-go city traffic, the coolant temperature may rise close to approx. 248F
(120C).
the coolant temperature over 248F
(120C). Doing so may cause serious engine damage which is not covered by the
Driving when your engine is badly overheated can cause some fluids, which
may have leaked into the engine compartment, to catch fire. You could be seriously burned.
Steam from an overheated engine can

cause serious burns and can occur just
by opening the hood. Stay away from
the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it.

283
Operation
At the gas station
At the gas station
Refueling
Warning!
Failure to remove the fuel cap slowly could

result in personal injury.
The fuel filler flap is located on the

right-hand side of the vehicle towards the
rear. Locking/unlocking the vehicle with
the SmartKey or the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* automatically locks/unlocks the fuel filler flap.
284
The fuel filler flap springs open.
Gasoline is highly flammable and poisonous.

It burns violently and can cause serious injury. Whenever you are around gasoline, avoid
inhaling fumes and skin contact, extinguish
all smoking materials. Never allow sparks,
flame or smoking materials near gasoline!
Open the fuel filler flap by pushing at

the point indicated by the arrow.
Turn the fuel cap to the left and hold on

to it until possible pressure is released.
Take off the cap and set it in the recess

on the fuel filler flap.
To prevent fuel vapors from escaping
into open air, fully insert filler nozzle
unit.
Turn the engine off
by turning the SmartKey to

position 0. Remove the SmartKey
from the starter switch.
by pressing the KEYLESS-GO*

start/stop button. Open the drivers door (with drivers door open,
starter switch is now in position 0,
same as with SmartKey removed
from starter switch).
Only fill your tank until the filler nozzle

unit cuts out do not top up or overfill.
Operation
At the gas station
Warning!
Overfilling of the fuel tank may create pressure in the system which could cause a gas
discharge. This could cause the gas to spray
back out when removing the fuel pump nozzle, which could cause personal injury.
Replace the fuel cap by turning it to the

right.
Only use premium unleaded gasoline

with a minimum Posted Octane Rating
of 91 (average of 96 RON/86 MON).
Information on gasoline quality can
normally be found on the fuel pump.
Leaving the engine running and the fuel

cap open can cause the ? lamp to
illuminate.
More information on gasoline can be

found in the Factory Approved Service
Products pamphlet.
You will hear when the fuel cap is tightened.
Close the fuel filler flap.
285
Operation
At the gas station
Check regularly and before a long trip
1 Coolant level
More information on coolant can be
found in the Operation section on
( page 292).
2 Brake fluid (fuse box cover removed)
Removing fuse box cover ( page 395)
3 Windshield washer and headlamp
cleaning system
More information on refilling the reservoir can be found in the Operation
section on ( page 295).
286
Engine oil level
If you find that the brake fluid in the

brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the
minimum mark or below, have the
brake system checked for brake pad
thickness and leaks immediately. Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
immediately. Do not add brake fluid as
this will not solve the problem. For
more information, see also Practical
hints ( page 313).
More information on engine oil

( page 288).
Opening hood ( page 287).
Vehicle lighting
Check function and cleanliness.For more
information on replacing light bulbs, see
Replacing bulbs ( page 372).
Exterior lamp switch ( page 47)
Tire inflation pressure
More information on tire inflate pressure
( page 298).
Operation
Engine compartment
Engine compartment
Hood
Warning!
Do not pull the release lever while the vehicle is in motion. Otherwise the hood could
be forced open by passing air flow.
Pull lever 1 downwards.
Push lever 2 on the hood upwards.
The hood is unlocked.
Pull up on the hood and then release it.
!
To avoid damage to the windshield wipers or hood, never open the hood if the
wiper arms are folded forward away
from the windshield.
Opening
The hood will be automatically held

open at shoulder height by gas-filled
struts.
Warning!
To help prevent personal injury, stay clear of

moving parts when the hood is open and the
engine is running. Make sure the hood is
properly closed before driving. When closing
the hood, use extreme caution not to catch
hands or fingers.
The radiator fan may continue to run for approximately 30 seconds or may even restart
after the engine has been turned off. Stay
clear of fan blades.
1 Hood lock release
2 Lever for opening the hood
287
Operation
Engine compartment
Warning!
If you see flames or smoke coming from the

engine compartment, or if the coolant temperature gauge indicates that the engine is
overheated, do not open the hood. Move
away from the vehicle and do not open the
hood until the engine has cooled. If necessary, call the fire department.
Warning!
The engine is equipped with a transistorized

ignition system. Because of the high voltage
it is dangerous to touch any components (ignition coils, spark plug sockets, diagnostic
socket) of the ignition system
with the engine running
while starting the engine
if ignition is on and the engine is

turned manually
288
Closing
Warning!
Engine oil
Be careful that you do not close the hood on

anyone.
The amount of oil your engine needs will

depend on a number of factors, including
driving style. Higher oil consumption can
occur when
the vehicle is new
Let the hood drop from a height of approximately 1 ft (30 cm).
the vehicle is driven frequently at higher engine speeds
The hood will lock audibly.
Engine oil consumption checks should only

be made after the vehicle break-in period.
Make sure the hood is fully closed.

If you can raise the hood at a point
above the headlamps, then it is not
properly closed. Open it again and let it
drop with somewhat greater force.
i
Do not use any special lubricant additives, as these may damage the drive
assemblies. Using special additives not
approved by Mercedes-Benz will
restrict your warranty entitlement.
More information on this subject is
available at any Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Operation
Engine compartment
Checking engine oil level with the control system
The standard display ( page 129) should

appear in the multifunction display.
When checking the oil level the vehicle

must
be parked on level ground
be at normal operating temperature
have been stationary for at least five

minutes with the engine turned off
To check the engine oil level via the

multifunction display, do the following:
Press buttonk or j on the

steering wheel until the following
message is seen in the multifunction
display:
(Canada: 1.5 liter)
Add 2.0 qt.

to reach max. oil level!
(Canada: 2.0 liter)
Engine oil level

Measuring now!
Measurement
correct
only if veh. level

to position 2 or press the
KEYLESS GO* start/stop button twice.
Add 1.5 qt.

i
If you want to interrupt the checking
procedure, press the k or j
button on the multifunction steering
wheel.
If necessary, add engine oil.
For adding engine oil see ( page 291).

One of the following messages will
subsequently appear in the indicator:
Engine oil level

ok
Add 1.0 qt.

More information on engine oil can be

found in the Technical data section
( page 410) and ( page 412).
(Canada: 1.0 liter)
289
Operation
Engine compartment
Other display messages
If you see the message:
If the SmartKey is not turned to position 2

in the starter switch, the following
message will appear:
Engine oil level

Not when engine on!
Excess oil must be siphoned or drained

off. It could cause damage to the
engine and catalytic converter not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
Turn on ignition
to see engine oil level!
If the engine is at normal operating

temperature, wait five minutes before
checking oil.
If the engine is not yet at normal

operating temperature, you must wait
30 minutes before checking oil.
Switch on the ignition.
If you see the message:

Observe waiting time
If engine is at normal operating

temperature, wait five minutes before
repeating check procedure.
If engine is not yet at normal operating

temperature, wait 30 minutes before
repeating check procedure.
If there is excess engine oil with the engine

at normal operating temperature, the
following message will appear:
Engine oil level
Reduce oil level!
290
Have excess oil siphoned or drained

off. Contact your authorized
More information on messages in the

display concerning engine oil can be found
in the Practical hints section
( page 332).
Operation
Engine compartment
Adding engine oil
!
Excess oil must be siphoned or drained
off. It could cause damage to the engine and catalytic converter not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
!
Only use approved engine oils. For a
listing of a approved engine oils, refer
to the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet in your vehicle literature
portfolio.
In addition, check the oil filler cap for
important information pertaining to the
engine oil needing to meet a specific
Mercedes-Benz specification (e.g. MB
229.5). If such information is printed
on the oil filler cap, only use an engine
oil from the list of approved engine oils
in the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet that meets the specification indicated on the oil filler cap.
Using engine oils of other specification
may cause the FSS to incorrectly determine the next service interval and will
result in engine damage not covered by
1 Filler cap
Unscrew filler cap 1 from filler neck.

Be careful not to overfill with oil.
Add engine oil as required. Be careful

not to overfill with oil.
Screw filler cap 1 back on filler neck.
Transmission fluid level

The transmission fluid level does not need
to be checked. If you notice transmission
fluid loss or gear shifting malfunctions,
have an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
check the automatic transmission.
Be careful not to spill any oil when adding.

Avoid environmental damage caused by oil
entering the ground or water.
291
Operation
Engine compartment
Coolant
Warning!
The engine coolant is a mixture of water
and anticorrosion/antifreeze. To check
the coolant level, the vehicle must be
parked on level ground and the engine
must be cool.
The coolant expansion tank is located on
the passenger side of the engine compartment.
292
In order to avoid any possibly serious burns:
Use extreme caution when opening the

hood if there are any signs of steam or
coolant leaking from the cooling system,
or if the coolant temperature gauge indicates that the coolant is overheated.
Do not remove pressure cap on coolant

reservoir if engine temperature is above
194F (90C). Allow engine to cool
down before removing cap. The coolant
reservoir contains hot fluid and is under
pressure.
Using a rag, slowly open the cap approximately 12 turn to relieve excess pressure. If opened immediately, scalding
hot fluid and steam will be blown out under pressure.
Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine

parts. Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which may burn if it comes into contact with hot engine parts.
1 Coolant expansion tank
Using a rag, turn the cap slowly approximately one half turn to the left to release any excess pressure.
Continue turning the cap to the left and

remove it.
Operation
Engine compartment
The coolant level is correct if the level
for cold coolant: reaches the black top

part of the reservoir
for warm coolant: is approx. 0.6 in

(1.5 cm) higher
Add coolant as required.
Replace and tighten cap.
More information on coolant can be found

in the Technical data section
( page 414).
293
Operation
Engine compartment
Battery
Your vehicles battery is located on the
right side of the engine compartment.
The battery should always be sufficiently
charged in order to achieve its rated service life. Refer to Service Booklet for battery maintenance intervals.
If you use your vehicle mostly for
short-distance trips, you will need to have
the battery charge checked more frequently.
When replacing the battery, always use
batteries approved by Mercedes-Benz.
If you do not intend to operate your vehicle
for an extended period of time, consult an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center about
steps you need to observe.
294
all safety instructions

G Observe
E Wear eye protection.
and precautions when handling
automotive batteries.
Keep children away.
Risk of explosion
C
A
Follow the instructions in this
Keep flames or sparks away
F
Operator's Manual.
D
from battery. Do not smoke.
Battery acid is caustic. Do not

allow it to come into contact
with skin, eyes or clothing.
In case it does, immediately
flush affected area with clear
water and seek medical help if
necessary.
Batteries contain materials that can harm

the environment if disposed of improperly.
Recycling of batteries is the preferred
method of disposal. Many states require
sellers of batteries to accept old batteries
for recycling.
Operation
Engine compartment
headlamp cleaning system*
The windshield washer reservoir is located
in the engine compartment.
During all seasons, add MB Windshield

Washer Concentrate S to water. Premix
the windshield washer fluid in a suitable
container.
Refill the reservoir with MB Windshield

Washer Concentrate S and water (or
commercially available premixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze, depending on ambient temperatures).
Always use washer solvent/antifreeze
where temperatures may fall below the
freezing point. Failure to do so could result in damage to the washer system/reservoir.
1 Washer fluid reservoir

Fluid for the windshield washer system and
the headlamp cleaning system is supplied
from the windshield washer reservoir. It
has a capacity of approx. 6.4 US qt (6 l).
i
The windshield washer system on this
vehicle is heated, so a fluid mixture produced to resist freezing at temperatures of approximately 14F (10C)
should be sufficient.
Warning!
Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly flammable. Do not spill washer

solvent/antifreeze on hot engine parts, because it may ignite and burn. You could be
seriously burned.
!
Only use washer fluid which is suitable
for plastic lenses. Improper washer fluid can damage the plastic lenses of the
headlamps.
For more information, see Windshield

washer system and headlamp cleaning
system* ( page 416).
295
Operation
Tires and wheels
Tires and wheels
See your authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center for information on tested and recommended rims and tires for summer and
winter operation. They can also offer advice concerning tire service and purchase.
Warning!
Replace rims or tires with the same designation, manufacturer and type as shown on the
original part. See your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center for further information. If incorrectly sized rims and tires are
mounted:
The wheel brakes or suspension components can be damaged.
The correct operating clearance of the

wheels and tires is no longer guaranteed.
296
Warning!
Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the

tire tread is badly worn, or if the tires have
sustained damage, replace them.
When replacing rims, only use genuine
Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts specified for the
particular rim type. Failure to do so can result in the bolts loosening and possibly an
accident.
Retreaded tires are not tested or recommended by Mercedes-Benz, since previous

damage cannot always be recognized on
retreads. Mercedes-Benz can therefore
not assure the operating safety of the vehicle when such tires are used.
Operation
Tires and wheels
Important guidelines
Life of tires
Direction of rotation
Only use sets of tires and rims of the

same type and make.
The service life of a tire is dependent upon

various factors including but not limited to:
Tires must be of the correct size for the

rim.
Driving style
Tire pressure
Unidirectional tires offer added advantages, such as better hydroplaning performance. To benefit, however, you must
make sure the tires rotate in the direction
specified.
Break in new tires for approximately

60 miles (100 km) at moderate
speeds.
Distance driven
Regularly check the tires and rims for

damage. Dented or bend rims can
cause tire pressure loss and damage
the tire beads.
If vehicle is heavily loaded, check tire

pressure and correct as required.
Do not allow your tires to wear down

too far. Adhesion properties on wet
roads are sharply reduced at tread
depths under 1/8 in (3 mm).
When replacing individual tires, you

should mount new tires on the front
wheels first (on vehicles with
same-sized wheels all around).
Warning!
An arrow on the sidewall indicates the intended direction of tire rotation.
Tires and spare tire should be replaced after

six years, regardless of the remaining tread.
!
Keep unmounted tires in a cool, dry
place with as little exposure to light as
possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease and gasoline.
297
Operation
Tires and wheels
Checking tire inflation pressure
Warning!
If the tire pressure drops repeatedly:
Check the tires for punctures from foreign objects.
Check to see whether air is leaking from

the valves or from around the rim.
Correct the tire pressure only when tires

are cold.
Regularly check your tire pressure at intervals of no more than 14 days.
If the tires are warm you should only correct the tire pressure if it is too low for current operating conditions.
A table on the fuel filler flap lists the specified tire inflation pressures for warm and
cold tires as well as for various operating
conditions.
298
The pressures listed for light loads are

minimum values offering high driving
comfort.
Increased inflation pressures listed for
heavier loads may also be used for light
loads. These higher pressures produce
favorable handling characteristics. The
ride of the vehicle, however, will be
somewhat harder. Never exceed the
max. values or inflate tires below the
min. values listed in the fuel filler flap.
Warning!
Follow recommended inflation pressures.

Do not overinflate tires. Overinflating tires
can result in sudden deflation (blowout) because they are more likely to become punctured or damaged by road debris, potholes,
etc.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires
wear unevenly, adversely affect handling
and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail
from being overheated.
Tire pressure changes by approximately

1.5 psi (0.1 bar) per 18F (10C) of air
temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure where the
temperature is different from the outside
temperature.
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the

specified vehicle capacity weight (as indicated by the label on the pillar in the drivers
door opening). Overloading the tires can
overheat them, possibly causing a blowout.
Tire temperature and tire pressure are also

increased while driving, depending on the
driving speed and the tire load.
Check the spare tire periodically for condition and inflation. Spare tires will age and
become worn over time even if never used,
and thus should be inspected and replaced
when necessary.
Operation
Tires and wheels
Rotating wheels
Warning!
Rotate front and rear wheels only if they are

of the same size.
On vehicles with the same wheel size all

around, wheels can be rotated every 3000
to 6000 miles (5000 to 10000 km), or
sooner if necessary, according to the degree of tire wear. The same direction of tire
rotation must be retained.
Rotate the wheels before the characteristic tire wear pattern becomes visible
(shoulder wear on front wheels and tread
center wear on rear wheels).
Thoroughly clean the inner side of the
wheels after each rotation. Check and ensure proper tire inflation pressure.
Warning!
Have the tightening torque checked after

changing a wheel. Wheels could become
loose if not tightened with a torque of
80 lb-ft (110 Nm).
Only use genuine Mercedes-Benz wheel
bolts specified for your vehicle's rims.
299
Operation
Winter driving
Winter driving
Before the onset of winter, have your vehicle winterized at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center. This service includes:
Check of anticorrosion and antifreeze

concentration.
Addition of cleaning concentrate to the

water of the windshield and headlamp
cleaning system. Add MB Concentrate
S to a premixed windshield washer
solvent/antifreeze which is formulated
for temperatures below freezing point
( page 416).
Battery test. Battery capacity drops

with decreasing ambient temperature.
A well charged battery helps to ensure
that the engine can be started even at
low ambient temperatures.
Tire change. Mercedes-Benz recommends M+S rated radial-ply tires with a
minimum tread depth of approximately
1
/6 in (4 mm) on all four wheels for the
winter season.
300
Winter tires
Always use winter tires at temperatures
below 45F (7C) and whenever wintry
road conditions prevail. Use of winter tires
is the only way to achieve the maximum effectiveness of the ABS and the ESP in winter operation.
For safe handling, ensure that all mounted
winter tires are of the same make and have
the same tread design.
Warning!
Winter tires with a tread depth under 1/6 in

(4 mm) must be replaced. They are no longer suitable for winter operation.
Always observe the speed rating of the

winter tires installed on your vehicle. If the
maximum speed for which your tires are
rated is below the speed rating of your vehicle, you must place a notice to this effect
where it will be seen by the driver. Such notices are available at your tire dealer or any
Warning!
If you use your spare tire when winter tires

are fitted on the other wheels, be aware that
the difference in tire characteristics may
very well impair turning stability and that
overall driving stability may be reduced.
Adapt your driving style accordingly.
Have the spare tire replaced with a winter
tire at the nearest authorized
Operation
Winter driving
Block heater*
Snow chains
(Canada only)
The engine is equipped with a block heater.
Snow chains should only be driven on

snow-covered roads at speeds not to exceed 30 mph (50 km/h). Remove chains
as soon as possible when driving on roads
without snow.
The electrical cable may be installed at

i
When driving with snow chains, you
may wish to deactivate the ESP
( page 80) before setting the vehicle
in motion. This will improve the vehicles traction.
Please observe the following guidelines
when using snow chains:
Using snow chains is not permissible

with all wheel/tire combinations.
Only use snow chains that are approved by Mercedes-Benz. Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will be
glad to advise you on this subject.
Use of snow chains may be prohibited

depending on location. Always check
local and state laws before installing
snow chains.
!
Use of snow chains is not permissible
with tire sizes:
225/50 R16 92H
245/40 R17 91W
245/40 R17 91Y
T 125/80 R17 99M
T 125/90 R 16 98M
Snow chains should only be used on

the rear wheels. Follow the manufacturer's mounting instructions.
301
Operation
Maintenance
Maintenance
We strongly recommend that you have
your vehicle serviced by your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center, in accordance with
the Service Booklet at the times called for
by the FSS (Flexible Service System).
Clearing the service indicator
Failure to have the vehicle maintained in

accordance with the Service Booklet at the
designated times/mileage called for by
the FSS may result in vehicle damage not
Warranty.
FSS will notify you when your next service

is due.
Approximately one month before your next
service is due, one of the following messages will appear in the multifunction display while you are driving or when you
switch on the ignition (example service A):
Service
Service
Service
Service
302
A
A
A
A
in XXXXX miles (km)

in XXX days
in X day
due now!
The service indicator is automatically

cleared after 30 seconds. You can also
clear it yourself.
The type of service due is indicated in the
multifunction display:
Minor service (A)

Major service (B)
i
The interval between services depends
on your driving habits. A gentle driving
style, moderate engine speeds and the
avoidance of short-distance trips will
lengthen the interval between services.
Press the reset button on the instrument cluster ( page 126).
Service term exceeded

If you have exceeded the suggested service term, you will see the following message in the multifunction display:
Service A exceeded by XXXXX miles
(km)
Service A exceeded by XXX days
Service A exceeded by X day
The Mercedes-Benz Center will reset the

service indicator following a completed
service.
Operation
Maintenance
Calling up the service indicator
Resetting the service indicator
In the event that the service on your vehicle is not carried out by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center, you can reset the
service indicator yourself.
Switch on ignition.
The standard display of the control system appears ( page 129).
Press button k or j on the multifunction steering wheel until FSS indicator with the service symbol 9 or
and the service deadline appears
The standard display of the control system appears ( page 129).
Press button k or j on the multifunction steering wheel until the FSS

indicator with the service symbol 9
or and the service deadline appears in the multifunction display.
Press reset button to the left in the instrument cluster for about three seconds.
i
If the battery is disconnected, the days
of disconnection will not be included in
the count shown by the service indicator. To arrive at the true service deadline, you will need to subtract these
days from the days shown in the service indicator.
Do not confuse the service indicator
with the engine oil level indicator :.
Switch on ignition.
To confirm, press reset button until you

hear a signal.
The service indicator now displays the
reset interval.
i
If the service indicator was inadvertently reset, have a Mercedes-Benz Center
correct it.
Only reset if the proper service has
been performed. Resetting the system
without performing proper service as
called for by the FSS will cause the FSS
to incorrectly determine the next service interval which will result in engine
damage not covered by the
This message appears in the multifunction display:

Service interval...
To reset:
Press reset button
for 3 seconds
303
Operation
Vehicle care
Vehicle care
Cleaning and care of vehicle
Warning!
Many cleaning products can be hazardous.

Some are poisonous, others are flammable.
Always follow the instructions on the particular container. Always open your vehicles
doors or windows when cleaning the inside.
Never use fluids or solvents that are not designed for cleaning your vehicle.
While in operation, even while parked, your

vehicle is subject to varying external influences which, if gone unchecked, can attack the paintwork as well as the
underbody and cause lasting damage.
Such damage is caused not only by extreme and varying climatic conditions, but
also by:
near the ocean
in industrial areas (smoke, exhaust

emissions)
Tar
during winter operation
Gravel and stone chipping
You should check your vehicle from time to

time for stone chipping or other damage.
Any damage should be repaired as soon as
possible to prevent corrosion.
Air pollution
Road salt
To avoid paint damage, you should immediately remove:
Grease and oil
Fuel
Coolant
Brake fluid
Bird droppings
Insects
Tree resins, etc.
Frequent washing reduces and/or eliminates the aggressiveness and potency of

the above adverse influences.
304
More frequent washings are necessary to

deal with unfavorable conditions:
In doing so, do not neglect the underbody

of the vehicle. A prerequisite for a thorough check is a washing of the underbody
followed by a thorough inspection. Damaged areas need to be re-undercoated.
Your vehicle has been treated at the factory with a wax-base rustproofing in the body
cavities which will last for the lifetime of
the vehicle. Post-production treatment is
neither necessary nor recommended by
Mercedes-Benz because of the possibility
of incompatibility between materials used
in the production process and others applied later.
Operation
Vehicle care
We have selected car-care products and
compiled recommendations which are
specially matched to our vehicles and
which always reflect the latest technology.
You can obtain Mercedes-Benz approved
car-care products at your authorized
Scratches, corrosive deposits, corrosion or
damage due to negligent or incorrect care
cannot always be removed or repaired with
the car-care products recommended here.
In such cases it is best to seek aid at your
The following topics deal with the cleaning
and care of your vehicle and give important
how-to information as well as references
to Mercedes-Benz approved car-care products.
Additional information can be found in the
booklet Vehicle Care Guide.
Power washer
Tar stains
When using a power washer for cleaning

the vehicle, always observe the manufacturers operating instructions.
Quickly remove tar stains before they dry

and become more difficult to remove. A tar
remover is recommended.
i
If a door handle is hit by a strong jet of
water, and a SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* is in close proximity, i.e.
within approx. 3 ft (approx. 1 m), the
vehicle could be inadvertently locked
or unlocked.
!
Never use a round nozzle to
power-wash tires. The intense jet of
water can result in damage to the tire.
Always replace a damaged tire.
Always keep the jet of water moving
across the surface. Do not aim directly
at electrical parts, electrical connectors, seals, or other rubber parts.
Paintwork, painted body components

Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Care
should be applied when water drops on the
paint surface do not bead up, normally
every three to five months, depending on
climate and washing detergent used.
Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Cleaner
should be applied if the paint surface
shows signs of embedded dirt (i.e. loss of
gloss).
Do not apply any of these products or wax
if your vehicle is parked in the sun or if the
hood is still hot.
Use the appropriate MB-Touch-Up Stick
for quick and provisional repairs of minor
paint damage (i.e. chips from stones, vehicle doors, etc.).
305
Operation
Vehicle care
Engine cleaning
Prior to cleaning the engine compartment,
make sure to protect electrical components and connectors from the intrusion of
water and cleaning agents.
Corrosion protection, such as MB Anticorrosion Wax, should be applied to the engine compartment after every engine
cleaning. Before applying, all control linkage bushings and joints should be lubricated. The poly-V-belt and all pulleys should
be protected from any wax.
Vehicle washing
Do not use hot water or wash your vehicle
in direct sunlight. Only use a mild car wash
detergent, such as Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo.
Thoroughly spray the vehicle with a diffused jet of water. Direct only a very weak
spray towards the ventilation intake. Use
plenty of water and rinse the sponge and
chamois frequently.
306
Rinse with clear water and thoroughly dry

with a chamois. Do not allow cleaning
agents to dry on the finish.
Due to the width of the vehicle, fold in outside mirrors prior to running the vehicle
through an automatic car wash to prevent
damage to the mirrors.
In the winter, thoroughly remove all traces
of road salt as soon as possible.
When washing the underbody, do not forget to clean the inner sides of the wheels.
i
If a door handle is hit by a strong jet of
water, and a SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* is in close proximity, i.e.
within approx. 3 ft (approx. 1 m), the
vehicle could be inadvertently locked
or unlocked.
Soft top
Clean soft top with soft top raised and
locked. Lower the soft top into the storage
compartment only if the soft top is completely dry. If the soft top is kept in the
storage compartment for a lengthy period,
raise it and air out with the windows open
about every 4 months.
Light colored soft tops should be cleaned
frequently to prevent spots and dirt from
setting in, which could stain and discolor
the soft top material permanently.
!
Remove bird droppings immediately.
The organic acid damages the material
and causes the soft top to leak
Never use a power washer to clean the
soft top, as you may damage the soft
top material.
Do not use sharp-edged instruments
for the removal of ice and snow.
Operation
Vehicle care
Wash the top only when heavily soiled.
Ornamental moldings
When you run the vehicle through an

automatic car wash, never use
hot-wax.
If only parts of the top have been washed,

wet the entire top and allow it to air-dry before lowering it into the storage compartment.
For regular cleaning and care of very dirty

chrome-plated parts, use a chrome cleaner.
Depending on the operation mode of

the car wash, there is the possibility of
water drops entering the vehicles interior. This is not an indication of a defect
or malfunction in the soft top.
Dry cleaning:
Brush the dry top with a soft-bristled

brush.
Brush top always from front to rear.
Wet cleaning:
Brush the top with a soft-bristled

brush.
Wash with clear water or with a mild
detergent and an ample supply of lukewarm water by wiping with a soft-bristled brush or sponge from front to
rear.Then rinse thoroughly with clear
water.
i
In general, regular spraying or cleaning
with clear water is sufficient to keep
the soft top clean.
For cleaning soft top or wind screen never
use:
gasoline
thinner
tar and stain removers
glass cleaner
similar organic solvents
Headlamps, tail lamps, side markers,

turn signal lenses
Use a mild car wash detergent, such as
Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo,
with plenty of water.
To prevent scratches, never apply strong
force and only use a soft, non-scratchy
cloth when cleaning the lenses. Do not attempt to wipe dirty lenses with a dry cloth
or sponge.
They will cause damage which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
307
Operation
Vehicle care
Cleaning the Distronic* system sensor
cover
Cleaning the Parktronic* system

sensors

cloth when cleaning the sensor. Do not attempt to wipe dirty sensors with a dry cloth
or sponge.
Wiper blades
Fold wiper arm forward until it snapes

into place.
Warning!
1 Distronic* system sensor cover
1 Parktronic* system sensors

Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo, with plenty of water to clean sensor cover 1.

cloth when cleaning the sensor cover. Do
not attempt to wipe dirty sensors with a
dry cloth or sponge.
308

Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo, with plenty of water to clean
sensors 1.
When using a steam cleaner or power

washer, aim nozzle only briefly from a minimum distance of 4 in (10 cm) at
sensors 1.
For safety reasons, switch off wipers and remove SmartKey from starter switch before
cleaning the wiper blades. Otherwise the
wiper motor might suddenly turn on and
cause injury.
Clean the wiper blade inserts with a

clean cloth and detergent solution.
Operation
Vehicle care
!
Fold the windshield wiper arms back
onto the windshield before turning the
Hold onto the wiper when folding the
wiper arm back. If released, the force
of the impact from the tensioning
spring could crack the windshield.
Window cleaning
Fold wiper arm forward until it snapes

into place.
An automotive glass cleaner is recommended.
!
Fold the windshield wiper arms back
onto the windshield before turning the
Hold onto the wiper when folding the
Light alloy wheels
Mercedes-Benz approved Wheel Care

should be used for regular cleaning of the
light alloy wheels.
For safety reasons, switch off wipers and remove SmartKey from starter switch before
cleaning the windshield. Otherwise the wiper motor might suddenly turn on and cause
injury.
If possible, clean wheels once a week with

Mercedes-Benz approved Wheel Care, using a soft bristle brush and a strong spray
of water.
Warning!
Follow instructions on container.
Use a window cleaning solution on all

glass surfaces.
i
Only use acid-free cleaning materials.
Acid may cause corrosion or damage
the clear coat.
Instrument cluster
Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or
mild detergent for delicate fabrics as a
washing solution. Wipe with a cloth moistened in lukewarm solution. Do not use
scouring agents.
Steering wheel and gear selector lever
Wipe with a damp cloth and dry thoroughly
or clean with Mercedes-Benz approved
Leather Care.
Cup holder
Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or
mild detergent for delicate fabrics as a
washing solution. Wipe with a cloth moistened in lukewarm solution. Do not use
scouring agents.
309
Operation
Vehicle care
Hard plastic trim items
Upholstery
Pour Mercedes-Benz approved Interior

Care onto soft lint-free cloth and apply
with light pressure.
Using aftermarket seat covers or wearing

clothing that have the tendency to give off
coloring (e.g. when wet, etc.) may cause
the upholstery to become permanently discolored. By lining the seats with a proper
intermediate cover, contact-discoloration
will be prevented.
Do not use Mercedes-Benz approved

Leather Care or any solvents to clean
nubuck leather upholstery.
Headliner and rear window shelf

Clean with soft bristle brush, or use a
dry-shampoo cleaner in case of excessive
dirt.
Seat belts
The webbing must not be treated with
chemical cleaning agents. Only use clear,
lukewarm water and soap. Do not dry the
webbing at temperatures above 176F
(80C) or in direct sunlight.
Warning!
Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may

severely weaken them. In a crash they may
not be able to provide adequate protection.
310
Leather upholstery
Wipe leather upholstery with a damp cloth
and dry thoroughly or clean with
Mercedes-Benz approved Leather Care.
Exercise particular care when cleaning perforated leather as its underside should not
become wet.
Nubuck leather upholstery
(CLK 55 AMG)
The nubuck leather upholstery is treated
with a protective coating. Wipe nubuck
leather upholstery with damp microfiber
cloth to remove dust and other light stains.
Carefully dab nubuck leather upholstery
with a microfiber cloth to remove oil stains.
Avoid hard scrubbing on nubuck leather upholstery.

Plastic and rubber parts
Do not use oil or wax on these parts.
Wood trims
Dampen cloth using water and use damp
cloth to clean wood trims in your vehicle.
Do not use solvents like tar remover or
wheel cleaner nor polishes or waxes as
these may be abrasive.
Practical hints
What to do if ?
Where will I find...?
Unlocking/locking in an emergency
Opening/closing in an emergency
Replacing bulbs
Replacing wiper blades
Flat tire
Battery
Jump starting
Towing the vehicle
Fuses
311
Practical hints
What to do if ?
What to do if ?
Lamps in instrument cluster
General information:
If a bulb in the instrument cluster fails to
come on during the bulb self-check when
turning the SmartKey in the starter switch

to position 2, have it checked and replaced
if necessary.
Problem
Possible cause
Suggested solution
The yellow ABS malfunction indi- The ABS has detected a malfunction and has
cator lamp comes on while driv- switched off. The BAS and the ESP are also
ing.
switched off (see messages in display).
Continue driving with added caution.

Wheels will lock during hard braking,
reducing steering capability.
The brake system is still functioning normally

but without the ABS available.
Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon

as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident.
The charging voltage has fallen below

10 volts and the ABS has switched off.
When the voltage is above this value

again, the ABS is operational again.
312
Read and observe messages in the

display ( page 320).
If necessary, have the generator (alternator) and battery checked.
Practical hints
What to do if ?
Problem
;
3
(USA only)
Possible cause
Suggested solution
You are driving with the parking brake set.
Release the parking brake

( page 46).
There is insufficient brake fluid in the reservoir.
Risk of accident! Carefully stop the

vehicle and notify an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center. Do not add
brake fluid! This will not solve the
problem.
(Canada only)
The red brake warning lamp
comes on while driving and you
hear a warning sound.
The red brake warning lamp
comes on while driving.
Warning!
Driving with the brake warning lamp illuminated can result in an accident. Have your
brake system checked immediately if the
brake warning lamp stays on. Do not add
brake fluid before checking the brake
system.
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine
parts and the brake fluid catching fire. You
can be seriously burned.
!
thickness and leaks.
313
Practical hints
What to do if ?
Problem
The yellow CHECK ENGINE

malfunction indicator lamp
Possible cause
Suggested solution
There is a malfunction in:
Have the vehicle checked as soon as

possible by an authorized
An on-board diagnostic connector is
used by the service station to link the
vehicle to the shop diagnostics system.
It allows the accurate identification of
system malfunctions through the readout of diagnostic trouble codes. It is located in the front left area of the
footwell next to the parking brake pedal.
The fuel cap is not closed tightly.
Check the fuel cap.
Your gas tank is empty.
After refuelling, start the engine three or

four times in succession.
The fuel management system
The ignition system
The emission control system
Systems which impact emissions
Such malfunctions may result in excessive

emissions values and may switch the engine
to its Limp-Home Mode (emergency operation).
The Limp-Home mode is canceled. You do

not need to have your vehicle checked.
314
Practical hints
What to do if ?
Problem
The red coolant warning lamp

comes on when the engine is
running.
Possible cause
Suggested solution
There is insufficient coolant in the reservoir.
Add coolant to prevent engine from

overheating ( page 292).
If this warning lamp comes on frequently,

there is a leak in the cooling system.
Have the cooling system checked.
If the coolant level is correct, the electric radiator fan may be broken.
If the coolant temperature is below

257F (125C), you can continue
driving to the nearest authorized
Avoid high engine loads (e.g. driving

uphill) and stop-and-go driving.
Stop as soon as possible and allow

the engine and coolant to cool down.
The red coolant warning lamp

The coolant temperature has exceeded
comes on while driving and you 257F (125C).
Warning!
Driving when your engine is badly overheated can cause some fluids which may have
catch fire. You could be seriously burned.
Steam from an overheated engine can cause

serious burns and can occur just by opening
the hood. Stay away from the engine if you
see or hear steam coming from it.

315
Practical hints
What to do if ?
Problem
Possible cause
The red Distronic indicator lamp You are too close to the vehicle in front of you
to maintain selected speed.
The red Distronic indicator lamp

comes on while driving and you
You are gaining too rapidly on the vehicle

ahead of you.
The distance warning system has recognized a stationary obstacle on your probable line of travel.
The yellow ESP warning lamp

The ESP is deactivated.
316
Risk of accident!
Suggested solution
Apply the brakes immediately to increase the following distance.
Apply the brakes immediately.
Carefully observe the traffic situation.

You may need to brake or maneuver
to avoid hitting an obstacle.
Switch the ESP back on ( page 81).
If the ESP cannot be switched back on,

have the system checked at an authoAdapt your speed and driving to the prevailrized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
ing road conditions.
possible.
Practical hints
What to do if ?
Problem
The yellow ESP warning lamp

flashes while driving.
Possible cause
Suggested solution
The ESP or traction control has come into

operation because of detected traction loss
in at least one tire.
When driving off, apply as little throttle as possible.
While driving, ease up on the accelerator.
Adapt your speed and driving to the

prevailing road and weather conditions.
Do not deactivate the ESP.

Exceptions: ( page 80).
Distronic* is deactivated.
Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of accidents.
The yellow fuel tank reserve

warning lamp comes on while
driving.
The yellow roll bar warning lamp The roll bar system is malfunctioning.
comes on or flickers when the
engine is running.
The fuel level has gone below the reserve

mark.
Refuel at the next gas station

( page 284).
Release the roll bars manually.

as possible.
317
Practical hints
What to do if ?
Problem
Possible cause
Suggested solution
<
The red seat belt non-usage

The warning lamp reminds you to fasten seat
warning lamp illuminates briefly belts.
after starting the engine.
Fasten your seat belt.
The red SRS indicator lamp

Drive with added caution to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Warning!
In the event that a malfunction of the SRS is

indicated as outlined above, the SRS may
not be operational. For your safety, we
strongly recommend that you visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to
have the system checked; otherwise the
SRS may not be activated when needed in
an accident, which could result in serious or
fatal injury, or it might deploy unexpectedly
and unnecessarily, which could result in an
accident and/or injury to you or to others.
318
There is a malfunction in the restraint systems. The airbags or emergency tensioning

device (ETD) could deploy unexpectedly or
fail to activate in an accident.
Practical hints
What to do if ?
Lamp in center console
Problem
PASS. AIRBAG OFF
The indicator lamp comes on.
Possible cause
TM1
A BabySmart
child seat is installed on the
front passenger seat. Therefore the passenger front airbag is switched off.
Suggested solution
Have the system checked as soon as

possible by an authorized
Make sure there is nothing between

seat cushion and child seat and check
installation of the child seat.
If the light remains out, have the system checked as soon as possible by
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
The system is malfunctioning when there is

no BabySmartTM child seat installed on the
front passenger seat.
PASS. AIRBAG OFF
The indicator lamp does not
come on with a BabySmartTM
child seat properly installed on
the front passenger seat.
The system is malfunctioning.
Do not use the BabySmartTM restraint

to transport children on the front passenger seat until the system has been
repaired.
1
BabySmart TM is a trademark of Siemens Automotive Corp.
319
Practical hints
What to do if ?
Messages in the display
Warning!
The control system shows warning and
malfunction messages in the multifunction
display.
Certain warning and malfunction messages are accompanied by an audible signal.
Address these messages accordingly and
follow the additional instructions given in
this Operators Manual.
Selecting the malfunction memory menu in
the control system ( page 138) displays
both cleared and uncleared messages.
High-priority messages appear in the multifunction display in red color.
Certain messages of high priority cannot
be cleared from the multifunction display
using the reset button ( page 126).
Other high priority messages and messages of less immediate priority (regular display colors) can be cleared from the
multifunction display using the reset button and are then stored in the malfunction
message memory ( page 138).
320
All categories of messages contain important information which should be taken note
of and, where a malfunction is indicated, addressed as soon as possible at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Failure to repair the condition noted may
cause damage not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty, or result
in property damage or personal injury.
Warning!
No messages will be displayed if either the

instrument cluster or the multifunction display is inoperative.
Contact your nearest authorized
i
Turning the SmartKey in starter switch
to position 2, or pressing the
KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button twice
to position 2 causes all lamps as well
as the multifunction display to come
on. Ensure that they are all in working
order before starting your journey.
On the pages that follow, you will find a
compilation of the most important warning
and malfunction messages that may appear in the display. High priority messages
appear on a red background.
Practical hints
What to do if ?
Text messages
Display
Display message
Possible cause
Possible solution
ABS
Anti-lock
braking system
not working!

10 volts and the ABS has switched off.

again, the ABS is operational again.
The brake system is still functioning normally but without the ABS available.


as possible.

Defective!
Visit workshop!
The ABS has detected a malfunction and

has switched off. The ESP and the BAS are
also deactivated.

The brake system is still functioning normally but without the ABS available.

as possible.
321
Practical hints
What to do if ?
Display
Display message
Possible cause
Possible solution
ABS
Display defective!
Visit workshop!
The ABS or the ABS display is malfunctioning.


as possible.
BAS
Defective!
Visit workshop
The BAS has detected a malfunction and

switched off.

as possible.

Display defective
Visit workshop
BAS or the BAS display is malfunctioning.

as possible.
322
Practical hints
What to do if ?
Display
Display message
Possible cause
Possible solution
BAS
not available
See operators manual

10 volts and the BAS has switched off.

again, the BAS is operational again.
The brake system is still functioning normally but without the BAS available.

as possible.
Cruise Control
Visit workshop!
Cruise control or Distronic* is malfunctioning.
Have cruise control or Distronic*

checked by an authorized
Distronic
External interference
Reactivate!
Distronic* is switched off and is temporarily unavailable.
Try activating Distronic* again later.
see oper. manual
Distronic* is switched off because the

Distronic* cover in the radiator grille is
dirty.
Clean the Distronic* cover in the radiator grille ( page 308).
Restart the vehicle.
Distronic* is malfunctioning or the display

is malfunctioning.
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz

Center as soon as possible.
Visit workshop!
323
Practical hints
What to do if ?
Display
Display message
Possible cause
Possible solution
ESP
Defective!
Visit workshop!
The ESP was deactivated because of a

malfunction or interrupted power supply.
The ABS might not be operational.


Display defective
Visit workshop!
The ESP or the ESP display is malfunctioning.


not available!
See operators manual

10 volts and the ESP has switched off.

again, the ESP is operational again.
If necessary, have the generator and

battery checked.
The self-diagnosis has not been complet- The display will clear after driving a short
ed.
distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h).
324
Practical hints
What to do if ?
Display
Display message
Possible cause
Possible solution
Selector lever
in park position
You have turned off the engine with the

KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button in gear
selector lever position N and opened the
drivers door.

position P.

position P or N.
or
You have attempted to switch off the engine with the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
button while the gear selector lever was in
position R or D.
Please move
selector lever to P
or N
You have attempted to start the engine

with the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button
while the gear selector lever was in
position R or D.
325
Practical hints
What to do if ?
Symbol messages
Display symbol
Display message
Possible cause
Possible solution
Undervoltage
Charge battery
The battery has insufficient voltage.
Start the engine ( page 43).
Undervoltage
Switch off
consumers
The battery has insufficient voltage.
Turn off unnecessary electrical consumers.
VISIT WORKSHOP!
The battery was charged with a battery

charger or jump started.
Have the battery checked at a service

station.
The battery is no longer charging.

Possible causes:
Stop immediately and check the

poly-V-belt.
alternator malfunctioning
If it is broken:
broken poly-V-belt
Do not continue to drive. Otherwise

the engine will overheat due to an inoperative water pump which may result in damage to the engine. Notify an
If it is intact:
326
Drive immediately to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Adjust driving to be consistent with
reduced braking responsiveness.
Practical hints
What to do if ?
Display symbol
2
;
!
;
3
(USA only)
(Canada only)
(USA only)
(Canada only)
Warning!
Display message
Possible cause
Possible solution
Brake wear
Visit workshop!
The brake pads have reached their wear

limit.
Have the brake pads replaced as soon

as possible.
Parking brake
Release brake!
You are driving with the parking brake set.
Release the parking brake

( page 46).
Brake fluid
Visit workshop!
There is insufficient brake fluid in the reservoir.
Risk of accident! Stop the vehicle and

notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center. Do not add brake fluid! This
will not solve the problem.
Driving with this message displayed can result in an accident. Have your brake system
checked immediately. Dont add brake fluid
before checking the brake system. Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and
the brake fluid catching fire. You can be seriously burned.

thickness and leaks.
Brake pad thickness must be visually

checked by a qualified technician at the
intervals specified in the Service Booklet.
327
Practical hints
What to do if ?
Display symbol
Display message
Possible cause
Possible solution
Visit workshop!
There may be a malfunction in the
Have the measuring system checked

Add coolant ( page 292).
If you have to add coolant frequently,

have the cooling system checked by
Warning!
fuel injection system
ignition system
exhaust system
fuel system
The coolant level is too low.
Coolant
Check level
Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts.

Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which
may burn if it comes into contact with hot
engine parts. You can be seriously burned.
!
Do not ignore the low engine coolant
level warning. Extended driving with
the message and symbol displayed
may cause serious engine damage not
Warranty.
Do not drive without sufficient amount
of coolant in the cooling system. The
engine will overheat, causing major engine damage.
328
Practical hints
What to do if ?
Display symbol
Warning!
Display message
Possible cause
Possible solution
Coolant
Stop, engine off!
The coolant is too hot.
Stop the vehicle and turn off the engine.
Only start the engine again after the

message disappears. You could otherwise damage the engine.
Driving when your engine is badly overheated can cause some fluids which may have
catch fire. You could be seriously burned.
Steam from an overheated engine can cause
serious burns and can occur just by opening
the hood. Stay away from the engine if you
see or hear steam coming from it.

During severe operating conditions and

stop-and-go city traffic, the coolant temperature may rise close to 248F (120C).
!
the coolant temperature above 248F
(120C). Doing so may cause serious
engine damage which is not covered by
329
Practical hints
What to do if ?
Display symbol
Display message
Possible cause
Possible solution
Coolant
Stop, engine off!
The poly-V-belt could be broken.
Stop immediately and check the

poly-V-belt.
If it is broken:
Do not continue to drive. Otherwise

the engine will overheat due to an inoperative water pump which may result in damage to the engine. Notify an
If it is intact:
Coolant
Visit workshop
330
The cooling fan for the coolant is malfunctioning.
Do not continue to drive the vehicle

with this message displayed. Doing so
could result in serious engine damage
that is not covered by the
Observe the coolant temperature display.
Have the fan replaced as soon as possible.
Practical hints
What to do if ?
Display symbol
Display message
Possible cause
Possible solution
Display defective
Visit workshop!
The instrument cluster display is malfunctioning.

The displays for several systems have

malfunctioned. Some systems themselves may also have malfunctioned.
Have the electronic systems checked

Certain electronic systems are unable to

relay information to the control system.
The following systems may have failed:
Have the electronic systems checked

Close the doors.
Display defective
Visit workshop!
Doors open!
Coolant temperature display
Tachometer
Cruise control display
You are attempting to drive with one or

more doors open.
331
Practical hints
What to do if ?
Display symbol
Display message
Possible cause
Possible solution
USA only:
The engine oil level is too low.
Add engine oil ( page 291) and check

the engine oil level ( page 289).
Engine oil level

Reduce oil level!
You have added too much engine oil.

There is a risk of damaging the engine or
the catalytic converter.
Have oil siphoned or drained off. Observe all legal requirements with respect to its disposal.
Engine oil level

Stop, engine off!
There is no oil in the engine. There is a

danger of engine damage.
Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt as

soon as possible.
Add engine oil ( page 291) and check

the engine oil level ( page 289).
Add 1 qt. engine oil

when next refueling
Canada only:
Add 1 liter engine oil
when next refueling
332
Practical hints
What to do if ?
Display symbol
Display message
Possible cause
Possible solution
Engine oil
Visit workshop!
It may be that there is water in the engine

oil.
Have the engine oil checked.
Engine oil level

Visit workshop!
The engine oil has dropped to a critical

level.
Check the engine oil level

( page 289) and add oil as required
( page 291).
If you must add engine oil frequently,

have the engine checked for possible
leaks.
Have the measuring system checked

by an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
The measuring system is malfunctioning.
When the message Add 1 qt. engine oil

when next refueling (Canada: 1 liter)
appears while the engine is running and at
operating temperature, the engine oil level
has dropped to approximately the
minimum level.
When this occurs, the warning will first

come on intermittently and then stay on if
the oil level drops further.
Visually check for oil leaks. If no obvious oil
leaks are noted, drive to the nearest service station where the engine oil should be
topped to the required level with an approved oil.
!
The engine oil level warnings should
not be ignored. Extended driving with
the symbol displayed could result in
serious engine damage that is not
Warranty.
333
Practical hints
What to do if ?
Display symbol
Display message
Possible cause
Possible solution
Reserve fuel
The fuel level has dropped below the reserve mark.
Refuel at the next gas station

( page 284).
Y
I
Hood open!
You are driving with the hood open.
Close the hood ( page 288).
Remove key
You have forgotten to remove the

SmartKey.
Remove the SmartKey from the starter switch.
Replace key!
No additional code available for SmartKey

or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*

Key
Check battery!
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* batteries are discharged.
Change the batteries ( page 350).
Key
not recognized!
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* is not

recognized while the engine is running because
Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to

do so.
Search for the SmartKey.
the SmartKey is not in the vehicle
Otherwise the vehicle cannot be centrally

there is strong radio-frequency inter- locked nor can the engine be started
again after the engine has been stopped.
ference
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* is momentarily not recognized.
Keyless Go
Check system
334
The KEYLESS-GO* system is malfunctioning.
Change the position of the SmartKey

in the vehicle.
Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey

in the starter switch if necessary.

Practical hints
What to do if ?
Display symbol
Display message
Possible cause
Possible solution
Key recognized
in vehicle
A SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* left in the

vehicle was recognized while locking the
vehicle from the outside.
Take the SmartKey out of the vehicle.
Key
do not forget key
This display appears (for a maximum of

60 seconds) if the drivers door is opened
with the engine shut off and no SmartKey
in the starter switch.
Message is only a reminder.
Insert SmartKey in the starter switch.
Take the SmartKey with

KEYLESS-GO* with you when leaving
the vehicle.
3rd stop lamp
The high mounted brake lamp is malfunctioning.

Back- up lamp, left
The left backup lamp is malfunctioning.
Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
Back- up lamp, right
The right backup lamp is malfunctioning.
Display defective
Visit workshop!
The display for the lamps or the system is

malfunctioning.

Front foglamp, left
The left front fog lamp is malfunctioning.
Front foglamp, right
The right front fog lamp is malfunctioning.
High beam, left
The left high beam lamp is malfunctioning.
High beam, right
The right high beam lamp is malfunctioning.
335
Practical hints
What to do if ?
Display symbol
336
Display message
Possible cause
Possible solution
Lamp sensor
Visit workshop!
The lamp sensor is malfunctioning. The

headlamps switch on automatically.
In the control system, set lamp operation to manual ( page 145).
Switch on headlamps using the exterior lamp switch.

License plate lamp,

left
The left license plate lamp is malfunctioning.
License plate lamp,

right
The right license plate lamp is malfunctioning.
Low beam, left
The left low beam lamp is malfunctioning.

Low beam, right
The right low beam lamp is malfunctioning.

Parking lamp,
front left
Substitute lamp on
The left parking lamps are malfunctioning.

A backup bulb is being used.

Parking lamp,
front right
Substitute lamp on
The right parking lamps are malfunctioning. A backup bulb is being used.

Practical hints
What to do if ?
Display symbol
Display message
Possible cause
Possible solution
Rear foglamp
Substitute lamp on!
The foglamp is malfunctioning. A backup

bulb is being used.

Side marker lamp,

front left
The front left side marker lamp is malfunctioning.
Side marker lamp

front right
The front right side marker lamp is malfunctioning.
Stop lamp, left
The left brake lamp is malfunctioning.

Stop lamp, right
The right brake lamp is malfunctioning.

Stop lamp
Visit workshop!
Stop lamp illumination is delayed or lamp

is permanently on.

Tail lamp, left

Substitute lamp on!
The left tail lamp is malfunctioning. A

backup bulb is being used.

Tail lamp, right

Substitute lamp on!
The right tail lamp is malfunctioning. A

backup bulb is being used.

Turn off lamps!
Lamps have been turned on although the

SmartKey in the starter switch is in position 0.
Turn off the headlamps.
Turn signal, front left The left front turn signal lamp is malfunc- Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
Substitute lamp on!
tioning. A backup bulb is being used.
337
Practical hints
What to do if ?
Display symbol
Display message
Turn signal, front right The right front turn signal lamp is malfunc- Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
Substitute lamp on!
tioning. A backup bulb is being used.
338
Possible cause
Possible solution
Turn signal in
left mirror
The left turn signal in the side mirror is

malfunctioning. This message will only appear if all light emitting diodes have
stopped working.
Have the LEDs replaced as soon as

possible.
Turn signal in
right mirror
The right turn signal in the side mirror is

malfunctioning. This message will only appear if all light emitting diodes have
stopped working.
Have the LEDs replaced as soon as

possible.
Turn signal, rear left

Substitute lamp on!
The left rear turn signal lamp is malfunctioning. A backup bulb is being used.
Turn signal rear right

Substitute lamp on!
The right rear turn signal lamp is malfunctioning. A backup bulb is being used.
Please engage
roll-over bar
The roll bar is malfunctioning.

as possible.
Please release
roll-over bar
The roll bar is malfunctioning.
Operate the roll bars manually

( page 353).

as possible.
Practical hints
What to do if ?
Display symbol
<
Warning!
Display message
Possible cause
Possible solution
Seat belt system

Visit workshop!
The seat belt system is malfunctioning.

Front passenger
seat belt
Please fasten belt!
The display reminds you and your passengers to fasten seat belts.
Fasten the seat belts.
Drivers seat belt

Fasten seat belt!
The display reminds you and your passengers to fasten seat belts.
Fasten the seat belts.
Restraint system
defective
Visit workshop!
The system is malfunctioning.
Drive with added caution to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
In the event a malfunction of the SRS is indicated as outlined above, the SRS may not be
operational. For your safety, we strongly
recommend that you visit an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have
the system checked; otherwise the
SRS may not be activated when needed in

an accident, which could result in serious or
fatal injury, or it might deploy unexpectedly
and unnecessarily which could also result in
injury.
339
Practical hints
What to do if ?
Display symbol
Display message
Possible cause
Possible solution
Lock top
The soft top is not properly locked.
Lock the soft top again ( page 220).
Top being opened
The soft top is not completely open or

closed. The hydraulics are losing pressure.
Open or close the soft top all the way.
Top Visit workshop
The soft top is malfunctioning.

as possible.
Start engine to
operate top
The on-board voltage is too low.
Start the engine.
Top locked
as vehicle is moving
You have attempted to open or close the

soft top while driving.
Pull over to the side of the road and repeat soft top operation while the vehicle is stationary.
340
Practical hints
What to do if ?
Display symbol
Display message
Possible cause
Possible solution
defective
Visit workshop!
One or more main functions of the Tele

Aid system are malfunctioning.
Have the Tele Aid system checked by

Tele Aid battery

Visit workshop!
The emergency power battery for the Tele

Aid system is malfunctioning. If the vehicle battery is also dead, Tele Aid will not
be operational.
Have the Tele Aid system checked by

Steering oil
Visit workshop!
The steering gear oil level is too low.

There is a danger of steering gear damage.
Have the system checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Warning!
If the level of steering gear oil in reservoir is

too low, the steering power assistance could
fail. Much greater effort will then be needed
to turn the steering wheel.
Do not add steering oil without checking the
steering system.
Do not drive the vehicle. Have the system
checked at your authorized Mercedes-Benz
341
Practical hints
What to do if ?
Display symbol
342
Display message
Possible cause
Function
Not available
This display appears if button or

on the multifunction steering wheel
is pressed and the vehicle is not equipped
with a telephone.
Trunk open!
This message will appear whenever the

trunk lid is open.
Close the trunk lid.
Close trunk lid
This message will appear when the soft

top is operated with the trunk lid open.
Close the trunk lid.
Please close
trunk partition
This message will appear when the soft

top is operated with the luggage cover or
ski sack open.
Fold down and latch luggage cover

( page 216).
Close the ski sack roller blind

( page 217).
The fluid level has dropped to about 1/3 of

total reservoir capacity.
Add washer fluid ( page 295).
Washer fluid
Check level
Possible solution
Practical hints
First aid kit
Vehicle tool kit
The first aid kit is stored in right hand side

of the trunk underneath the trunk floor in
an separate storage space.
The vehicle tool kit is stored in the compartment underneath the trunk floor.
Lift cover 1.
Remove first aid kit 2.
The following is included:
Towing eye bolt
Vehicle jack
Wheel wrench
Alignment bolt
Wheel bolts
Fuse extractor
Straps for soft top emergency operation
i
Hex wrench:
You will find the hex wrench for
manually operating the roll bars
( page 353) or the soft top
( page 355) in the Mercedes-Benz
vehicle literature pouch.
i
Check expiration dates and contents
for completeness at least once a year
and replace missing/expired items.
343
Practical hints
Removing the vehicle tool kit
i
Arrow 3 on vehicle tool kit storage
well casing 5 must point in the direction of travel. Otherwise you cannot
place the storage well casing on top
and secure the Minispare wheel with
retaining screw 1 ( page 344).
1 Retaining screw
2 Storage well casing
Lift trunk floor cover and engage trunk

floor handle in upper edge of trunk.
!
To prevent damage, always disengage
trunk floor handle from upper edge of
trunk and lower trunk floor before closing the trunk lid.
Loosen retaining screw 1 in the middle of storage well casing 2.
Remove storage well casing 2.
344
3 Arrow
4 Minispare wheel
5 Vehicle tool kit storage well casing
6 Vehicle tool kit
Wheel wrench
Vehicle jack
Wheel bolts for Minispare wheel
Remove vehicle tool kit storage well

casing 5.
Practical hints
Vehicle jack
Warning!
The jack is designed exclusively for jacking

up the vehicle at the jack take-up brackets
built into both sides of the vehicle. To help
avoid personal injury, use the jack only to lift
the vehicle during a wheel change. Never
get beneath the vehicle while it is supported
by the jack. Keep hands and feet away from
the area under the lifted vehicle. Always
firmly set parking brake and block wheels
before raising vehicle with jack.
Do not disengage parking brake while the
vehicle is raised. Be certain that the jack is
always vertical (plumb line) when in use, especially on hills. Always try to use the jack
on a level surface. Make sure the jack arm is
fully seated in the jack take-up bracket. Always lower the vehicle onto sufficient capacity jackstands before working under the
vehicle.
The vehicle jack is stored in the space underneath the trunk floor together with the
vehicle tool kit in the vehicle tool kit storage well casing.
Remove the vehicle jack from its compartment.

Push the crank handle up.
Turn the crank handle clockwise until it

engages (operational position).
Before storing the vehicle jack in its compartment:
It should be fully collapsed
The handle must be folded in (storage

position)
345
Practical hints
Minispare wheel
The Minispare wheel is located in the compartment underneath the trunk floor.
1 Vehicle tool kit

Wheel wrench
Jack
Wheel bolts for Minispare wheel
2 Arrow
3 Minispare wheel
4 Vehicle tool kit storage well casing
346
Removing the Minispare wheel
Storing the Minispare wheel
Lift trunk floor cover and engage trunk

floor handle in upper edge of trunk.
Place Minispare wheel 3 in wheel

well.
Loosen the retaining screw

( page 344) in the middle of storage
well casing.
Remove the storage well casing

( page 344).
Place vehicle tool kit storage well

casing 4 over the Minispare wheel.
Make sure the arrow 2 on storage
well casing 4 points in the direction of
travel.
Remove vehicle tool kit storage well

casing 4.
Remove Minispare wheel 3.
Place storage well casing

( page 344) over the vehicle tool kit
storage well casing 4 and turn the retaining screw ( page 344) clockwise
as far as it will go to secure the
Minispare wheel.
i
The arrow 2 on vehicle tool kit storage well casing 4 must point in the direction of travel, otherwise you cannot
place the storage well casing
( page 344) on top and secure the
Minispare wheel with the retaining
screw ( page 344).
Practical hints
!
To prevent damage, always disengage
trunk floor handle from upper edge of
trunk and lower trunk floor before closing the trunk lid.
Warning!
The dimensions of the Minispare wheel are

different from those of the road wheels. As
a result, the vehicle handling characteristics
change when driving with a Minispare wheel
mounted.
Drive to the nearest tire repair facility

to have the flat tire repaired or replaced as appropriate.
Do not operate vehicle with more than
one Minispare wheel mounted.

Technical data section ( page 403).
Minispare wheel bolts
!
Wheel bolts 2 must be used when
mounting the Minispare wheel. The use
of any wheel bolts other than wheel
bolts 2 for the Minispare will physically damage the vehicle's brakes.
Warning!
Make sure to use the original length wheel

bolts when remounting the original wheel after it has been repaired.
The Minispare wheel should only be used

temporarily, and should be replaced with a
regular road wheel as quickly as possible.
In the case of a flat tire, you may temporarily use the Minispare wheel when observing the following restrictions:
Do not exceed a vehicle speed of

50 mph (80 km/h).
1 Wheel bolt for light alloy rims

2 Wheel bolt for Minispare wheel or other
steel rims (located in trunk with spare
wheel)
347
Practical hints
Unlocking the vehicle
Unlocking the drivers door
If you are unable to unlock the vehicle with

the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO*, open the
drivers door and the trunk using the mechanical key.
i
Unlocking your vehicle with the mechanical key will trigger the anti-theft
alarm system. To cancel the alarm, do
one of the following:

SmartKey.

switch.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*
Pull the outside door handle.
Press the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop

button ( page 33).
348

2 Mechanical key
Move locking tab 1 in direction of arrow and slide the mechanical key 2
out of the housing.
1 Unlocking
2 Locking
Unlock the door with the mechanical

key. To do so, push the mechanical key
in the lock until it stops and turn it to
the left.
Practical hints
Unlocking the trunk

Insert the mechanical key into the

trunk lid lock.
Turn the mechanical key counterclockwise to position 1 and hold it in this

position.
Pull the trunk lid handle 2 and lift the

trunk lid.
The lock is located next to the recessed

handle.
The trunk opens.
Locking the vehicle

If you are unable to lock the vehicle with
the SmartKey, lock it with the mechanical
key as follows:
Close the passenger door and the trunk

lid.
Press the central locking switch in the

cockpit ( page 108).
Check to see whether the locking knob

on the passenger door down. If necessary push it down manually.
Lock the drivers door with the mechanical key.
Lock the trunk lid if necessary with the

mechanical key ( page 106).
Always make sure there is sufficient

overhead clearance.
1 Unlocking in an emergency
2 Handle
349
Practical hints
Changing batteries in the SmartKey/
If the batteries in the SmartKey or the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* are discharged, the vehicle can no longer be
locked or unlocked. It is recommended to
have the batteries replaced at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Warning!
SmartKey
i
When changing batteries, always replace both batteries.
The required replacement batteries are
Center.
Keep the batteries out of reach of children.

If a battery is swallowed, seek medical help
immediately.

Recycling of batteries is the preferred
for recycling.
350
1 Mechanical key
2 Battery compartment
Replacement batteries: Lithium, type
CR 2025 or equivalent.
Remove mechanical key 1

( page 348).
Insert the mechanical key in side opening and push gray slide.
The battery compartment is unlatched.
Pull the battery compartment out of the

SmartKey housing in direction of arrow.
Remove the batteries.
Practical hints
Remove mechanical key ( page 348).
Insert the mechanical key in side opening and push grey slide.
When changing batteries, always replace both batteries.

The required replacement batteries are
Center.
The battery compartment is unlatched.
Pull the battery compartment out of the

SmartKey housing in direction of arrow.
Using mechanical key 3, apply pressure to position 2.
3 Battery
4 Contact spring
Using a lint-free cloth, insert new batteries under the contact spring with the
plus (+) side facing up.
Return battery compartment into housing until it locks into place.
Battery 1 tilts up slightly.
Pull batteries 1 out in direction of arrow.
Using a lint-free cloth, insert new batteries with the plus (+) side facing up.
Return battery compartment into housing until it locks into place.
1 Battery
2 Tilt battery up
3 Mechanical key
Replacement batteries: Lithium, type
CR 2025 or equivalent.
351
Practical hints
Fuel filler flap
In case the central locking system does
not release the fuel filler flap, you can open
it manually.
Manually unlocking the gear selector

lever
In case of power failure, the gear selector
lever can be manually unlocked, e.g. to tow
the vehicle.
Insert a tool 3 (e.g. screwdriver) into

the opening.
Perform the following two steps simultaneously:
Open trunk lid.

Remove right side trim panel in the
trunk.
Reach inside through opening 2 in direction of arrow.
Turn release knob 1 clockwise (arrow).
The fuel filler flap can be opened.
352
Open the storage compartment under

the center armrest ( page 251).
Take out cover 1.
Insert a pin into the opening of

division 2 and pry the division out.
Push pin 3 forward in the direction

of the arrow.
Move selector lever from

position P.
Reinstall the division and cover after removing the tool from the opening.
i
The gear selector lever is locked again
when moving it to position P.
Practical hints
Operating roll bars manually
Releasing roll bars manually
The soft top cannot be operated after

the roll bars have been manually released.
If the roll bar system is malfunctioning, you

can release the roll bars manually.
Warning!
Close the soft top ( page 219)
If the yellow roll bar warning lamp \ in

the clock does not go out after starting the
engine, or if it comes on while driving, then
the roll bar system is not operating properly
and may not activate in an accident. In this
case, raise the roll bars manually before
continuing to drive.
For safety reasons drive only with the roll
bars raised until the malfunction is repaired.
Have your vehicle checked at an authorized
Open the trunk ( page 98)
Fold back the luggage cover

( page 216).
Open ski sack roller blind

( page 217).
Take hex wrench out of the

Mercedes-Benz vehicle literature
pouch.
1 Perforation
Push hex wrench through

perforation 1 in trim of rear wall in
trunk.
Warning!
Make sure no one is located in the roll bars

path of motion while the next steps are being carried out.
When the roll bar is manually released, the
rear head restraints and the roll bar underneath shoot up almost instantaneously.
353
Practical hints
Lowering roll bars manually

You can lower the roll bars manually after
they have been released.
i
The rear head restraints cannot be lowered and the soft top cannot be opened
or closed when the roll bars have been
released.
2 Hex wrench
Insert long side of hex wrench 2 into

opening.
Using hex wrench 2, press release

catch down in direction of arrow.
The roll bar extends with a loud sound.
Repeat this step for the second roll bar.
Have the systems checked at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as

possible.
354
Warning!
Never lower the roll bars manually unless

the soft top is open. Otherwise, the roll bars
function could be impaired, no longer reducing your risk of injury in an optimal manner.
Contact your authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center to have the roll bar lowered when the
soft top is closed.
1 Orientation seam
2 Hex wrench
3 Press wrench down
4 Press head restraint down

pouch.
Align hex wrench so that its long side is

parallel to orientation seam 1 and insert hex wrench 2 into gap on left side
of respective head restraint.
Press hex wrench down firmly in direction of arrow 3 and hold.
Practical hints
Press head restraint down in direction

of arrow 4.
Pull hex wrench 2 out and take weight

off head restraint.
Repeat this procedure on roll bar for

second head restraint.
Soft top emergency operation
!
Manually closing the soft top is a complicated and technically demanding
procedure. Close the soft top manually
in emergency cases only. Otherwise,
visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center. Please read the instructions
fully before beginning operation and
only undertake it with another person
and if you feel fully capable of performing the tasks involved.
If the soft top cannot be automatically

closed, check the following:
Is the luggage cover engaged in place

( page 216)?
Is the ski sack roller blind closed

( page 217)?
Have the roll bars been released?
Is the trunk lid closed?
Is there sufficient on-board voltage?

Start the engine if necessary.
These messages will also appear in the

multifunction display ( page 342).
If automatic operation still does not function properly, you can close the soft top
manually.
Warning!
It is important that a second person

helps you. Otherwise, you could become
trapped or injured.
Remove any wristwatches or jewelry

such as rings or bracelets. Otherwise,
they could get caught in the vehicle
mechanism, causing personal injury to
yourself or damage to the vehicle.
Always use the grips provided and indicated. Otherwise you could injure yourself.
This procedure should be performed with

great care by two persons.
355
Practical hints
Your vehicle may be equipped with an additional locking mechanism for soft top
emergency operation.
Before continuing, check whether your vehicle is equipped with the additional locking mechanism:
Open the trunk.
Open the left side trim panel in the

trunk.
Vehicles without additional locking

mechanism
Vehicles with additional locking

mechanism
1 Screw of hydraulic pump
1 Locking mechanism
356
Follow the instructions on

( page 357).
Follow the instructions on

( page 364).
Practical hints
Vehicles without additional locking
mechanism
For safety reasons, remove SmartKey

from starter switch.
Engage parking brake
Open the trunk.
Lower the side windows.
Lift the trunk floor cover.
Lower rear head restraints

( page 111).
Take the two straps for soft top emergency operation out of vehicle tool kit
( page 343)

pouch.
i
If the rear head restraints cannot be
lowered, the roll bars may have been
released. For more information, see
( page 353).

trunk.
1 Hex wrench
Insert hex wrench 1 into screw 2.
Turn hydraulic pump screw 2 counterclockwise one revolution with hex

wrench 1.
!
Do not operate the soft top switch with
screw 2 in the opened position, otherwise the hydraulic pump could be dam
aged.
357
Practical hints
3 Lever
4 Soft top storage compartment hinge
The soft top storage compartment hinges
are located on the left and right of the
space between the soft top compartment
cover and the trunk seal.
Pull the two levers 3 apart and fold

levers 3 of soft top storage compartment hinge 4 forward on both sides
over the detent position.
358
5 Strap
Pull strap 5, supplied in vehicle tool

kit, behind soft top storage compartment through hinge 4.
Bring strap together in front of hinge.
Pull the side with the handle through

the loop on the opposite side.
Pull strap between soft top storage

compartment hinge and soft top compartment.
Secure second strap to second hinge in

the same manner.
!
Do not pull the straps when the trunk is
open.
Practical hints
i
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: To prevent a possible inadvertent lockout, the
trunk lid will open automatically if a
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* is recognized in the area of the rear shelf or inside the trunk.
Place both straps on soft top compartment cover.
Take hex wrench out of trunk.
Close trunk lid.

You will only have access to the trunk
again when the emergency operation
has been completed.
You and your assistant should each

take one of the straps by the handle.
With a strong, simultaneous tug on the

loops, pull soft top compartment cover
upward and out to the rear.
!
The trunk lid must remain closed during
the next steps in the procedure. Otherwise the trunk lid and the soft top compartment cover may come into contact
with one another and be damaged.
Warning!
At this point, the remaining procedure

needs to be done by two people. Otherwise
you could be injured.
359
Practical hints
Warning!
In the next step, you and your assistant

should each take hold of the soft top compartment cover as shown in the illustration.
Both of you should use your free hand to
support yourselves on the edge of the trunk
lid as shown in the illustration.
6 Soft top compartment cover
One person should stand on the left

side of the vehicle and the other on the
right side.
If either you or your helper assume a different position, one or both of you could be
trapped or injured.
Pulling the cover back in one smooth

motion, lift soft top compartment
cover 6 into a vertical position until it
stops.
!
Make sure the soft top storage compartment hinges do not fold down during this procedure. Otherwise your
vehicle could be damaged.
360
7 Edge of soft top
From left and right sides, reach into

soft top compartment underneath
edge of soft top 7.
Warning!
Do not place your hands near the upper

windshield area, trunk lid, or between soft
top roof panels and hinges while the soft top
is being raised and locked. Serious personal
injury may occur.
Practical hints
Turn the soft top locking mechanism

screw with hex wrench counterclockwise in direction of arrow a as far as it
will go.
The clasp will close and the soft top is
now locked onto the windshield frame.
!
8 Windshield frame
Lift soft top out of soft top compartment and pull it forward to windshield
frame 8.
9 Opening
a Locking
Take off protective cap on the inner

side of the soft top.
Insert hex wrench into soft top locking

mechanism screw.

screw with hex wrench clockwise in direction of arrow 9 as far as it will go.
Make sure you turn the hex wrench

counterclockwise as far as it will go.
Otherwise the soft top may not lock
properly.
The clasp will open and the soft top will

engage audibly.
361
Practical hints
b Material tensioning frame

c Soft top compartment cover
Lift material tensioning frame b into a

vertical position.
Lower soft top compartment cover c.
!
Make sure the soft top compartment
cover c does not collide or make contact with the material tensioning
frame b.
362
d Soft top base
With the palm of your hand, press the

window in material tensioning
frame b until it is positioned on soft
top compartment cover c.
You and your assistant should press

soft top compartment cover c forward and down with the palms of your
hands until it snaps into place in the
guide. Place your hands on the areas
indicated by the arrows.
At the same time, gently press material
tensioning frame b down with the
palms of your hands.
Practical hints
Warning!

properly.
Position hands as indicated by arrows so

that when you press soft top compartment
cover c forward and lower material tensioning frame b, your hands cannot become trapped.
Have the soft top operation checked at

as soon as possible.
e Locking

mechanism screw.

screw with hex wrench counterclockwise in direction of arrow e as far as it
will go.
If, after completing the soft top emergency operation, the trunk cannot be
opened using the remote trunk lid release switch in the drivers door,
the button on the SmartKey, or
the trunk lid release handle in the license plate recess, press the soft top
compartment cover down again as described above.
The soft top is locked onto the windshield frame.
Do not open the trunk with the emergency key, as this could otherwise
damage the trunk lid and the soft top
compartment cover.
363
Practical hints
Vehicles with additional locking
mechanism
For safety reasons, remove SmartKey

from starter switch.
Engage parking brake
Open the trunk.
Lower the side windows.
Lift the trunk floor cover.
Lower rear head restraints

( page 111).
Take the two straps for soft top emergency operation out of vehicle tool kit
( page 343)

pouch.
i
If the rear head restraints cannot be
lowered, the roll bars may have been
released. For more information, see
( page 353).

trunk.
1 Hex wrench
Insert hex wrench 1 into screw 2.
Turn hydraulic pump screw 2 counterclockwise one revolution with hex

wrench 1.
!
Do not operate the soft top switch with
screw 2 in the opened position, otherwise the hydraulic pump could be damaged.
364
Practical hints
3 Locking mechanism
4 Trim
5 Locking mechanism
Pull locking mechanism 3 out until it

stops and rotate it approx. one-quarter
of a turn.
Fold the right-hand side of the trunk

floor away.
Detach trim 4 along the perforation.
Pull locking mechanism 5 out until it

stops and rotate it approx. one-quarter
of a turn.
Make sure the locking mechanism

does not retract again. If this happens,
pull the locking mechanism out again
and rotate it approx. one-quarter of a
turn.
Make sure the locking mechanism

does not retract again. If this happens,
pull the locking mechanism out again
and rotate it approx. one-quarter of a
turn.
365
Practical hints
6 Lever
7 Soft top storage compartment hinge
The soft top storage compartment hinges
are located on the left and right of the
space between the soft top compartment
cover and the trunk seal.
Pull the two levers 6 apart and fold

levers 6 of soft top storage compartment hinge 7 forward on both sides
over the detent position.
366
8 Strap
Pull strap 8, supplied in vehicle tool

kit, behind soft top storage compartment through hinge 7.
Bring strap together in front of hinge.
Pull the side with the handle through

the loop on the opposite side.
Pull strap between soft top storage

compartment hinge and soft top compartment.
Secure second strap to second hinge in

the same manner.
!
Do not pull the straps when the trunk is
open.
Practical hints
i
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: To prevent a possible inadvertent lockout, the
trunk lid will open automatically if a
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* is recognized in the area of the rear shelf or inside the trunk.
Place both straps on soft top compartment cover.
Take hex wrench out of trunk.
Close trunk lid.

You will only have access to the trunk
again when the emergency operation
has been completed.
You and your assistant should each

take one of the straps by the handle.
With a strong, simultaneous tug on the

loops, pull soft top compartment cover
upward and out to the rear.
!
The trunk lid must remain closed during
the next steps in the procedure. Otherwise the trunk lid and the soft top compartment cover may come into contact
with one another and be damaged.
Warning!
At this point, the remaining procedure

needs to be done by two people. Otherwise
you could be injured.
367
Practical hints
Warning!
In the next step, you and your assistant

should each take hold of the soft top compartment cover as shown in the illustration.
Both of you should use your free hand to
support yourselves on the edge of the trunk
lid as shown in the illustration.
9 Soft top compartment cover
One person should stand on the left

side of the vehicle and the other on the
right side.
If either you or your helper assume a different position, one or both of you could be
trapped or injured.
Pulling the cover back in one smooth

motion, lift soft top compartment
cover 9 into a vertical position until it
stops.
!
Make sure the soft top storage compartment hinges do not fold down during this procedure. Otherwise your
vehicle could be damaged.
368
a Edge of soft top
From left and right sides, reach into

soft top compartment underneath
edge of soft top a.
Warning!
Do not place your hands near the upper

windshield area, trunk lid, or between soft
top roof panels and hinges while the soft top
is being raised and locked. Serious personal
injury may occur.
Practical hints

screw with hex wrench counterclockwise in direction of arrow d as far as it
will go.
The clasp will close and the soft top is
now locked onto the windshield frame.
!
b Windshield frame
Lift soft top out of soft top compartment and pull it forward to windshield
frame b.
c Opening
d Locking
Take off protective cap on the inner

side of the soft top.

mechanism screw.

screw with hex wrench clockwise in direction of arrow c as far as it will go.

properly.
The clasp will open and the soft top will

engage audibly.
369
Practical hints
e Material tensioning frame

f Soft top compartment cover
Lift material tensioning frame e into a

vertical position.
Lower soft top compartment cover f.
!
Make sure the soft top compartment
cover f does not collide or make contact with the material tensioning
frame e.
370
g Soft top base
With the palm of your hand, press the

window in material tensioning
frame e until it is positioned on the
soft top compartment cover f.
You and your assistant should press

soft top compartment cover f forward and down with the palms of your
hands until it snaps into place in the
guide. Place your hands on the areas
indicated by the arrows.
At the same time, gently press material
tensioning frame e down with the
palms of your hands.
Practical hints
Warning!

properly.
Position hands as indicated by arrows so

that when you press soft top compartment
cover f forward and lower material tensioning frame e, your hands cannot become trapped.
Have the soft top operation checked at

as soon as possible.
h Locking

mechanism screw.

screw with hex wrench counterclockwise in direction of arrow h as far as it
will go.
If, after completing the soft top emergency operation, the trunk cannot be
opened using the remote trunk lid release switch in the drivers door,
the button on the SmartKey, or
the trunk lid release handle in the license plate recess, press the soft top
compartment cover down again as described above.
The soft top is locked onto the windshield frame.
Do not open the trunk with the emergency key, as this could otherwise
damage the trunk lid and the soft top
compartment cover.
371
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Replacing bulbs
Safe vehicle operation depends on proper
exterior lighting and signaling. It is therefore essential that all bulbs and lamp assemblies are in good working order at all
times.
Turn signal lamps
Correct headlamp adjustment is extremely

important. Have headlamps checked and
readjusted at regular intervals and when a
bulb has been replaced. See your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for headlamp
adjustment.
Brake lamps
Parking lamps
Tail lamps
i
If the headlamps are fogged up on the
inside as a result of high humidity, driving the vehicle a distance should clear
up the fogging.
372
Bulbs
Backup bulbs will be brought into use

when the following lamps malfunction:
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Front lamps
Lamp
1 Halogen headlamps:
Low beam
Rear lamps
Type
H7 (55 W)
Bi-Xenon* headlamps:
D2S-35 W
Low and high beam1
2 Halogen headlamps:
High beam/high beam H7 (55 W)
flasher
Bi-Xenon* headlamps:
H7 (55 W)
High beam flasher
Parking and standing
lamps
W5W
3 Additional turn signal

lamps
LED
4 Turn signal lamp
1156 NA
5 Side marker lamp
W5W
6 Fog lamp
HB4/9006
(55 W)
Lamp
Notes on bulb replacement

Type
7 Rear fog lamp, drivers P 21/4 W

side
Turn signal lamp
P 21 W
Brake lamp
P 21 W
Backup lamp
P 21 W
Tail, parking and stand- P 21/4 W

ing lamp, side marker W 5 W
8 High mounted brake
lamp
LED
9 License plate lamps
C5W
Warning!
Keep bulbs out of reach of children.

Bulbs and bulb sockets can be very hot. Allow the lamp to cool down before changing
a bulb.
Halogen lamps contain pressurized gas. A
bulb can explode if you:
touch or move it when hot
drop the bulb
scratch the bulb
Wear eye and hand protection.

Because of high voltage in xenon lamps, it is
dangerous to replace the bulb or repair the
lamp and its components. We recommend
that you have such work done by a qualified
technician.
Vehicles with Bi-Xenon headlamps* do not replace

the Bi-Xenon bulbs yourself.
373
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Only use 12 volt bulbs of the same type

and with the specified watt rating.
Replacing bulbs for front lamps
Switch lights off before changing a bulb

to prevent short circuits.
Front lamps halogen-type
Always use a clean lint-free cloth when

handling bulbs.
Your hands should be dry and free of oil

and grease.
If the newly installed bulb does not

come on, visit an authorized
Have the LEDs and bulbs for the following lamps replaced by an authorized
Additional turn signal lamps in the

exterior rear view mirrors
High mounted brake lamp
Bi-Xenon* lamps
Front fog lamps
374
1 Housing cover for low beam lamp

2 Housing cover for high beam lamp
3 Bulb socket for turn signal lamp

4 Low beam bulb
5 High beam bulb
6 Parking and standing lamp
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Low beam and high beam bulb
Front turn signal lamp bulb
Parking and standing lamp bulb
Switch off the lights.
Open the hood ( page 287).
Turn housing cover 1 or 2 counterclockwise and remove.
Twist bulb socket 3 counterclockwise

and pull out.
Turn housing cover 2 counterclockwise and remove.
Turn bulb holder 4 or 5 with the bulb

counterclockwise and remove.
Push bulb into socket, turn counterclockwise and remove.
Pull out the bulb socket with the bulb.
Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket.
Press the bulb backwards and turn

counterclockwise out of the bulb holder.
Insert new bulb in socket, push in and

twist clockwise.
Insert a new bulb in the socket.
Reinsert bulb socket in lamp and twist

clockwise.
Reinstall the bulb socket.
Align housing cover and click into

place.
Press the new bulb into the holder and

twist it clockwise.
Place the bulb holder back into the

lamp and turn it clockwise.
Place the corresponding housing covers back on and turn them clockwise.
375
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Front lamps Bi-Xenon*-type
1 Bulb socket for turn signal lamp

2 Housing cover for high beam flasher
lamp
3 Housing cover for Bi-Xenon* lamp
High beam bulb for high beam flasher

Turn bulb holder 4 with the bulb counterclockwise and remove.
Press the bulb backwards and turn

counterclockwise out of the bulb holder.
Press the new bulb into the holder and

twist it clockwise.
Place the bulb holder back into the

lamp and turn it clockwise.
Place the housing cover 2 back on

and turn them clockwise.
4 High beam flasher bulb

5 Parking and standing lamp
Warning!
Do not remove the cover 3 for the Bi-Xenon* headlamp. Because of high voltage in
xenon lamps, it is dangerous to replace the
bulb or repair the lamp and its components.
We recommend that you have such work
done by a qualified technician.
376
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Front turn signal lamp bulb
Parking and standing lamp bulb
Twist bulb socket 1 counterclockwise

and pull out.
Push bulb into socket, turn counterclockwise and remove.
Pull out the bulb socket with the bulb.
Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket.
Insert new bulb in socket, push in and

twist clockwise.
Insert a new bulb in the socket.
Reinsert bulb socket in lamp and twist

clockwise.
Reinstall the bulb socket.
Align housing cover and click into

place.
Side marker lamp bulb
Carefully slide lamp towards rear.
Remove front end first.
Twist bulb socket counterclockwise

and pull out.
Pull bulb out of the bulb socket.
Insert new bulb in socket.
Reinstall bulb socket, push in and twist

clockwise.
To reinstall lamp, set rear end in

bumper and let front end snap into
place.
377
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Replacing bulbs for rear lamps
Twist bulb counterclockwise and pull

out of bulb holder.
Tail lamp assemblies
Insert new bulb into the holder and turn

it clockwise.
Reinstall bulb holder. The tabs must audibly click.
Close trim panel.
Place the housing cover back on so

that its tabs click in place.
License plate lamp
1 Screws
1 Brake lamp
2 Turn signal lamp
3 Backup lamp
4 Standing and side marker lamp
5 Rear fog lamp (drivers side)/tail
Loosen both screws 1 and remove

lamp.
Replace the tubular lamp and reinstall

lamp.
Retighten the screws.
Open trunk.
Swing the trim panel covering the corresponding rear lights to the side.
Squeeze tabs together and remove the

bulb holder with the bulb.
378
Practical hints
Removing wiper blades
Warning!
For safety reasons, remove SmartKey from

starter switch before replacing a wiper
blade. Otherwise the motor could suddenly
turn on and cause injury.
Fold the wiper arm forward.
Installing wiper blades
Slide the wiper blade into the cutout on

the wiper arm.
Never open the hood when the wiper

arms are folded forward.
Slide the tab back in direction of

arrow 1 until it audibly engages.
Fold the wiper arm backward to rest on

the windshield. Make sure you hold on
to the wiper when folding the wiper arm
back.
Hold on to the wiper when folding the

Do not allow the wiper arms to contact
the windshield glass without a wiper
blade inserted.
Make certain that the wiper blades are
properly installed. Improperly installed
wiper blades may cause windshield
damage.
For your convenience, we recommend
that you have this work carried out by
1 Lock
2 Unlock
Pull the tab in direction of arrow 2 and

remove windshield wiper.
379
Practical hints
Flat tire
Flat tire
Preparing the vehicle
Park the vehicle as far as possible from

moving traffic on a hard surface.
Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
Engage the steering wheel lock in the

straight ahead position and set the
parking brake.
Move the gear selector lever to P.
Have any passenger exit the vehicle at

a safe distance from the roadway.
380
Mounting the Minispare wheel
Warning!
The dimensions of the Minispare wheel are

different from those of the road wheels. As
a result, the vehicle handling characteristics
change when driving with a Minispare wheel
mounted.
The spare wheel should only be used temporarily, and should be replaced with a regular
road wheel as quickly as possible.
In case of a flat tire, you may temporarily

use the spare wheel when observing the
following restrictions:
Do not exceed a vehicle speed of

50 mph (80 km/h).
Drive to the nearest tire repair facility

to have the flat tire repaired or replaced as appropriate.
Do not operate the vehicle with more

than one spare wheel mounted.
Prepare the vehicle as described on

( page 380).
Take the wheel wrench and the jack

out of the trunk ( page 346).
Take the Minispare wheel and wheel

bolts out of the trunk ( page 346).
Practical hints
Flat tire
Lifting the vehicle
Prevent the vehicle from rolling away

by blocking wheels with wheel chocks
(not included) or other sizable objects.
When changing wheel on a level surface:
Place one chock in front of and one behind the wheel that is diagonally opposite to the wheel being changed.
When changing wheel on a hill:
Place chocks on the downhill side

blocking both wheels of the other axle.
Warning!
The jack is designed exclusively for jacking

up the vehicle at the jack take-up brackets
built into both sides of the vehicle. To help
avoid personal injury, use the jack only to lift
the vehicle during a wheel change. Never
get beneath the vehicle while it is supported
by the jack. Keep hands and feet away from
the area under the lifted vehicle. Always
firmly set parking brake and block wheels
before raising vehicle with jack.
Do not disengage parking brake while the
vehicle is raised. Be certain that the jack is
always vertical (plumb line) when in use, especially on hills. Always try to use the jack
on a level surface. Make sure the jack arm is
fully seated in the jack take-up bracket. Always lower the vehicle onto sufficient capacity jackstands before working under the
vehicle.
1 Wheel wrench
On wheel to be changed, loosen but do

not yet remove the wheel bolts (approximately one full turn with wrench).
The jack take-up brackets are located directly behind the front wheel housings and
in front of the rear wheel housings.
381
Practical hints
Flat tire
Removing the wheel
2 Jack
3 Take-up bracket
Place jack 2 on firm ground.
Position jack 2 under take-up

bracket 3 so that it is always vertical
(plumb-line) as seen from the side,
even if the vehicle is parked on an incline.
382
Jack up the vehicle until the wheel is a

maximum of 1.2 in (3 cm) from the
ground. Never start engine while vehicle is raised.
1 Alignment bolt
Unscrew upper-most wheel bolt and remove.
Replace this wheel bolt with alignment

bolt 1 supplied in the tool kit.
The jack is intended only for lifting the vehicle briefly for wheel changes. It is not suited
for performing maintenance work under the
vehicle.
Remove the remaining bolts.
Warning!
Never start the engine when the vehicle

is raised.
Never lie down under the raised vehicle.
!
Do not place wheel bolts in sand or dirt.
This could result in damage to the bolt
and wheel hub threads.
Remove the wheel.
Practical hints
Flat tire
Mounting the new wheel
!
To avoid paint damage, place wheel flat
against hub and hold it there while installing first wheel bolt.
Warning!
Always replace wheel bolts that are damaged or rusted.
1 Wheel bolt for light alloy rims

2 Wheel bolt for Minispare wheel or other
steel rims (located in trunk with spare
wheel)
!
Wheel bolts 2 must be used when
mounting the Minispare wheel. The use
of any wheel bolts other than wheel
bolts 2 for the Minispare will physically damage the vehicle's brakes.
Never apply oil or grease to wheel bolts.

Damaged wheel hub threads should be repaired immediately. Do not continue to drive
under these circumstances! Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call
Roadside Assistance.
Guide the spare wheel onto the alignment bolt and push it on.
Insert wheel bolts and tighten them

slightly.
Incorrect wheel bolts or improperly tightened wheel bolts can cause the wheel to
come off. This could cause an accident.
Make sure to use the correct wheel bolts.
Clean contact surfaces of wheel and

wheel hub.
383
Practical hints
Flat tire
Lowering the vehicle
Lower vehicle by turning crank counterclockwise until the full weight of the
vehicle is resting on the ground.
Remove the jack.
Warning!
Have the tightening torque checked after

changing a wheel. The wheels could come
loose if they are not tightened to a torque of
80 lb-ft (110 Nm).
Unscrew the alignment bolt, install last

wheel bolt and tighten slightly.
Warning!
Only use genuine equipment

Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts. Other wheel
bolts may come loose.
Do not tighten the wheel bolts when the vehicle is raised. Otherwise the vehicle could
tip over.
384
1 - 5 Wheel bolts
Tighten the five wheel bolts evenly, following the diagonal sequence illustrated (1 to 5), until all bolts are tight.
Observe a tightening torque of 80 lb-ft
(110 Nm).
Before storing the jack in the trunk, it

should be fully collapsed, with handle
folded in.
Practical hints
Battery
Battery
The battery is located on the right side of
the engine compartment.
Warning!
Failure to follow these instructions can result in severe injury or death.

Observe all safety instructions and precautions when handling automotive batteries
(For more information, see Battery
( page 294)
Never lean over batteries while connecting,
you might get injured.
Removal of filter box:
Release the three clamps 1.
Remove filter box.
Installation of filter box:
Insert filter box properly.
Secure it with the three clamps 1.
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not

allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes,
skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately
flush affected area with water and seek
medical help if necessary.
A battery will also produce hydrogen gas,
which is flammable and explosive. Keep
flames or sparks away from battery, avoid
improper connection of jumper cables,
smoking etc.
!
Never loosen or detach battery terminal clamps while the engine is running
or the SmartKey is in the starter switch.
Otherwise the alternator and other
electronic components could be severely damaged.
Have the battery checked regularly by
Refer to Service Booklet for maintenance intervals or contact your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for further
information.
Warning!
Do not place metal objects on the battery as

this could result in a short circuit.
Use leak-proof battery only to avoid the risk
of acid burns in the event of an accident.
385
Practical hints
Battery
Disconnecting the battery
Depress parking brake firmly or move

gear selector lever to position P.
Turn off all electrical consumers.
Remove SmartKey from starter switch.
Removing the battery
Remove the screw securing the battery.
Remove the battery support and bracket.
Take out the battery.
1 Negative terminal
2 Positive terminal cover
Warning!
With a disconnected battery
you will no longer be able to turn the

SmartKey in the starter switch and
pressing the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
button on the gear selector lever will
have no effect
the gear selector lever will remain

locked in position P
386
Press the start/stop button until

the engine shuts off.
Open the drivers door.
Charging and reinstalling battery
Remove the filter box.
Warning!
Disconnect the battery negative lead.
Remove cover 2 from the positive terminal.
Disconnect the battery positive lead.
Never charge a battery while still installed in

the vehicle. Gases may escape during charging and cause explosions that may result in
paint damage, corrosion or personal injury.
Charge battery in accordance with the

instructions of the battery charger
manufacturer.
Reinstall the charged battery. Follow

the previously described steps in reverse order.
Practical hints
Battery
Reconnecting the battery
Connect the positive lead and fasten its

cover 2.
The following procedures must be carried out following any interruption of

battery power (e.g. due to reconnecting):
Connect the negative lead 1.
Set the clock ( page 144) (vehicles with COMAND*: see COMAND
operators manual).
Resynchronize side windows

( page 214).
!
Never invert the terminal connections.
Reinstall the filter box ( page 385).

Large 12-volt storage batteries contain
lead. Recycling of batteries is the preferred
for recycling.
!
The battery, its filler caps and the vent
tube must always be securely installed
when the vehicle is in operation.
387
Practical hints
Jump starting
Jump starting
Warning!
Failure to follow these directions will cause

damage to the electronic components, and
can lead to a battery explosion and severe
injury or death.
Never lean over batteries while connecting
or jump starting, you might get injured.
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not
allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes,
skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately
flush affected area with water, and seek
medical help if necessary.
A battery will also produce hydrogen gas,
which is flammable and very explosive. Keep
flames or sparks away from battery, avoid
improper connection of jumper cables,
smoking, etc.
Attempting to jump start a frozen battery
can result in it exploding, causing personal
injury.
Read all instructions before proceeding.
388
If the battery is discharged, the engine can

be started with jumper cables and the battery of another vehicle. Observe the following:
Jump starting should only be performed

when the engine and catalytic converter are cold.
Do not start the engine if the battery is

frozen. Let the battery thaw out first.
Only jump start from batteries with the

same voltage rating (12 V). Jump starting with a more powerful battery could
damage the vehicles electrical system,
which will not be covered by the
Only use jumper cables with sufficient

cross-section and insulated terminal
clamps.
Always make sure the jumper cables

are not on or near pulleys, fans or other
parts that move when an engine is
started or running.
!
Avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts.
Do not attempt to start the engine using a battery quick charge unit.
If the engine does not run after several
unsuccessful starting attempts, have it
Excessive unburned fuel generated by
repeated failed starting attempts may
damage the catalytic converter and
may present a fire risk.
Make sure the jumper cables do not
have loose or missing insulation.
Make sure the cable clamps do not
touch any other metal part while the
other end is still attached to a battery.
Practical hints
Jump starting
Warning!
Keep flames or sparks away from battery.

Do not smoke.
Start engine of the vehicle with the

charged battery and run at idle speed.
Connect the negative terminal 4 of

the charged battery with the negative
under hood terminal 3 in front of the
discharged battery with the jumper cable. Clamp cable to charged battery 4
first.
Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.
Observe all safety instructions and precautions when handling automotive batteries
( page 294).
The battery is located on the right side of

the engine compartment. For jump starting use the terminals in front of the battery.
Make sure the two vehicles do not
touch.
1 Positive terminal of charged battery

2 Positive under hood terminal in front of
discharged battery
3 Negative under hood terminal in front
of discharged battery
4 Negative terminal of charged battery
Apply parking brake.
Shift gear selector lever to position P.
Open the hood.
Connect the positive terminal 1 of the

charged battery with the positive under
hood terminal 2 in front of the discharged battery with the jumper cable.
Clamp cable to charged battery 1
first.
You can now turn on the electrical consumers. Do not turn on the lights under
any circumstances.
Remove the jumper cables first from

the negative terminals 3 and 4 and
then from the positive terminals 1
and 2.
You can now turn on the lights.
Have the battery checked at the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Never invert the terminal connections.
Do not tow-start the vehicle.
389
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
Towing the vehicle
Towing the vehicle
Mercedes-Benz recommends that the vehicle be transported with all wheels off the
ground using flatbed or appropriate wheel
lift/dolly equipment.
!
Use flatbed or wheel lift/dolly equipment with SmartKey in starter switch
turned to position 0.
Do not tow with sling-type equipment.
Towing with sling-type equipment over
bumpy roads will damage radiator and
supports.
To prevent damage during transport,
do not tie down vehicle by its chassis or
suspension parts.
Switch off the tow-away alarm
( page 84) and the automatic central
locking ( page 149).
390
When circumstances do not permit the

recommended towing methods, the vehicle may be towed with all wheels on the
ground or front wheels raised only so far as
necessary to have the vehicle moved to a
safe location where the recommended
towing methods can be employed.
!
If the vehicle is towed with the front
axle raised, the engine must be shut off
(SmartKey in starter switch position 0
or 1). Otherwise, the ESP will immediately be engaged and will apply the rear
wheel brakes.
When towing the vehicle with all wheels
on the ground, the selector lever must
be in position N and the SmartKey
must be in starter switch position 2.
on the ground or the front axle raised,
the vehicle may be towed only for distances up to 30 miles (50 km) and at a
speed not to exceed 30 mph (50
km/h).
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
!
To be certain to avoid a possibility of
damage to the transmission, however,
we recommend the drive shaft be disconnected at the rear axle drive flange
for any towing beyond a short tow to a
nearby garage.
Warning!
Prior to towing the vehicle with all wheels on

the ground, make certain that the SmartKey
is in starter switch position 2.
If the SmartKey is left in starter switch position 0 for an extended period of time, it can
no longer be turned in the switch. In this
case, the steering is locked. To unlock, remove SmartKey from starter switch and reinsert.
If circumstances require towing the vehicle
with all wheels on the ground, always tow
with a tow bar if:
the engine will not run
there is a malfunction in the power supply or in the vehicles electrical system
as that will be necessary to adequately control the towed vehicle.
Warning!

effort is necessary to brake and steer the vehicle. Adapt your driving accordingly.
i
To signal turns while being towed with
the hazard warning flasher in use, turn
SmartKey in starter switch to
position 2 and activate the combination switch for the left or right turn signal in the usual manner only the
selected turn signal will operate.
Upon canceling the turn signal, the hazard warning flasher will operate again.
391
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
!

on the ground, please note the following:
The gear selector lever will remain

locked in position P and the SmartKey
will not turn in the starter switch if the
battery is disconnected or discharged.
See notes on the battery ( page 385)
or on jump starting ( page 388).
With the automatic central locking activated and the SmartKey in starter
switch position 2, or KEYLESS-GO*
start/stop button in position 2, the vehicle doors lock if the left front wheel
as well as the right rear wheel are turning at vehicle speeds of approx. 9 mph
(15 km/h) or more.
Switch off the tow-away alarm
( page 84).
Manually unlocking gear selector lever

( page 352)
Installing towing eye bolt
Towing eye bolt CLK 320/CLK 500
To prevent the vehicle door locks from

locking, deactivate the automatic central locking ( page 149).
To remove cover:
Press mark on cover in direction of arrow.
Lift cover off to reveal threaded hole for

towing eye bolt.
The towing eye bolt is supplied with the

tool kit (located in the compartment underneath the trunk floor).
Towing of the vehicle should only be

done using the properly installed towing eye bolt. Never attach tow cable,
tow rope or tow rod to the vehicle chassis, frame or suspension parts.
Screw towing eye bolt to its stop and

tighten with lug wrench.
To reinstall cover:
1 Cover on right side of front bumper
392
2 Cover on right side of rear bumper
Fit cover and snap into place.
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
Towing eye bolt CLK 55 AMG
Towing eye bolt in rear bumper
To reinstall cover:
1 Cover on right side of rear bumper

2 Recess in the cover
Hook right-hand side of the cover into

opening.
To remove cover:
Slide cover as far as it will go in the direction of the arrow 3.
Gently press left-hand side of cover in

direction of the arrow 4.
Towing eye bolt in front bumper

The cover for the threaded bore in the front
bumper is identical to the cover on the
models CLK320/CLK500.
To remove and to reinstall cover,see Towing eye bolt CLK 320/CLK 500
( page 392)
Insert flat, blunt object as a lever in recess 2 on the edge of cover 1.

Loosen cover 1 from the bumper using lever, to reveal threaded hole for
towing eye bolt.
The towing eye bolt is supplied with the
tool kit (located in the compartment
underneath the trunk floor).
Screw towing eye bolt to its stop and

tighten with lug wrench.
The hooks on the left-hand side engage.
i
When closing the cover, make sure the
covers check strap does not get
caught.
393
Practical hints
Fuses
Fuses
Fuse box in passenger compartment
Opening
Only install fuses that have been tested

and approved by Mercedes-Benz and
that have the specified amperage rating.
Pull cover away from fuse box 1 (arrow).
Remove cover rearward.
Never attempt to repair or bridge a

blown fuse. Have the cause determined
and remedied by an authorized
Closing
Attach the cover in the front.
Fold the cover in until it engages.
Fuse chart
The fuse chart is found in the fuse box in
the passenger compartment. The amperages of the fuses are also given there.
394
Practical hints
Fuses
Fuse box in engine compartment
The fuse box is located in the engine compartment on the left-hand side.
Removing/installing cover
Twist screws 3 90 counterclockwise.
Pull up cover 2.
Slide out retainer 4 and remove cover

by pulling towards front.
Install cover 2 in reverse order.
Opening fuse box
5 Fuse box cover

6 Clamps
2 Cover
3 Screw
4 Retainer
Release clamps 6.
Remove cover 5.
Closing fuse box
Ensure that the sealing rubber is properly positioned.
Press the cover down and secure with

clamps 6.
395
Practical hints
Fuses
Auxiliary fuse box in trunk
The auxiliary fuse box is located in the
trunk on the left hand side.
1 Trim cover
396
Opening auxiliary fuse box
Spare fuses
Spare fuses are found in the vehicle tool kit

in the cargo area.
To open, pull trim cover 1 in the direction of the rear light and outward.
Closing auxiliary fuse box
Spare extractor
The fuse extractor is located in the trunk

underneath the trunk floor cover in the
storage well casing ( page 344).
Press trim cover 1 back into place.
Technical data
Spare parts service
Warranty coverage
Identification labels
Layout of poly-V-belt drive
Engine
Rims and tires
Electrical system
Main dimensions
Weights
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
Consumer information
397
Technical data
Spare parts service
Spare parts service
The Technical data section provides the
necessary technical data for your vehicle.
All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers

maintain a stock of genuine
Mercedes-Benz parts required for maintenance and repair work. In addition, strategically located parts distribution centers
provide quick and reliable parts service.
More than 300000 different spare parts
for Mercedes-Benz models are available.
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are subject
to stringent quality inspections. Each part
has been specifically developed, manufactured or selected for and adapted to Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
Therefore, genuine Mercedes-Benz parts
should be installed.
398
!
The use of non-genuine Mercedes-Benz
parts and accessories not authorized
by Mercedes-Benz could damage the
vehicle, which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty, or
could compromise the vehicles durability or safety.
Technical data
Warranty coverage
Warranty coverage
Your vehicle is covered under the terms of
the warranties printed in the Service and
Warranty Information booklet. Your
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will exchange or repair any defective parts originally installed in the vehicle in accordance
with the terms of the following warranties:
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
Emission System Warranty
Emission Performance Warranty
California, Maine, Massachusetts, and

Vermont Emission Control Systems
Warranty
Replacement parts and accessories are

covered by the Mercedes-Benz Spare Parts
and Accessories warranties, copies of
which are available at any Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Loss of Service and Warranty

Information Booklet
Should you lose your Service and Warranty
Information booklet, have your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center arrange for a replacement. It will be mailed to you.
399
Technical data
1 Certification label
2 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
3 Information label, California version

Vacuum line routing for emission control system
4 Emission control label
5 VIN, visible (lower edge of windshield)
6 Engine number (engraved on engine)
When ordering spare parts, please specify
vehicle identification and engine numbers.
400
Technical data
CLK 320/CLK 500/CLK 55 AMG
1 Automatic belt tensioner

2 Power steering pump
3 Air conditioning compressor
4 Crankshaft
5 Coolant pump
6 Generator (alternator)
7 Idler pulley
401
Technical data
Engine
Engine
Model
CLK 320 (209.465)1
CLK 500 (209.475)1
CLK 55 AMG (209.476)1
Engine
112
113
113
Mode of operation
4-stroke engine, gasoline injec- 4-stroke engine, gasoline injec- 4-stroke engine, gasoline injection
tion
tion
No. of cylinders
Bore
3.54 in (89.90 mm)
3.82 in (97.00 mm)
3.82 in (97.00 mm)
Stroke
3.31 in (84.00 mm)
3.31 in (84.00 mm)
3.60 in (92.00 mm)
Total piston displacement
195.2 cu in (3199 cm )
303.0 cu in (4966 cm )
331.8 cu in (5439 cm3)
Compression ratio
10:1
10:1
11:1
Output acc. to SAE J 1349
215 hp/5700 rpm

(160 kW/5700 rpm)
302 hp/5600 rpm

(225 kW/5600 rpm)
362 hp/5750 rpm

(270 kW/5750 rpm)
Maximum torque acc. to SAE J 229 lb-ft/3000-4600 rpm

1349
(310 Nm/3000-4600 rpm)
339 lb-ft/2700-4250 rpm

(460 Nm/2700-4250 rpm)
376 lb-ft/4000 rpm

(510 Nm/4000 rpm)
Maximum engine speed
6000 rpm
6000 rpm
6700 rpm
Firing order
1-4-3-6-2-5
1-5-4-2-6-3-7-8
1-5-4-2-6-3-7-8
Poly-V-belt
2380 mm
2380 mm
2380 mm
The quoted data apply only to the standard vehicle. See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for the corresponding data of all special bodies and special equipment.
402
Technical data
Rims and tires
Rims and tires
Only use tires and rims which have been
specifically developed for your vehicle and
tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Other tires and rims can have detrimental
effects, such as
poor handling characteristics
increased noise
increased fuel consumption
Moreover, tires and rims not approved

by Mercedes-Benz may, under load, exhibit dimensional variations and different tire deformation characteristics
that could cause them to come into
contact with the vehicle body or axle
parts. Damage to the tires or the vehicle may be the result.
Further information on tires and rims is

available at any authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center. A tire inflation
pressure table is located on the fuel filler flap of the vehicle. The tire pressure
should be checked regularly and
should only be adjusted on cold tires.
Follow tire manufacturers maintenance recommendation included with
vehicle.
403
Technical data
Rims and tires
Same size tires
16" tires
CLK 320
CLK 500
CLK 55 AMG
CLK 320 (Appearance Package*)
Rims (light alloy)
7J x 16 H2
Wheel offset
1.45 in (37 mm)
Winter tires (radial-ply

tires)
205/55 R16 91H M+S
17" tires
CLK 320
CLK 500
CLK 55 AMG
Rims (light alloy)
71/2 J x 17 H2
71/2 J x 17 H2
Wheel offset
1.42 in (36 mm)
Winter tires (radial-ply

tires)
1
1.45 in (37 mm)

1
225/45 R 17 91 H M+S
Must not be used with snow chains.
404
71/2 J x 17 H2
225/45 R 17 91 H M+S
1.45 in (37 mm)

1
225/45 R17 91 H M+S1
Technical data
Rims and tires
Mixed size tires
CLK 320
CLK 320*
CLK 500
CLK 320 (Appearance Package*) CLK 55 AMG
Rims (light alloy)
7 J x 16 H2
71/2 J x 17 H2
71/2 J x 17 H2
Wheel offset
1.45 in (37 mm)
1.42 in (36 mm)
1.45 in (37 mm)
Summer tires
(radial-ply tires)
225/45 R17 91W
225/45 R17 91Y
All-season tires
(radial-ply tires)
205/55 R16 91H M+S
Rims (light alloy)
8 J x 16 H2
81/2 J x17 H2
81/2 J x17 H2
Wheel offset
1.26 in (32 mm)
1.18 in (30 mm)
Front axle:
Rear axle:
Summer tires (radial-ply

tires)
245/40 R17 91W
All-season tires
(radial-ply tires)
225/50 R16 92H M+S1
1.18 in (30 mm)

1
245/40 R17 91Y1

-
405
Technical data
Rims and tires
Minispare wheel
CLK 320
CLK 500
CLK 55 AMG
Rim
3.5 B x 16 H2
3.5 B x 17 H2
Wheel offset
0.67 in (17 mm)
Tire
1
T 125/90 R 16 98M
406
3.5 B x 17 H2
0.67 in (17 mm)
1
0.67 in (17 mm)

1
T 125/80 R 17 99M
T 125/80 R 17 99M1
Technical data
Electrical system
Electrical system
Model
CLK 320
CLK 500
CLK 55 AMG
Generator (alternator)
14 V/120 A
14 V/150 A
14 V/150 A
Starter motor
14 V/1.4 KW
14 V/1.7 KW
14 V/1.7 KW
Battery
12 V/100 Ah
12 V/100 Ah
12 V/100 Ah
Spark plugs
Bosch F8 DPP 332

NGK PFR 5R-11
Bosch F8 DPP 332

NGK PFR 5R-11
NGK ILFR 6A
Electrode gap
0.039 in (1.00 mm)
0.039 in (1.00 mm)
0.031 in (0.8 mm)
Tightening torque
18.5 - 22 lb-ft (25 - 30 Nm)
18.5 - 22 lb-ft (25 - 30 Nm)
18.5 - 22 lb-ft (25 - 30 Nm)
407
Technical data
Main dimensions
Main dimensions
Model
CLK 320
CLK 500
CLK 55 AMG
Overall vehicle length
182.6 in (4638 mm)
182.6 in (4638 mm)
182.6 in (4638 mm)
Overall vehicle width
68.5 in (1740 mm)
68.5 in (1740 mm)
68.5 in (1740 mm)
Overall vehicle height
55.4 in (1406 mm)
55.4 in (1408 mm)
55.4 in (1408 mm)
Overall vehicle height when

opening/closing soft top
80.9 in (2055 mm)
81.0 in (2057 mm)
80.6 in (2047 mm)
Wheelbase
106.9 in (2715 mm)
106.9 in (2715 mm)
106.9 in (2715 mm)
Track, front
58.8 in (1493 mm)
58.9 in (1497 mm)
58.9 in (1497 mm)
Track, rear
58.0 in (1474 mm)
58.2 in (1478 mm)
58.2 in (1478 mm)
408
Technical data
Weights
Weights
Trunk load max.
220 lb (100 kg)
409
Technical data
Capacities
Vehicle components and their respective

lubricants must match. Therefore only use
brands tested and approved by
Mercedes-Benz.
Model
Capacity
Please refer to the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet, or inquire at your
Engine with oil filter
CLK 320
8.5 US qt (8.0 l)
CLK 500
8.0 US qt (7.5 l)
CLK 55 AMG 9.0 US qt (8.5 l)
Approved engine oils
CLK 320
8.0 US qt (7.5 l)
CLK 500
9.3 US qt (8.7 l)
CLK 55 AMG 9.3 US qt (8.7 l)
MB Automatic Transmission Oil
Rear axle
CLK 320
1.28 US qt (1.2 l)
CLK 500
1.5 US qt (1.4 l)
CLK 55 AMG 1.5 US qt (1.4 l)
Hypoid gear oil SAE 85 W 90
Power steering
approx. 1.1 US qt (1.0 l)
Front wheel hubs
approx. 3.0 oz (85 g) each High temperature roller bearing grease
Brake system
0.64 US qt (0.6 l)
410
MB Power Steering Fluid (Pentosin

CHF 11S)
MB Brake Fluid (DOT 4+)
Technical data
Model
Cooling system
Fuel tank
including a reserve of
Capacity
CLK 320
approx. 10.7 US qt (10.0 l) MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze
CLK 500
approx. 12.8 US qt (12.0 l) Agent
CLK 55 AMG approx. 12.8 US qt (12.0 l)
16.35 US gal (62.0 l)
2.11 US gal (8.0 l)
Air conditioning system

Windshield washer and
1
Premium unleaded gasoline:

Posted Octane 91 (Avg. of 96
RON/86 MON)
R-134a refrigerant and special PAG lubricant oil (never R-12)
6.4 US qt (6.0 l)
MB Windshield Washer Concentrate1
Use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate S and water for temperatures above freezing point or MB Windshield Washer Concentrate S and commercially available
premixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze for temperatures below freezing point. Follow suggested mixing ratios ( page 416).
411
Technical data
Engine oils
Engine oils are specifically tested for their
suitability in our engines. Therefore, only
use engine oils approved by
Mercedes-Benz. Information on approved
engine oils is available in the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet, or at
!
Always check the oil filler cap
( page 291) for important information
pertaining to the engine oil needing to
meet a specific Mercedes-Benz specification (e.g. MB 229.5). If such information is printed on the oil filler cap, only
use an engine oil from the list of approved engine oils in the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet that
meets the specification indicated on
the oil filler cap.
412
Using engine oils of other specification

may cause the FSS to incorrectly determine the next service interval and will
result in engine damage not covered by
Never use R-12 (CFC) or mineral-based lubricating oil. Otherwise damage to the
system will occur.
Please follow FSS recommendations for

scheduled oil changes. Failure to do so
could result in engine damage not covered
by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
During vehicle operation, the boiling point

of the brake fluid is continuously reduced
through the absorption of moisture from
the atmosphere. Under extremely strenuous operating conditions, this moisture
content can lead to the formation of bubbles in the system, thus reducing the systems efficiency.
Engine oil additives

Do not blend oil additives with engine oil.
They may damage the engine.
Damage or malfunctions resulting from
blending oil additives are not covered by
Air conditioning refrigerant
R-134a (HFC) refrigerant and special PAG
lubricating oil are used in the air conditioning system.
Brake fluid
Therefore, the brake fluid must be replaced every two years, preferably in the
spring.
Only brake fluid approved by
Mercedes-Benz is recommended. Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will provide you with additional information.
Technical data
Premium unleaded gasoline
!
To maintain the engines durability and
performance, premium unleaded gasoline must be used. If premium unleaded
is not available and low octane fuel is
used, follow these precautions:
Have the fuel tank only partially

filled with unleaded regular and fill
up with premium unleaded as soon
as possible.
Avoid full throttle driving and abrupt

acceleration.
Do not exceed an engine speed of

3000 rpm if the vehicle is loaded
with a light load such as two persons and no luggage.
Do not exceed 23 of maximum accelerator pedal position if the vehicle is fully loaded or operating in
mountainous terrain.
Fuel requirements
Gasoline additives
Only use premium unleaded gasoline

meeting ASTM standard D 439:
A major concern among engine manufacturers is carbon build-up caused by gasoline. Mercedes-Benz recommends only the
use of quality gasoline containing additives
that prevent the build-up of carbon deposits.
The octane number (posted at the

pump) must be 91 min. It is an average
of both the Research (R) octane number and the Motor (M) octane number:
(R+M)/2). This is also known as the
ANTI-KNOCK INDEX.
Unleaded gasoline containing oxygenates

such as ethanol, IPA, IBA and TBA can be
used provided the ratio of any one of these
oxygenates to gasoline does not exceed
10%; MTBE not to exceed 15%.
The ratio of methanol to gasoline must not
exceed 3% plus additional cosolvents.
Using mixtures of ethanol and methanol is
not allowed. Gasohol, which contains 10%
ethanol and 90% unleaded gasoline, can be
used.
These blends must also meet all other fuel
requirements, such as resistance to spark
knock, boiling range, vapor pressure, etc.
After an extended period of using fuels

without such additives, carbon deposits
can build up especially on the intake valves
and in the combustion area, leading to engine performance problems such as:
Warm-up hesitation
Unstable idle
Knocking/pinging
Misfire
Power loss
Do not blend any specific fuel additives

with fuel. This only results in unnecessary
cost and may be harmful to the engine operation.
413
Technical data
Damage or malfunctions resulting from
poor fuel quality or from blending specific
fuel additives are not covered by the
Coolants
The engine coolant is a mixture of water
and anticorrosion/antifreeze, which
provides:
Corrosion protection
Freeze protection
Boiling protection (by increasing the

boiling point)
The cooling system was filled at the factory

with a coolant providing freeze protection
to approximately -22F (-30C) and corrosion protection.
414
If the antifreeze mixture is effective

to -22F (-30C), the boiling point of the
coolant in the pressurized cooling system
is reached at approximately 266F
(130C).
The coolant solution must be used year
round to provide the necessary corrosion
protection and increase boil-over protection. Refer to Service Booklet for replacement interval.
Coolant system design and coolant used
stipulate the replacement interval. The
replacement interval published in the
Service Booklet is only applicable if
MB 325.0 anticorrosion/antifreeze solution or other Mercedes-Benz approved
products of equal specification (see Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet)
are used to renew the coolant concentration or bring it back up to the proper level.
To provide important corrosion protection,

the solution must be at least 45% anticorrosion/antifreeze (equivalent to freeze
protection to approx. -22F [-30C]). If you
use a solution that is more than 55% anticorrosion/antifreeze (freeze protection to
approx. -49F [-45C]), the engine temperature will increase due to the lower heat
transfer capability of the solution. Therefore, do not use more than this amount of
anticorrosion/antifreeze.
If the coolant level is low, water and MB
Anticorrosion/Antifreeze should be used
to bring it up to the proper level (have cooling system checked for signs of leakage).
Please make sure the mixture is in accordance with label instructions.
The water in the cooling system must meet
minimum requirements, which are usually
satisfied by normal drinking water. If you
are not sure about the water quality, consult your authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Technical data
Anticorrosion/antifreeze
Your vehicle contains a number of aluminum parts. The use of aluminum components in motor vehicle engines
necessitates that anticorrosion/antifreeze
coolant used in such engines be specifically formulated to protect the aluminum
parts. (Failure to use such anticorrosion/antifreeze coolant will result in a significantly shortened service life.)
Therefore, the following product is strongly
recommended for use in your vehicle:
Mercedes-Benz Mercedes-Benz 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze Agent
Before the start of the winter season (or

once a year in hot southern regions), you
should have the anticorrosion/antifreeze
concentration checked. The coolant is also
regularly checked each time you bring your
vehicle to your authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center for service.
Anticorrosion/antifreeze quantity
Model
Approx. freeze protection

35F (37C)
49F (45C)
CLK 320
5.3 US qt (5.0 l)
5.9 US qt (5.5 l)
CLK 500
6.4 US qt (6.0 l)
7.0 US qt (6.6 l)
CLK 55 AMG
6.4 US qt (6.0 l)
7.0 US qt (6.6 l)
415
Technical data
Both the windshield washer and headlamp
cleaning system are supplied from the
windshield washer fluid reservoir.
The washer fluid reservoir has a capacity of
approx. 6.4 US qt (6.0 l).
Refill the reservoir with MB Windshield

Washer Concentrate S and water (or
concentrate and commercially available premixed windshield washer
solvent/antifreeze, depending on ambient temperatures).
Windshield and headlamp washer fluid

mixing ratio
For temperatures above freezing point, use
MB Windshield Washer Concentrate S
and water:
Warning!
Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly flammable. Do not spill washer

solvent/antifreeze on hot engine parts, because it may ignite and burn. You could be
seriously burned.
1 part S to 100 parts water
[40 ml S to 1 gallon (4 l) water].

For temperatures below freezing point, use
MB Windshield Washer Concentrate S
and commercially available premixed
windshield washer solvent/antifreeze:
1 part S to 100 parts solvent
[40 ml S to 1 gallon (4 l) solvent].
416
Technical data
The following text is published as required
of all manufacturers of passenger cars under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the National
Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of
1966.
Uniform tire quality grading
Quality grades can be found, where applicable, on the tire sidewall between tread
shoulder and maximum section width. For
example:
Tread wear
Traction
Temperature
200
AA
All passenger car tires must conform to

federal safety requirements in addition to
these grades.
Tread wear
Traction
The tread wear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when
tested under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one
and one-half (1) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The
relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly
from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
The traction grades, from highest to lowest

are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tires ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction performance.
Warning!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is

based on straight ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
417
Technical data
Temperature
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tires resistance to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden
tire failure. Grade C corresponds to a level
of performance which all passenger car
tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades
B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than
the minimum required by law.
418
Warning!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause
excessive heat build-up and possible tire
failure.
Technical terms
ABS
(Antilock Brake System)
Prevents the wheels from locking up
during braking so that the vehicle can
continue to be steered.
Alignment bolt
Metal pin with thread. The centering
pin is an aid used when changing a tire
to align the wheel with the wheel hub.
BabySmartTM1 airbag deactivation

system
This system detects if a special system
compatible child restraint seat is installed on the front passenger seat. The
system will automatically deactivate
the passenger front airbag when such a
seat is properly installed (indicator
lamp PASS. AIRBAG OFF in the center
console comes on). See your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for availability.
BabySmartTM compatible child seats
Special restraint system for children.
The sensor system for the passenger
seat prevents deployment of the passenger front airbag if a BabySmartTM
compatible child seat is installed.
BAS
(Brake Assist System)
System for potentially reducing braking
distances in emergency braking situations. The system is activated when it
senses an emergency based on how
fast the brake is applied.
Bi-Xenon headlamps*
Headlamps which use an electric arc as
the light source and produce a more intense light than filament headlamps.
Bi-Xenon headlamps produce low
beam and high beam.

Automotive Corp.
419
Technical terms
CAC
(Customer Assistance Center)
Mercedes-Benz customer service center, which can help you with any questions about your vehicle and provide
assistance in the event of a breakdown.
CAN system
(Controller Area Network)
Data bus network serving to control vehicle functions such as door locking or
windshield wiping.
Cockpit
All instruments, switches, buttons and
indicator/warning lamps in the passenger compartment needed for vehicle
operation and monitoring.
COMAND
(Cockpit Management and Data System)
Information and operating center for
vehicle sound and communications
systems, including the radio and the
navigation system, as well as other optional equipment (CD changer, telephone, etc.).
Control system
The control system is used to call up
vehicle information and to change
component settings. Information and
messages appear in the multifunction
display. The driver uses the buttons on
the multifunction steering wheel to
navigate through the system and to adjust settings.
Cruise control
Driving convenience system for automatically maintaining the vehicle speed
set by the driver.
420
Distronic*
A driving convenience cruise control
system which helps the driver maintain
a pre-selected speed:
If there is no vehicle directly ahead,

the system operates in the same
way as conventional ->cruise control.
If a slower moving vehicle is ahead,

Distronic will reduce your vehicle
speed to the extent permitted by reduced throttle and up to 20% braking power to maintain the preset
minimum following distance.
Technical terms
Engine number
The number set by the manufacturer
and placed on the cylinder block to
uniquely identify each engine produced.
Engine oil viscosity
Measurement for the inner friction (viscosity) of the oil at different temperatures. The higher the temperature an
oil can tolerate without becoming thin,
or the lower the temperature it can tolerate without becoming viscous, the
better the viscosity.
ESP
(Electronic Stability Program)
Improves vehicle handling and directional stability.
ETD
(Emergency Tensioning Device)
Device which deploys in certain frontal
and rear collisions exceeding the system's threshold to tighten the seat
belts.
->SRS
FSS
(Flexible Service System)
Service indicator in the multifunction
display that informs the driver when
the next vehicle maintenance service is
due.
Gear range
Number of gears which are available to
the automatic transmission for shifting.
The automatic gear shifting process
can be adapted to specific operating
conditions using the gear selector lever.
GPS
(Global Positioning System)
Satellite-based system for relaying
geographic location information to and
from vehicles equipped with special receivers. Employs CD digital maps for
navigation.
Head-thorax airbag
Installed in the driver and the front passenger seat, these airbags protect occupants during side impact collisions
exceeding a preset threshold. Unlike
normal side airbags, head-thorax airbags are also designed to provide protection for the head area.
Instrument cluster
The displays and indicator/warning
lamps in the drivers field of vision, including the tachometer, speedometer,
engine temperature and fuel gauge.
KEYLESS-GO*
System for entering and operating the
vehicle without the use of a SmartKey.
Kickdown
Depressing the accelerator past the
point of resistance shifts the transmission down to the lowest possible gear.
This very quickly accelerates the vehicle and should not be used for normal
acceleration needs.
421
Technical terms
Line of fall
The direct line that an object moves
downhill when influenced by the force
of gravity alone.
Lock button
Button on the door which indicates
whether the door is locked or unlocked. Pushing the lock button down
on an individual door from inside will
lock that door.
Memory function*
Used to store three individual seat,
steering wheel and mirror positions for
each SmartKey or, if so equipped,
KEYLESS-GO* feature.
Menu
The control system displays are arranged in menus. Each menu contains
a number of commands for particular
systems. In the Audio menu, for example, you will find the commands Select
radio station or Operate CD player.
Using commands, you can directly
change the settings for your vehicle.
MON
(Motor Octane Number)
The Motor Octane Number for gasoline
as determined by a standardized method. It is an indication of a gasoline's
ability to resist undesired detonation
(knocking). The average of both the
MON (Motor Octane Number) and
->RON (Research Octane Number) is
posted at the pump, also known as
ANTI-KNOCK INDEX.
Multifunction display
Display field in the speedometer used
to present information provided by the
control system.
Steering wheel with buttons for operating the control system.
422
Technical terms
Overspeed range
Engine speeds within the red marking
on the tachometer dial. Avoid this engine speed range, as it may result in serious engine damage that is not
Warranty.
Parktronic (Parking assist)*
System which uses visual and acoustic
signals to assist the driver during parking maneuvers.
Poly-V-belt drive
Drives engine-components (alternator,
AC compressor, etc.) from the engine.
Power train
Collective term designating all components used to generate and transmit
motive power to the drive axles, including
engine
clutch/torque converter
transmission
transfer case
drive shaft
differential
axle shafts/axles

Used to switch the automatic transmission between regular operation S and
comfort operation C.
CLK 55 AMG with steering wheel gearshift control and manual shift program:
In addition to S and C (for regular S or
comfort C operation, see above) you
can use the M for manual shift
program.
423
Technical terms
Remote Vehicle Diagnostics

Transmission of vehicle data and current location to the Mercedes-Benz
Customer Assistance Center for subscribers to Tele Aid service.
REST
(Residual engine heat utilization)
Feature that uses the engine heat
stored in the coolant to heat the vehicle interior for a short time after the engine has been turned off.
Restraint systems
Seat belts, belt tensioners, airbags and
child restraint systems. As independent systems, their protective functions complement one another.
424
Roll bars
Occupant protection system which
consists of tubular steel, integrated in
the rear head restraints. The roll bars
are lowered into the car body during
normal driving conditions and raised
automatically in an accident or in a critical driving situation.
RON
(Research Octane Number)
The Research Octane Number for gasoline as determined by a standardized
method. It is an indication of a gasoline's ability to resist undesired detonation (knocking). The average of both
the ->MON (Motor Octane Number)
and RON (Research Octane Number) is
posted at the pump, also known as
ANTI-KNOCK INDEX.
Shift lock
When the vehicle is parked, this lock
prevents the gear selector lever from
being inadvertently moved out of
position P without SmartKey turned
and brake pedal depressed.
Soft top
Soft top roof that can be opened by
pulling and closed by pressing a switch
and stored in the soft top compartment
in the trunk area.
Speedshift (CLK 55 AMG)
Steering wheel gearshift control. You
can change the gears yourself with the
steering wheel gearshift buttons.
SRS
(Supplemental Restraint System)
Seat belts, emergency tensioning device and airbags. Though independent
systems, they are closely interfaced to
provide effective occupant protection.
Technical terms
Tele Aid System

(Telematic Alarm Identification on Demand)
The Tele Aid system consists of three
types of response: automatic and manual emergency, roadside assistance
and information. Tele Aid is initially activated by completing a subscriber
agreement and placing an acquaintance call.
The Tele Aid system is operational provided that the vehicles battery is
charged, properly connected, not damaged and cellular and GPS coverage is
available.
Tightening torque
Force times lever arm (e.g. a lug
wrench) with which threaded fasteners
such as wheel bolts are tightened.
Tire speed rating
Part of tire designation; indicates the
speed range for which a tire is approved.
Traction
Force exerted by the vehicle on the
road via the tires.
VIN
(Vehicle Identification Number)
The number set by the manufacturer
and placed on the body to uniquely
identify each vehicle produced.
Voice control system*
Voice control system for car phones,
portable cell phones and audio systems (radio, CD, etc.).
Wind screen
Screen for deflecting wind from the vehicle interior when the soft top is
lowered.
Telematics*
A combination of the terms telecommunications and informatics.
425
426
Index
A
ABS 23, 77, 419
Malfunction indicator lamp 312
Messages in display 321
Accelerator position,
automatic transmission 163
Accident
In case of 51
Activating
Air conditioning (cooling) 181
Air recirculation mode 178
Anti-theft alarm system 83
Automatic climate control 173
Central locking (control system) 149
Charcoal filter 179
Distance warning function* 238
Distronic* 233, 234
Easy-entry/exit feature 150
ESP 81
Exterior headlamps 47
Exterior lamps 120
Exterior rear view
mirror parking position 169
Front and rear fog lamp 121, 122
Hazard warning flasher 123
Headlamps 47
High beams 123

Ignition 31
Ignition with KEYLESS-GO* 33
Immobilizer 54, 82
Manual shift programm
CLK 55 AMG 164
Rear window defroster 171
Residual heat 181
Seat ventilation* 113
Steering wheel gearshift
control (CLK 55 AMG) 164
Tow-away alarm 85
Windshield wipers 49
Adding
Coolant 292
Engine oil 291
Additional turn signals 373
Adjustable air vents,
rear passenger compartment 182
Adjusting 34
Air distribution 176
Air volume 177
Backrest tilt 36
Exterior rear view mirror 39
Head restraint height 36
Head restraint tilt 36
Instrument cluster illumination 126
Interior rear view mirror 38
Mirrors 38
Multicontour seat* 112
Seat cushion depth 112
Seat cushion tilt 36
Seat fore and aft adjustment 35
Seat height 36
Seats 34
Steering column in/out 38
Steering column up/down 38
Steering wheel 37
Air conditioning (cooling)
Turning off 181
Turning on 181
Air conditioning refrigerant 412
Air distribution
Adjusting 176
427
Index
Air pressure see Tire inflation pressure

Activating 178
Deactivating 179
Air vents, rear passenger compartment
Adjustable 182
Air volume
Adjusting 177
Airbags 59
BabySmartTM airbag
deactivation system 71, 419
Children 60
Front 63
Head-thorax 63
Passenger 63
Rear side-impact 64
Safety guidelines 62
Alarm
Audible 75, 84, 86
Canceling 84, 86
Visual 83
Alarm system
Anti-theft 83
Alignment bolt 382
Alignment bolt (vehicle tool kit) 419
428
Anticorrosion/antifreeze 415
Antiglare
Automatic 168
Antilock brake system (ABS) 419
Anti-theft alarm system
Arming 83
Canceling alarm 84, 86
Disarming 84
Anti-theft systems 82
Immobilizer 82
Tow-away alarm 84
Aquaplaning see Hydroplaning
Armrest
Storage spaces 251
Ashtray (Center console) 253
Opening 253
Reinstalling 254
Removing 253
Ashtray (Rear seat) 254
Opening 254
Reinstalling 254
Removing 254
At the gas station 284

ATF (automatic transmission fluid) 291
AUDIO menu 134
Selecting radio station 135
Selecting satellite radio* station 135
Audio system 183
Audio and telephone, operation 183
Button and soft key operation 186
Cassette operation 196
CD operation 199
Operating and display elements 184
Operating safety 183
Operation 186
Radio operation 189
Sound system 183
Switching off 186
Switching on 186
Telephone operation 203
Automatic antiglare for
rear view mirror 168
Activating/deactivating
(control system) 149
Locking/unlocking
(central locking switch) 108
Index

Adjusting air distribution 176
Defrosting 177
Setting the temperature 175
Automatic headlamp mode 120
Automatic lighting control
Activating 124
Deactivating 125
Automatic locking when driving 107
Automatic transmission 157

Accelerator position 163
Comfort (C) program mode 163, 164
Emergency operation
(Limp Home Mode) 166
Fluid level 291
Gear ranges 159
Gear selector lever position 157, 160
Gear shifting malfunctions 166
Kickdown 163
Manual (M) program mode 164
Manual shift program
mode (CLK 55 AMG) 164
One-touch gearshifting 158
Program mode selector switch 163
Program mode selector
switch CLK 55 AMG 164
Speedshift (CLK 55 AMG) 161
Sport (S) program mode 163, 164
Starting the engine 44
Transmission fluid 291
Auxiliary fuse box 396
B
BabySmartTM
Airbag deactivation system 71, 419
Compatible child seats 71, 419
Self-test 72
Backup lamps 373, 378
Bulbs 373
BAS 78, 419
Messages in display 322, 323
Batteries, SmartKey
Changing 350
Check lamp 89, 94
Checking 90, 95
Batteries, SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
Changing 351
Check lamp 89, 94
Checking 90, 95
Battery discharged
Jump starting 388
Battery, vehicle 294, 385
Charging 386
Disconnecting 386
Reconnecting 387
Reinstalling 386
Removing 386
429
Index
Bi-Xenon headlamps* 419

Block heater* 301
Blocking
Rear window operation 74
Bolts
For Minispare wheel 347
Brake assist system (BAS) 419
Brake fluid 412
Message in display 327
Brake lamp bulbs 373
Brake lamp, high mounted 373
Brake pads
Brakes 274
Warning lamp 313
Break-in period 272
430
Bulbs, replacing 372

Additional turn signals 373
Backup lamps 373
Brake lamps 373
Fog lamps 373
Front lamps 373
High beam (Bi-Xenon*) 373
High beam (Halogen) 373
High beam flasher (Bi-Xenon*) 373
High beam flasher (Halogen) 373
High mounted brake lamp 373
License plate lamps 373, 378
Low beam (Bi-Xenon*) 373
Low beam (Halogen) 373
Parking lamps 373, 375, 377
Rear fog lamp 373, 378
Side marker lamps 373, 377
Standing lamps 373, 375, 377
Tail lamp assemblies 373, 378
Turn signal lamps 373
Button
Audio system 186
C
CAC (Customer Assistance Center) 420
Calling up
Distronic* settings 137
Range (distance to empty) 153
Service indicator 303
CAN system 420
Canceling
Cruise control 227
Capacities
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. 410
Cassette operation
Playing cassettes 196
Cassette player
Operating 136
Catalytic converter 281
CD changer* 199
CD operation 199
CD player
Operating 136
Center console 25
Lower part 26
PASS. AIRBAG OFF
indicator lamp 319
Upper part 25
Index
Centigrade
Setting temperature units 142
Central locking
Automatic 107
From inside 108
Locking from inside 108
Switch 108
Switching on/off
Unlocking from inside 108
Central locking switch 108
Changing
Batteries (SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO*) 351
Batteries (SmartKey) 350
Key setting 149
Changing CDs 199
Charcoal filter 179
Activating 179
Deactivating 180
Charging
Vehicle battery 386
CHECK ENGINE
malfunction indicator lamp 314
Checking
Coolant level 292
Oil level 286, 289
Tire inflate pressure 286
Vehicle lighting 286
Child safety 69
Airbags 60
Infant and child
restraint systems 64, 69
LATCH child seat anchors 73
Child safety switch see
Blocking of rear window operation
Child seat anchors see
LATCH child seat anchors
Cigarette lighter 254
Cleaning
Cup holder 309
Distronic* system sensor cover 308
Gear selector lever 309
Hard plastic trim items 310
Headlamps 167
Headliner 310
Instrument cluster 309
Leather upholstery 310
Light alloy wheels 309
(CLK 55 AMG) 310
Parktronic* system sensor 308
Plastic and rubber parts 310
Seat belts 310
Soft top 306
Steering wheel 309
Upholstery 310
Windows 309
Windshield 50
Wiper blades 308
Wood trims 310
CLK 55 AMG
Manual shift program mode 164
Clock 23, 144
431
Index
Closing
Cup holder 251
Glove box 250
Hood 288
Side windows 211
Side windows
with KEYLESS-GO* 96, 214
Ski sack roller blind* 217, 248
Soft top 215
Soft top (SmartKey) 223
Soft top (switch) 219
Soft top in an emergency 355
Soft top in an emergency
(with add. locking mechanism) 364
Soft top in an emergency (without
add. locking mechanism) 357
Soft top with KEYLESS-GO* 96
Trunk 100
Windows 210
Windows with KEYLESS-GO* 214
Windows with SmartKey 213
Windows with soft top switch 212
Closing from the inside
Trunk 101
432
Cockpit 20, 420

Cockpit management
and data system (COMAND*) 420
COMAND* 420
COMAND* see separate
operating instructions
Combination switch 123
High beam flasher 48, 123
Turn signals 48
Comfort driving
Transmission program
mode C (Comfort) 163, 164
Consumer information 417
Control and operation
of radio transmitters 281
Control system 129, 420

AUDIO menu 134
Convenience submenu 149
Display digital speedometer 134
Distronic* menu 137
Functions 130, 133
Instrument cluster
submenu 142, 144
Lighting submenu 145
Malfunction memory menu 138
Menus 132, 133, 422
Multifunction display 129
Multifunction steering wheel 130
NAV menu 137
Selecting radio system 135
Selecting satellite radio* system 135
Settings menu 139
Standard display menu 134
Submenus 131, 133
TEL* menu 154
Trip computer menu 152
Vehicle submenu 148
Index
Convenience submenu 149

Activating
easy-entry/exit feature 150
Setting key-dependency 151
Setting parking position
for exterior rear view mirror 151
Coolant 292, 414
Adding 292
Anticorrosion/antifreeze
quantity 414
Capacities 410
Checking level 292
Temperature 283
Temperature indicator 127
Warning lamp 315, 329
Coolant level
Checking 292
Cruise control 226, 420

Canceling 227
Driving downhill 227
Driving uphill 227
Fine adjustment 228
Lever 233
Setting current speed 227
("Resume" function) 228
Cruise control lever 226
Cup holder
Cleaning 309
Closing 251
In the dashboard 251
Opening 251
Customer Assistance Center (CAC)
420
D
Daytime running lamp mode 121
Setting 145, 146
Deactivating
Air conditioning (cooling) 181
Alarm 84
Central locking (control system) 149
Charcoal filter 180
Defrost 177
Distronic* 233, 236
Engine with KEYLESS-GO* 55
Engine with the SmartKey 54
ESP 80
Exterior lamps 120
Headlamps 54
Immobilizer 82
Interior lighting
delayed switch-off 148
Manual shift programm
CLK 55 AMG 165
433
Index
Residual heat 182

(CLK 55 AMG) 165
Tow-away alarm 85
Deceleration
With Distronic* 232
Deep water see Standing water
Defogging
Windshield 176
Defrosting 177
Delayed switch-off
Interior lighting 148
Dialing
A number (telephone) 155
Difficulties
While driving see
Problems while driving
With starting 45
Digital speedometer 134
Direction of rotation (tires) 297
Discharged battery
Jump starting 388
Disconnecting
Vehicle battery 386
434
Display
Selecting 143, 144
Display elements
Audio system 184
Displays
Digital speedometer 134
Distronic* 231
Messages 290, 320
Selecting 143
Showing malfunctions 138
Distance
Decreasing in Distronic* 237
Increasing in Distronic* 237
Setting in Distronic* 236
Warning function 237
Distance to empty (range)
Calling up 152
Activating 238
Deactivating 238
Distance warning lamp 237
Intermittent warning sound 237
Symbol in multifunction display 137
Distronic* 229, 420

Activated 233
Activating 234
Calling up settings 137, 232
Cleaning system sensor 308
Cruise control lever 233
Deactivated 233
Deactivating 236
Deceleration 232
Decreasing distance 237
Decreasing time interval 236
Displays in the speedometer dial 231
Distance warning function 237
Distance warning lamp 316
Driving hints 238
Fine adjustment 235
Increasing distance 237
Increasing time interval 236
Intermittent signal tone 231
Menu 232
Sensor cover 308
Setting a higher speed 234
Setting a lower speed 235
Setting following distance 236
Index
Setting last stored speed

("Resume" function) 235
Setting the current speed 234
Warning and indicator lamps 231
Door control panel 28
Door entry lamps 125
Door handle 28
Door unlock
With Tele Aid 264
Doors
Opening from inside vehicle 97
Opening from outside 89, 94
Downhill driving
Cruise control 227
Downshifting
Manual shift program mode
(CLK 55 AMG) 165
Drinking and driving 273
Driving
General instructions 40, 273
Hydroplaning 277
In winter 279
Problems 51
Safety systems 76
Through standing water 280
Traveling abroad 280
With Distronic* 238
Driving instructions 273
Driving off 275
ABS 77
BAS 78
ESP 79
Driving system
Parktronic* 241
Driving systems 226
Cruise control 226
Distronic* 229
Driving safety systems 76
E
Easy-entry/exit feature 109
Activating 150
Interrupting movement 150
Electrical fuses 394
Electrical system
Technical data 407
Electronic Stability Program see ESP
Emergency call system* 257
Emergency calls
Initiating an emergency call 260
Telephone* 208
With Tele Aid* 258
Emergency operation
(Limp Home Mode) 166
Emergency operations
Closing soft top 355
Closing soft top with
add. locking mechanism 364
Closing soft top without
Locking the vehicle 349
Remote door unlock 264
Unlocking the vehicle 348
Emergency tensioning device see ETD
435
Index
Emission control 282

Emission control label 400
Ending
A call (telephone*) 155
Engine
Compartment 287
Starting 44
Starting with KEYLESS-GO* 44
Starting with the SmartKey 44
Technical data 402
Turning off 54
Engine cleaning 306
Engine compartment 287
Fuse box in 395
Hood 287
Engine malfunction
indicator lamp 23, 314
Engine number 421
436
Engine oil 288, 412

Adding 291
Additives 412
Checking level 289
Consumption 288
Filler cap 291
Filler neck 291
Viscosity 421
Engine oil level see Oil level
ESP 23, 79, 421
Switching off 80
Switching on 81
Warning lamp 316, 317
ETD 421
ETD (Emergency tensioning device)
Exterior lamp switch 119
Exterior rear view mirrors
Adjusting 39
Parking position for 151
67
F
Fahrenheit
Fastening the seat belts 40
Fine adjustment
Cruise control 228
Distronic* 235
First aid kit 343
Flat tire 380
Lowering the vehicle 384
Minispare wheel 346
Mounting the Minispare wheel 380
Preparing the vehicle 380
Flexible Service System (FSS) 302, 421
Floormates*
Installing 255
Removing 255
Floormats* 255
Fog lamp, rear 122, 373
Fog lamps
Replacing bulbs 373
Fog lamps, front
Replacing bulbs 374
Switching on 122
Index
Front airbags 63
Front lamps
Replacing bulbs 373, 374
Switching on 119
Front seat head restraints
Installing 110
Power seat 110
Removing 110
Front seats
Seat heating* 114
Ventilation* 113
FSS (Flexible Service System) 302, 421
Fuel 285
Additives 413
Fuel reserve warning lamp 317
Gasoline additives 413
Premium unleaded
gasoline 285, 411, 413
Requirements 413
Reserve warning 23
Technical data 410
Fuel additives 413
Fuel consumption statistics
After start 152
Since last reset 153
Fuel filler flap 284

Locking 284
Opening 352
Unlocking 284
Fuel requirements 413
Fuel reserve tank
Fuel tank
Capacity 411
Filler flap 284
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Capacities 410
Functions (control system) 130, 133
Resetting 140
Fuse box 394, 395
Fuse chart 394
Fuse extractor 396
Fuses 394
Auxiliary fuse box in trunk 396
Fuse box in
engine compartment 395
Fuse box in
passenger compartment 394
Fuse chart 394
Fuse extractor 396
Spare fuses 396
G
Garage door opener 27, 265
Gasoline see Fuel
Gear range 421
Shifting into optimal 158
Gear range limit
Canceling 158
Gear ranges 159
Displaying in Speedometer 159
Limiting 159
Gear selector lever 23, 352
Cleaning 309
Position 23, 157, 160
Unlocking manually 352
Global
Locking 89
Locking with KEYLESS-GO* 94
Unlocking 89
Unlocking with KEYLESS-GO* 94
Global Positioning System (GPS) 421
Glove box 21, 250
Closing 250
Opening 250
Good visibility 167
GPS 421
437
Index
H
Hands-free microphone 27
Hard plastic trim items
Cleaning 310
Switching off 124
Switching on 123
Head restraints 110
Headlamp cleaning system* 295
Headlamps
Automatic control 120
Bi-Xenon 419
Cleaning 307
Cleaning system* 167, 295
Refilling washer fluid 295
Switching off 54
Switching on 47
Washer fluid 416
Washer system* 416
Headliner
Cleaning 310
Head-thorax airbag 63
In front passenger seat 64
Head-thorax airbags 421
438
Height adjustment
Head restraints 36
High beam flasher 48, 123
Replacing bulbs (Bi-Xenon*) 373
Replacing bulbs (Halogen) 373
High beam headlamps
Replacing bulbs (Halogen) 373, 375
Replacing bulbs for
high beam flasher(Bi-Xenon*) 376
Switching on 123
High mounted brake lamp 373
Hood 287
Closing 288
Opening 287
Hydroplaning 277
I
Identification labels 400
Ignition 31, 33
Switching on 44
Immobilizer 82
Activating 82
Deactivating 82
Indicator lamps see
Lamps, indicator and warning
Infant and child restraint systems 69
Information
About service and warranty 10
Button for Tele Aid* 262
Inside rear view mirror
Antiglare 168
Installing
Floormates* 255
Towing eye bolt 392
Towing eye bolt (CLK 55 AMG) 393
Wind screen 224
Wiper blades 379
Index
Instrument cluster 22, 126, 421

Cleaning 309
Coolant temperature indicator 127
Illumination 126
Lamps in 312318
Outside temperature indicator 128
Selecting language 143
Instruments and controls see Cockpit
Activating automatic control 124
Deactivating automatic control 125
Delayed switch-off 148
Manual operation 125
Interior rear view mirror
Adjusting 38
Interior storage spaces 250
Armrest 251
Glove box 250
Parcel net 253
Storage bags 252
J
Jack 343, 345
Jump starting 388
K
Key, mechanical 348
Key, SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
Changing the batteries 351
Key-dependency memory
Settings 151
KEYLESS-GO* 421
Activating ignition with 33
Closing side windows 96
Closing soft top 96
Closing windows with 214
Factory setting 94
Global locking 94
Global unlocking 94
Important notes 92
Remote controls 91
Turning off the engine 55
Unlocking with 32
Unlocking, trunk lid 96
Kickdown 163, 421
Kilometers/miles in speedometer 142
Km/h or mph in speedometer 142
L
Labels, identification 400
Lamp bulbs, exterior 372
Lamp sensor
Lamps, exterior
Front 373
Light sensor 336
Rear 373
Lamps, indicator and warning
ABS 312
Battery (SmartKey) 89, 94
Brakes 313
Center console 319
CHECK ENGINE 314
Coolant 315, 328
Distance warning 316
Distronic* 231, 237
Engine diagnostics 314
ESP 316, 317
Fuel reserve 317
PASS. AIRBAG OFF 63, 319
Roll bar 317
Seat belts 318
439
Index

SRS 59, 318
Turn signals 23
Language
Setting 143
Folding back 73
Layout of poly-V-belt drive 401
Leather upholstery
Cleaning 310
Lever
For cruise control 226, 233
License plate lamps
Light alloy wheels
Cleaning 309
Technical data 404
Light sensor 336
Lighter see Cigarette lighter
440
Lighting 119
Automatic headlamp mode 120
Combination switch 123
Daytime running lamp mode 121
Door entry lamps 125
Exterior lamp switch 119
Front fog lamps 122
High beam flasher 123
High beams 123
Instrument cluster illumination 126
Interior 124
Locator lighting 121
Low beam 119
Manual headlamp mode 120
Night security illumination 121
Parking lamps 119
Rear fog lamp 122
Settings (control system) 145
Limiting the gear range 159
Limp Home Mode 166
Line of fall 422
Loading 245
Instructions 249
Ski sack* 245
Setting 146
Lock button 422
Lock buttons 422
Door handle (KEYLESS-GO*) 56
Locking 52, 88
Global with KEYLESS-GO* 94
Global, SmartKey 89
The vehicle with KEYLESS-GO* 95
Trunk lid, separately 106
Vehicle in an emergency 349
Loss of Service and
Warranty Information Booklet 399
Loss of SmartKey 91
Loss of SmartKeys
with KEYLESS-GO* 97
Index
Low beam headlamps

Replacing bulbs (Halogen) 373, 375
Lowering
Roll bar manually 354
Vehicle 384
Lubricants
Technical data 410
Luggage cover 216
Folding back 216, 245
Latch 216
M
Main dimensions 408
Maintenance 12, 302
Malfunction
Displaying 138
Malfunction memory 138
Calling up 138
Manual gear shifting
mode M (Manual) 164
Manual headlamp mode 120
Manual operations
Interior lighting control 125
Roll bar 353
Soft top 355
Soft top with
Soft top without
Unlocking gear selector lever 352
Unlocking the drivers door 348
Manual shift program mode (CLK 55 AMG)

Downshifting 165
Upshifting 165
Manual shift programm CLK 55 AMG
Activating 164
Deactivating 165
Manual shift programm mode
CLK 55 AMG 164
MAXCOOL maximum cooling 177
Mechanical key 348
Memory function 116, 422
Recalling positions
from memory 117
mirror parking positions 118
Storing key-dependent settings 117
441
Index
Menus 130
AUDIO 134
Control system 422
Distronic* 137, 232
In control system 132, 133
Malfunction memory 138
NAV 137
Settings menu 139
Standard display 134
Submenus 131
TEL* 154
Trip computer 152
Microphone
Miles/kilometers in speedometer
Setting 142
Minispare wheel 346
Mounting 380
Removing 346
Storing 346
Technical data 406
Wheel bolts 347
442
Mirrors
Activating exterior rear
view mirror parking position 169
Adjusting 38
Automatic antiglare
for rear view mirror 168
Exterior rear view mirror 39
Exterior rear view
mirror parking positions 151
mirror parking position 118
MON 285
MON (Motor Octane Number) 422
Mph or km/h in speedometer 142
Multifunction display 129, 422
Selecting language 143
Standard display 133
Multifunction display messages

ABS 321
BAS 322, 323
Battery 326
Brake fluid 327
Brake pads 327
Check engine 314
Coolant 329
Coolant level 328
Cruise control 323
Display 331
Distronic* 323
Doors 331
Engine 314
Engine oil 332
ESP 324
Fog lamps, front 335
Fuel reserve tank 334
High beam headlamps 335
Hood 334
Key 334
Lamp sensor 336
Lamps 336
License plate lamp 336
Low beam 336
Parking brake 327
Index
Roll bar 338

Selector lever 325
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* 334
Soft top 340
Steering gear oil level 341
Symbol messages 326342
Tele Aid 341
Telephone* 342
Text messages 321325
Trunk 342
Washer fluid 342
Multifunction
steering wheel 24, 130, 422
Buttons 130
N
Navigation system
Operating 137
See separate COMAND*
operating instructions
Night security illumination 121
Nubuck leather upholstery (CLK 55 AMG)
Cleaning 310
O
Occupant safety 58
Airbags 59
Children and airbags 60
Children in the vehicle 69
Fastening the seat belts 40
Infant and child restraint systems 69
Seat belts 40, 62
Odometer, main 23
Oil
Adding 291
Checking level 289
Consumption 288
Filler cap 291
Filler neck 291
Viscosity 421
Oil level
Checking 286
Canceling gear range limit 158
Downshifting 158
Upshifting 158
Opening
Cup holder 251
Doors from the inside 97
Fuel filler flap manually 352
Glove box 250
Hood 287
Side windows 211
Ski sack roller blind* 217, 245
Soft top 215
Soft top (SmartKey) 222
Soft top (switch) 218
Trunk 98
Trunk from the inside 99
Windows 210
Windows with SmartKey 213
Windows with soft top switch 212
443
Index
Opening from the inside

Trunk 100
Operating
Audio system 183
Cassette player 136
CD player 136
COMAND* see
separate operating instructions
Navigation system 137
Radio 135
Radio transmitters 281
Telephone* 154, 183, 203
Vehicle outside the
USA and Canada 13
Operating roll bar manually 353
Operating safety
Audio system 183
Operators Manual 10
Ornamental moldings 307
Outside temperature indicator 128
Overdue service 302
Overhead control panel 27
Overspeed range 423
444
P
Paintwork 305
Panic alarm 75
Panic button on SmartKey 75
Parcel net in
front passenger footwell 253
Parking 52, 275
Parking assist* see Parktronic*
Parking brake 46, 53
Engaging 53
Releasing 46
Parking lamps
Replacing bulbs 373, 375, 377
Switching on 119
Parking position
Exterior rear
view mirrors 118, 151, 169
Parktronic* 241, 423
Sensor 308
Parts see Spare parts service
PASS. AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp 319
Passenger airbags 63
Passenger compartment 280

Fuse box in 394
Parcel net in
front passenger footwell 253
Storage bags,
rear side of the front seats 252
Passenger safety see Occupant safety
Pedals 273
Phone book*
Loading 155
Quick search 156
Phone number*
Dialing 155
Redialing 156
Plastic and rubber parts
Cleaning 310
Playing
CDs 201
Poly-V-belt drive 423
Layout 401
Index
Positions (Memory function)

Recalling from memory 117
Storing into memory 117
Power assistance 273
Power seat
Adjusting backrest tilt 36
Adjusting head restraint height 36
Adjusting head restraint tilt 36
Adjusting seat cushion tilt 36
Adjusting seat height 36
Front seat head restraints 110
Seat fore and aft adjustment 35
Power train 423
Power washer 305
Power windows 210
Blocking of rear window operation 74
Side windows 210
Synchronizing 214
Practical hints
First aid kit 343
Fuses 394
Lamp in center console 319
Lamps in instrument cluster 312
Messages in the display 320
Minispare wheel 346
Minispare wheel bolts 347
Towing the vehicle 390
Unlocking/locking
in an emergency 348
Vehicle jack 345
Vehicle tool kit 343
Premium unleaded gasoline 413
Problems
While driving 51
With vehicle 17
Product information 9
Program mode selector switch 423
Automatic transmission 163
Automatic transmission,
CLK 55 AMG 164
Q
Quick search
Phone book*
156
R
Radio
Selecting stations 135
Station search 135
Station selection setting 149
Radio operation 189
Radio see Radio operation
Radio transmitters,
control and operation 281
Radio*
Selecting stations (satellite) 135
Range (distance to empty)
Calling up 153
Reading lamp 27
Rear fog lamp 373
Bulb 373
Switching on 122
Rear lamp bulbs
Replacing 378
Rear lamps see Tail lamps
445
Index
Rear passenger compartment

Adjustable air vents 182
Rear seat head restraints
Lowering with lower switch 111
Raising 111
Rear seats
Rear seat head restraints 111
Rear side-impact airbags 64
Rear view mirror automatic antiglare 168
Rear view mirrors see Mirrors
Rear window
Blocking operation 74
Activating 171
Deactivating 171
Reconnecting
Vehicle battery 387
Refrigerant
Air conditioning 412
Refueling 284
Regular checks 286
446
Reinstalling
Reinstalling vehicle battery 386
Remote controls
SmartKey 88, 92
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* 91
Remote door unlock
With Tele Aid 264
Remote Vehicle Diagnostics 424
Removing
Floormates* 255
Minispare wheel 346
Ski sack* 248
Vehicle battery 386
Wheel 382
Wind screen 225
Wiper blades 379
Replacing
Backup lamp bulbs 378
Brake lamp bulbs 378
Bulbs 372
Front lamp bulbs 374
Front turn signal bulbs (Halogen) 375
Fuses 396
High beam bulbs (Halogen) 375
High beam bulbs for
high beam flasher (Bi-Xenon*) 376
License plate lamp bulbs 378
Low beam bulbs (Halogen) 375
Parking lamp bulbs 375, 377
Rear fog lamp bulb 378
Rear lamp bulbs 373, 378
Rear turn signal bulbs 378
Side marker lamp bulbs 377
Standing lamp bulbs 375, 377
Wiper blades 379
Index
Reporting
Safety defects 18
Reset button in the
instrument cluster 139
Resetting
All functions (control system) 139
All functions of a submenu 140
Fuel consumption 153
Last stored speed ("Resume" function)
in Distronic* 235
Service indicator (FSS) 303
Trip odometer 127
Residual heat utilization 181, 424
Residual ventilation 181
REST
(Residual engine heat utilization) 424
Restraint system see
Infant and child restraint systems
Rims 403
Roadside assistance 12
Tele Aid* 260
Roll bar 68, 424
Lowering manually 354
Operating manually 353
Warning lamp 317
RON 285
RON (Research Octane Number)
Rotating wheels 299
Rubber parts
Cleaning 310
424
S
Safety
Occupant 58
Safety belts see Seat belts
Safety defects
Reporting 18
Safety systems
Driving 76
Searching
Radio station 135
Seat belt force limiter 67
Seat belts 64
Cleaning 310
Fastening 40
Proper use of 42, 66
Warning lamp 318
Seat cushion depth
Adjusting 112
447
Index
Seat heating* 114

Switching on/off rapid heating
with seat ventilation* 115
Switching on/off rapid heating
without seat ventilation* 114
Switching on/off seat heating
Switching on/off seat heating
Switching off 113
Switching on 113
Seats 109
Adjusting 34
Easy entry/exit feature 109
Seat heating* 114
Selecting
Display 143
Selecting display 144
448
Selector lever
Lock 44
Self-test
BabySmartTM
airbag deactivation system 72
Tele Aid* 258
Service
Calling up the service indicator 303
Major service (Service B) 302
Minor service (Service A) 302
Overdue 302
Spare parts 398
Types 302
When due 302
Service (maintenance) 302
Service and Warranty Booklet
Loss of 399
Service and warranty information 10
Calling up 303
Clearing 302, 303
Service life (tires) 297
Service System see FSS
Setting
Convenience functions 141, 149
Cruise control 227
Daytime running
lamp mode 145, 146
Distronic* time interval 236
Following distance in Distronic* 236
Higher speed in cruise control 228
Higher speed in Distronic* 234
Hours (clock) 144
Individual vehicle settings 139
Interior lighting
delayed switch-off 148
Key-dependent memory 151
Lamps and lighting
Language, multifunction display 143
Lower speed in cruise control 228
Lower speed in Distronic* 235
Miles/kilometers
in speedometer 142
Minutes (clock) 145
Parking position for exterior
rear view mirrors 151
Index
Slower speed in cruise control 228

Speed in Distronic* 234
Speedometer display mode 142
Station selection mode 149
Temperature (interior) 175
Temperature indicator 142
To last stored speed
("Resume" function)
in cruise control 228
Units
Speedometer 142
Temperature 142
Setting current speed
Cruise control 227
Settings
Calling up Distronic* 137, 232
Convenience functions 149
Factory, KEYLESS-GO* 94
Factory, SmartKey 89
Individual (SmartKey) 151
Lighting (control system) 145
Menus and submenus 131
Resetting all (control system) 139
Resetting in the submenu 140
Selective 89, 94
Settings menu
Functions in 139
Individual vehicle settings 139
Submenus 140
Shift lock 424
Shifting
Gear selector lever positions 160
Into optimal gear range 158
Side marker lamps
Side windows
Automatic opening 211
Cleaning 309
Closing 210, 211, 212, 213
Closing with KEYLESS-GO* 96, 214
Closing with SmartKey 213
Closing with soft top switch 212
Opening 210, 211, 212, 213
Opening fully 211
Opening with SmartKey 213
Opening with soft top switch 212
Stopping 212
Synchronizing power windows 214
Signal strength (telephone*) 154

Simultaneous wiping and washing
Single wipe 49
Ski sack roller blind* 217
Closing 217, 248
Opening 217, 245
Ski sack* 245
Removing 248
Unfolding and loading 245
Unloading and folding 247
449
Index
SmartKey 88
Battery check lamp 89, 94
Changing the batteries 350
Checking the batteries 90, 95
Closing soft top 223
Factory setting 89
Global locking 89
Global unlocking 89
Locking and unlocking 88
Loss of 91
Opening and closing
windows with 213
Opening soft top 222
Positions in starter switch 31
Remote controls 88, 92
Restoring to factory setting 89, 94
Selective setting 89, 94
Unlocking with 30
450

Checking the batteries 90, 95
Global locking and unlocking 94
Loss of 97
Remote controls 91
Restoring to factory setting 89, 94
Unlocking with 32
Snow chains 301
Soft keys
Audio system 186
Soft top 215, 424

Cleaning 306
Closing (SmartKey) 223
Closing (switch) 219
Closing with KEYLESS-GO* 96
Emergency operations 355
Emergency operations (with
Emergency operations (without
Locking after raising/lowering 220
Luggage cover 216
Manual operations 355
Manual operations (with
Manual operations (without
Opening (SmartKey) 222
Opening (switch) 218
Opening and closing 215
Opening and closing
windows with 212
Unlocked status when stopped 221
Unlocked status while driving 221
Wind screen 223
Index
Soft top switch 218, 219

Sound system 183
Spare fuses 396
Spare parts service 398
Speed
Setting current 227
Setting last stored speed
("Resume" function)
in Distronic* 235
Speed settings
Cruise control 228
Distronic* 234, 235
To last stored speed
("Resume" function)
in Cruise control 228
Speed shift 424
Speedometer 23
Displaying gear range 159
Distronic* displays 231
Settings units 142
Speedometer display mode
Selecting 142
Speedshift (CLK 55 AMG) 161
SRS 66, 424

Indicator lamp 318
Standard driving
mode S (Sport) 163, 164
Standing lamps 119
Replacing bulbs 373, 375, 377
Standing water
Starter switch 21, 31
Positions 31
Starting difficulties 45
Starting position 31
Station (radio)
Search 135
Station selection
Setting 149
Steering column
In/out adjustment 38
Up/down adjustment 38
Steering gear oil
Steering wheel 37
Adjusting 37
Buttons 24
Cleaning 309
Height adjustment 38
Activating 164
Deactivating 165
Downshifting 162
Upshifting 162
Stolen vehicle
Tracking services 265
Stopping
Windows 212
Storage bags 252
Storage compartments
Glove box 250
Storage spaces
Cup holder 251
Storing
Minispare wheel 346
Storing (Memory function)
Positions into memory 117
451
Index
Submenus
Convenience 149
For settings 131
In control system 133
Instrument cluster 142, 144
Lighting 145
Resetting functions
in Control system 140
Selecting 140
Settings menu 140
Vehicle 148
Sun visors 170
Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) 424
Switching off
Audio system 186
Engine 54
ESP 80
Headlamps 54
452
Switching on
Audio system 186
ESP 81
Front fog lamps 122
Front lamps 119
Headlamps 47
High beams 123
Parking lamps 119
Rear fog lamp 122
Symbol (Distronic*)
Synchronizing
Power windows 214
T
Tachometer 23, 127
Overspeed range 127
Overspeed range (CLK 55 AMG) 127
Tail lamps
Cleaning 307
Tar stains 305
Technical data 412
Brake fluid 412
Coolant 410
Coolants 414
Electrical system 407
Engine 402
Engine oil 412
Engine oil additives 412
Fuel requirements 413
Fuels 410
Lubricants 410
Main dimensions 408
Premium unleaded gasoline 413
Rims and tires 403
Weights 409
Windshield and headlamp
washer* system 411, 416
Index
Tele Aid
Information 262
Initiating an
emergency call manually 260
Remote door unlock 264
Roadside assistance 260
Stolen vehicle tracking services 265
Tele Aid System 257
Tele Aid System 425
Tele Aid* 257
Emergency calls 258
System self-check 258
Upgrade signals 263
Telematics* 425
Telephone* 24, 256

Answering a call 155
Dialing a number from
the phone book 155
Emergency call 208
Ending a call 155
Loading phone book* 155
Operating 154
Operation 203
Redialing 156
Temperature
Display mode 142
Grades of tires 418
Setting units in display 142
Tires 298
Tightening torque 425
Tightening torque (Wheel bolts) 384
Time
Setting hours 144
Setting minutes 145
Tire inflation pressure

Checking 286, 298
Tire speed rating 278, 425
Tire traction 277
Tires 403
Consumer information 417
Direction of rotation 297
Retreads 296
Rims and tires 403
Service life 297
Temperature 298
Temperature grades 418
Tires and wheels 296
Tread depth 300
Wear pattern 299
Winter 300
Tools 343
Tow-away alarm 25, 84
Arming 85
Disarming 85
Disarming for transport 84
453
Index
Towing eye bolt (vehicle tool kit)

CLK 320/CLK 500 392
CLK 55 AMG 393
Installing 392
Installing (CLK 55 AMG) 393
Towing the vehicle 390
Tracking services
For stolen vehicle 265
Traction 163, 417, 425
Transmission see Automatic transmission
Traveling abroad 280
Tread depth (tires) 300
Tread wear 417
Trip computer 152
Trip odometer
Resetting 127
454
Trunk
Auxiliary fuse box 396
Closing 100
Closing from the inside 101
Lock button, KEYLESS-GO* 95
Locking separately 106
Luggage cover 216
Opening 98
Opening from inside vehicle 99
Opening from the inside 100
Trunk lid 98, 100, 101
Trunk lock 349
Unlocking separately 107
Unlocking with KEYLESS-GO* 96
Unlocking with SmartKey 90
Trunk lid emergency release 105
Trunk lid opening/closing system* 100
Turn signal lamps
Replacing bulbs 373
Turn signals 48
Additional in mirrors 373
Cleaning lenses 307
Front bulbs 373
Front bulbs (Bi-Xenon*) 377
Front bulbs (Halogen) 375
Indicator lamps 23
Rear bulbs 373, 378
Turning off
Engine 54
Index
U
Units
Setting speedometer units 142
Unlocking 30, 88
Drivers door in an emergency 348
Gear selector lever manually 352
Global with KEYLESS-GO* 94
Global, SmartKey 89
In an emergency 348
Selective setting 89, 94
Trunk lid with KEYLESS-GO* 96
Trunk lid with SmartKey 90
Trunk lid, separately 107
Vehicle in an emergency 264
With KEYLESS-GO* 32
With the SmartKey 30
Upgrade signals
Tele Aid* 263
Uphill driving
Cruise control 227
Upholstery
Cleaning 310
Upshifting
Manual shift program mode
(CLK 55 AMG) 165
(CLK 55 AMG) 162
Useful features 250
Cigarette lighter 254
Floormats* 255
Interior storage spaces 250
Tele Aid* 257
Telephone* 256
V
Vehicle
Individual settings 139, 141
Locking 25
Locking in an emergency 349
Lowering 384
Service battery 385
Towing 390
Unlocking 25
Unlocking in an emergency 348
Vehicle battery 385
Vehicle care 304
Cup holder 309
Distronic* system sensor cover 308
Engine cleaning 306
Gear selector lever 309
Hard plastic trim items 310
Headlamps 307
Leather upholstery 310
Light alloy wheels 309
455
Index

(CLK 55 AMG) 310
Ornamental moldings 307
Paintwork 305
Parktronic* system sensor 308
Plastic and rubber parts 310
Power washer 305
Seat belts 310
Soft top 306
Steering wheel 309
Tail lamps 307
Tar stains 305
Turn signals 307
Upholstery 310
Vehicle washing 306
Window cleaning 309
Wiper blades 308
Wood trims 310
Vehicle jack 345
Vehicle lighting
Checking 286
456

Alignment bolt 343
Fuse Extractor 343
Hex wrench (in literature pouch) 343
Removing 344
Spare fuses 343
Straps for soft top
emergency operation 343
Towing eye bolt 343
Vehicle jack 343
Wheel bolts 343
Wheel wrench 343
Vehicle washing 306
VIN (Vehicle Identification Number) 425
Voice control system* 425
W
Warning sounds
Distronic* 231
Drivers seat belts 64
Parking brake 46
Warranty coverage 399
Washer fluid see Windshield washer fluid
Washing the vehicle 304
Wear pattern (tires) 299
Weights 409
Wheel bolts
For Minispare wheel 347
Wheel change
Tightening torque 384
Wheels
Rotating 299
Tires and wheels 296
Wind screen 223, 425
Installing 224
Removing 225
Windows see Side windows
Index
Windshield
Defogging 176
Refilling washer fluid 295
Replacing wiper blades 379
Washer fluid 295, 416
Washer system 416
Windshield washer fluid 416
Mixing ratio 416
Refilling 295
Wiping with 50
Windshield washer system 416
Windshield wipers 48, 167
Fast wiper speed 49
Intermittent wiping 49
Replacing wiper blades 379
Single wipe 49
Switching on 48
Wiping with windshield
washer fluid 50
Winter driving 300

Block heater* 301
Snow chains 301
Tires 300
Winter driving instructions 279
Winter tires 300
Wiper blades
Cleaning 308
Installing 379
Removing 379
Replacing 379
Wiping
And washing simultaneously 50
Interval 49
With windshield washer fluid 50
Wood trims
Cleaning 310
X
Xenon headlamps
Bi-Xenon 419
457
458
Service and Literature

Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center has trained technicians and original Mercedes-Benz parts to service your vehicle properly. For
expert advice and quality service, see your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
If you are interested in obtaining service literature for your vehicle, please contact your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. We consider
this the best way for you to obtain accurate information for your vehicle.
For further information you can find us on the Mercedes-Benz web-site www.mbusa.com or www.mercedes-benz.ca.
Warning!
To help avoid personal injury, be extremely careful when performing any service work or repairs. Improper or incomplete service or the use of
incorrect or inappropriate parts or materials may damage the vehicle or its equipment, which may in turn result in personal injury.
If you have questions about carrying out any type of service, turn to the advice of an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
We reserve the right to modify the technical details of the vehicle as given in the data and illustrations of this Operators Manual. Reprinting, translation and copying, even of excerpts, is not permitted without our prior authorization in writing.
Title illustration no. P00.01-2472-31
Date to press 08/14/03
GSP/TIP
Printed in Germany

Manual Mercedes CLK PDF

Uploaded by

Document Informationclick to expand document informationThis manual is designed to acquaint you with the operation of Your Mercedes-Benz. Please pay attention to the warnings and cautions contained in this manual. Your vehicle represents the efforts of many skilled engineers and craftsmen.

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual Mercedes CLK PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual Mercedes CLK PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

CLK 320

Our company and staff congratulate you

Please read this manual carefully, then

Your selection of our product is a demonstration of your trust in our company

Please follow the recommendations

Please pay attention to the warnings

We extend our best wishes for many miles

Getting started ...................................

Safety and Security ...........................

Controls in detail ............................... 87

Memory function ...............................

Control system ..................................

Good visibility ..................................... 167

Audio system...................................... 183

At the gas station ..............................

Practical hints .................................. 311

Replacing bulbs .................................. 372

Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. .........

Technical terms............................... 419

We are unable to make an assessment for

Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts as well as

We continuously strive to improve our

Service and warranty information

New Car Limited Warranty,

Optional equipment is also described in

Emission System Warranty,

Emission Performance Warranty,

California, Maine, Massachusetts, and

State Warranty Enforcement Laws

If there are any equipment details that are

The Service and Warranty Information

(1) the same substantial defect or malfunction results in a condition that is

(3) the vehicle is out of service by reason

Change of address or ownership

The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance

will be answered by Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Representatives

If you change your address, be sure to

For additional information refer to the

If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all

Always have the Service Booklet with you

1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA)

If you bought this vehicle used, be sure to

service facilities or replacement parts

Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC

Here you will find detailed information

Safety and Security

Here you will find all the information you

this Operators Manual

the Service Booklet

Separate operating instructions will be

Optional equipment is identified

This symbol points to instructions for

A number of these symbols appearing

This continuation symbol marks

In the glossary of technical

Words appearing in the multifunction display are printed in

This symbol tells you where to